JP6664674B1 - Game console - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game table having a display means, with regard to a game table such as a ball game machine (pachinko machine) or a spinning drum game machine (slot machine). SOLUTION: Both the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device and the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device may be simultaneously executed. The big hit game is started when the game ball passes the big hit generation gate 252 during the period when the big hit generation gate monitoring state started after the big hit symbol is displayed. In the special figure low probability general figure low probability state, after the big hit pattern is displayed on the second special figure display device, the big hit start effect display is displayed, and then the display promoting the passage of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is displayed. In a special probability low probability normal figure low probability state, after the big hit pattern is displayed on the second special figure display device, the big hit start effect is not displayed and the passage of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is promoted. The display may be displayed. [Selection diagram] Fig. 42

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming table represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a torso game machine (slot machine).

  In gaming tables such as pachinko machines, the game area of the game board is provided with obstacles that change the direction in which the game balls fall, prize holes where game balls can be won, start ports, variable prize holes, etc. General. When a game ball wins, a bonus is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  Further, among such gaming tables, those provided with display means are known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming table having a characteristic display means.

A game console of the present invention that solves the above object,
First symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
Game control means that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states,
A certain gate through which game balls can enter;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming table with
There is a case where both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed simultaneously,
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display,
The symbol variation effect display is a display including a variation display of a decorative symbol,
In the first gaming state, the symbol fluctuation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol fluctuation display,
In the first game state, the symbol variation effect display according to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started,
A certain period is started after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means,
Even after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the certain period is started,
When a game ball enters the certain gate during the certain period, a big hit game is started ,
One display of the previous Symbol multiple of the display is a gate entry promotion display,
One of the plurality of displays is a first standby effect display,
One of the plurality of displays is a gate approach standby state display,
The gate entry promotion display is a display that prompts a game ball to enter the certain gate,
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed,
The first standby effect display is a display including a display of a mode in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed,
The gate entry standby state display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period,
Wherein in the first game condition, previous display Symbol gate enters promoted after big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means is displayed,
There is a case where both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby state display are displayed,
There is a case where both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display are displayed.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming table of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic display means.

It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment from the front side (the player side). It is the rear view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. (A) is a schematic front view of the game board viewed from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on a main control lamp board arranged on the game board. FIG. It is a figure explaining the composition of a variable winning device. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. It is an example of the display symbol of a pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative symbol And (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol in a normal figure. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a main control unit main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a table for judging whether or not to accept a figure, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the tables for judging whether the figure is a special figure 1.2 or (c). It is a figure showing an example of the contents of the distribution table for use. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part of a pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-controller timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part of a pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part timer interrupt processing, (d) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part image control processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the dip switch substrate. (A) is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation when the special figure 2 has a big hit during the special figure 1 change, and (b) is a timing chart illustrating that the special figure 2 has a small hit during the special figure 1 change. 6 is a timing chart for explaining an example of an operation when the operation has been performed. (A) is a timing chart illustrating an example of an operation in each symbol display device in the normal game state, and (b) illustrates an example of an operation in each symbol display device in the case of a small hit in the normal game state. It is a timing chart. It is a flowchart explaining a 1st setting suggestion effect execution process. It is a flowchart explaining a notice effect determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the suggestion effect selection process at the time of the first big hit. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the continuous notice selection table at the time of SP reach selection, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of SP reach selection, (c) It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the initial normal big hit re-lottery selection, and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first probability change big hit re-lottery selection. It is a figure explaining the contents of the number-of-ball-out setting suggestion effect selection table, (a) is a figure showing an example of the content of the number-of-ball-out setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 4, (b) is a figure It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the number-of-ball-out setting suggestion effect selection table for 5, and (c) is a figure which shows an example of the content of the number-of-ball-out setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 6. (A) is a timing chart explaining an example of an operation in each symbol display device when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts during the small hitting game in the normal game state, and (b) is a small timing chart in the normal game state. It is a timing chart explaining an example of operation in each symbol display device when it hits. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect concerning a decoration design change display centering on a decoration design display device of a pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 21. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect in a big hit game centering on a decorative design display device. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect in a probable game state centering on a decorative design display device. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect centering on a decorative design display device in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect centering on a decorative design display device in steps. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a re-lottery production centering on a decoration design display. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of a setting suggestion effect in a big hit game state centering on a decorative symbol display device. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a continuous announcement effect centering on a decorative design display. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of a setting suggestion effect in decoration design change display centering on a decoration design display device. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of a setting suggestion effect in decoration design change display centering on a decoration design display device. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect centering on a decorative design display device in steps. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an endowment effect centering on a decorative design display device. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of a pre-reading notice effect centering on a decorative design display device. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect concerning decoration design change display centering on a decoration design display device. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect concerning decoration design change display centering on a decoration design display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect regarding the display of the total acquired prize ball centering on the decorative design display device in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect regarding the display of the total acquired prize ball centering on the decorative design display device in steps. It is a timing chart explaining an example of a process from the stop of the big hit symbol to the end of the big hit game. It is an example of the production centering on a decorative design display device, and is a figure which shows the production example performed until a big hit game starts in a stepwise manner. This is an example of an effect centered on a decorative symbol display device, and is an example of an effect when the symbol change display of the special figure 1 starts during the change of the symbol of the special figure 2 which becomes a big hit during the effect of the animation demonstration as the standby effect. It is a figure showing step by step. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative design display device, and is a figure which shows step by step an example of an effect in the case of a big hit in the special figure 2 during the effect of the symbol demonstration which is a standby effect. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative design display device, and is a figure which shows step by step another example of an effect when a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the effect of the symbol demonstration which is a standby effect. It is an example of an effect | action centering on a decorative design display apparatus, and is a figure which shows the example of an effect in case the big hit hits in special figure 2 during the animation demonstration which is a stand-by effect. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative design display device, and is a figure which shows step by step an example of an effect in a case where the transition to the menu screen is possible and a case in which the transition is restricted during execution of the standby effect. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on a decorative design display device in steps. It is an example of the production centering on the decorative design display device, and is a view showing step by step another production example performed until the big hit game starts. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device, and is a figure which shows step by step another example of an effect performed until a big hit game is started in a probable change state. It is an example of an effect | action centering on a decoration design display apparatus, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case where a power cut-off and a power recovery generate | occur | produces during execution of the gate entrance waiting effect in steps. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative design display device, and is a figure which shows step by step an example of an effect when a small hit occurs in special figure 2 during the effect of the animation demonstration which is a standby effect. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative design display device, and is a figure which shows step by step another example of an effect in the case of a small hit in the special figure 2 during the effect of an animation demonstration which is a standby effect. It is an example of an effect | action centering on a decoration design display device, and is a figure which shows step by step an example of an effect when a game ball wins to the 1st special figure starting opening during the animation demonstration which is a standby effect. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device, and showing another example of an effect in a case where a game ball is awarded to the first special figure starting port during the effect of the animation demonstration as a standby effect. is there. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device, and is a figure which shows step by step an example of an effect when a game ball wins to the first special figure starting port during an effect of a symbol demonstration which is a standby effect. It is an example of an effect centering on a decorative design display device, and is a figure which shows the example of an effect of a single announcement notice effect in stages. 1 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the slot machine applicable to this invention from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game console by the modification of this invention, (a) shows a casino machine, (b) shows the mobile telephone provided with the memory | storage part which stores the electronic data which implements this invention, (c) ) Shows a portable game machine provided with a storage section for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home video game provided with a storage section for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. (E) shows a data server which stores electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 and a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console that allows a player to obtain a profit when predetermined conditions are satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape to be fixed to an installation place (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertical rectangular game machine base shaft body rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk of a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, with a locking function via a hinge 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and is also provided with a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are mounted on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, an LED as a light source is also called a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 below the main body 104 so as to be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is opened by pressing an open lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor 1082 with a ball storage tray for detecting that the door with a ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate includes an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be completely stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. The ball launch handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, a production button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 2) by the operation of the player, and a production button 136 that are built in A button button 138 for causing the button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and an instruction for returning the player's balance to the card unit. And a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the status of the card unit. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full by game balls. Further, an operation key unit 190 is provided.

  The firing device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a firing rod 146 that rotates when a ball firing handle 134 is operated by a player, and a firing hammer 148 that strikes a game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , Is provided. While the ball launching handle 134 is being continuously operated by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (eg, 0.6 seconds). It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the back.

  At the upper back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor inside. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when connected to a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket temporarily holds the game ball flowing down into the payout device 152 through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thereby, the game balls temporarily staying are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs one of a high signal and a low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 5). The game balls that have passed through the payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the condition, a game value (game ball) in an amount corresponding to the grant condition is given (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 constituting a main control section 300 (see FIG. 5) for performing a control process of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-controller 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 5) that performs control processing related to production, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls ( (See FIG. 5) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by operation of a game clerk, and launching of a game ball. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 5) that performs a control process, and a power control section 660 (see FIG. 5) that supplies power to various electric game machines, A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power supply by operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated at power on; Also, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  In this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio / setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In the present embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, a setting change mode in which any of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities can be set. Can be migrated to. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and the clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on, the configuration may be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on.

  The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and arranged inside the main board case 158, and is attached so as to be visible to a store clerk. As shown in FIG. 12 (A), the accessory ratio / setting display 196 has two-digit seven-segment LEDs arranged vertically and a single-digit seven-segment LED on the right side as a module. , The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator for notifying the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for confirming the current setting. The accessory ratio / setting display 196 is constituted by, for example, a red single-color LED, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. Note that at least a part of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 may be provided, for example, on the game board 200 so as to be visible to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is provided on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch substrate 198 will be described later.

  FIG. 3A is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 as viewed from the front. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate directions in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction of the pachinko machine 100 (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction), and the left hand and the right hand may be referred to as left and right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction of the pachinko machine 100 (sometimes referred to as the up-down direction), and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower. Although not shown in FIG. 3, in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 100 (sometimes called the front-back direction), the near side may be called front or front, and the back side may be called back or back.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  The mounting structure of the game board 200 with respect to the main body 104 can adopt various structures. For example, the front view left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 in front view (on the hinge portion 112 side). A structure in which the right side 200b of the game board 200 in a front view is pressed against the main body 104 and set by rotating the game board 200 about the center of rotation can be adopted. With such a structure, workability can be improved. There are cases.

  The game board 200 is a unit in which various components are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed of, for example, a resin, and its surface (front) forms a decorative surface on which a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which the character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. At the lower right of the main body 201, a vibration sensor SR3 is provided. When the vibration is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, an error process (for example, notification by an image or sound, a game stop that disables the continuation of the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 on which game balls can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104. In the game area 124, an area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding a shot game ball.

  An area other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as a non-game area. The game area 124 and the non-game area can be distinguished by using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, a region inside the region through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be called at least the game region 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which a game ball does not pass due to the presence of an effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be referred to as the non-flow-down area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of the effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

  A decorative symbol display device 208 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the game area 124. As shown in FIG. 3B, the main control lamp board 254 has an ordinary symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol. Display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, ordinary symbol holding lamp 216, first special symbol holding lamp 218, second special symbol holding lamp 220, high-accuracy middle lamp RK, and electric support middle lamp An RD, a right-handed lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are provided. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as “Public symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “Special symbol”.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and a left symbol display area 208a and a middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the position and size of each of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative design display device 208, it is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image, and is configured by two LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and in this embodiment, are configured by two LEDs.

  The general figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure changing games (details will be described later) that are held, and in the present embodiment, the general figure changing game is held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure changing games held, and in the present embodiment, the first special figure changing game is held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible. In addition, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

  The high-probability middle lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or that a high-probability state is set. The electric support in-progress lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and that the electric tulip blade member 231a described later is in the electric support state in which it is easy to open for a long time. The right-handed display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in the big hitting game state, the probable change state, and the power support state, and that the player can benefit from the right-handed state. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game relating to the jackpot when the jackpot has been hit.

  A predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226a, a general figure starting port 228, first special figure starting ports 230 and 231, and a big hit generating gate 252 are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a variable winning device 2340 is provided at a lower right portion of the game area 124.

  One or more general winning openings 226a are provided at appropriate places in the game area 124. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a.

 When a ball enters the general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball and determines that the general winning opening 226a has been won, and drives the payout device 152 to award a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls. The ball is discharged to the upper plate 126. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with such a configuration, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of general winning holes are provided, a ball may be detected by a different ball detection sensor, or each of the plurality of general winning holes may be provided. The ball paths for guiding the game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. In the case where a plurality of general winning ports are provided on the right side of the game area 124, the ball paths for guiding the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. However, each of them may be detected by a different ball detection sensor. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The general-purpose starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the general-purpose starting port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side, but a predetermined number (for example, one) of prizes is obtained when the ball is entered. In addition to paying out the ball, the entered game ball may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the general-purpose starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general-purpose change game using the general-purpose display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, two first special figure starting ports 230 and 231 are arranged vertically below the center of the game board 200. In the following description, for convenience, the first special figure starting port 230 provided above is referred to as “first special figure starting port (upper) 230”, and the first special figure starting port 231 provided below is referred to as “first special figure starting port 230”. It may be referred to as “first special figure starting port (lower) 231”. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are set as prize balls. At the same time as discharging to the plate 126, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, it is difficult to enter a game ball into the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 when right-handed. ing. In this embodiment, regardless of whether the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 perform the variable display of the other special figure, the specification for starting the variable display of the special figure (such as this). A pachinko machine with a specific specification is sometimes called a "simultaneous fluctuation machine".)

  The first special figure starting port (lower) 231 is configured by an electric tulip (electric chewing), is disposed below the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, and includes a blade member 231a that can be opened and closed right and left. When the wing member 231a is closed, it is impossible to enter the ball, and when the prize-changing game is won and the tsutsugi display device 210 hits and stops displaying the symbol, the wing member 231a is moved for a predetermined time interval. It opens and closes in the number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port (lower) 231, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls are set as prize balls and the upper plate 126 is set as a prize ball. And the first special figure display device 212 starts the special figure changing game. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port (bottom) 231 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the general-purpose starting port 228 (by a game nail not shown), it is difficult to enter a game ball into the general-purpose starting port 228 when left-handed. . Therefore, during left-handed play, there is no principle of winning the normal-floating game, and therefore, there is no principle that the blade member 231a opens and closes. On the other hand, when the player hits right, since the game ball can be expected to enter the general-purpose starting port 228, the blade member 231a may be opened and closed by winning the general-purpose variable game. That is, there is almost no possibility of winning the first special figure starting port (lower) 231 during the left-handing, but there is a possibility of winning the first special figure starting port (lower) 231 during the right-handing. It can be said that there is.

  The big hit generation gate 252 is a gate for which the detection of the passing of the game ball is enabled when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 as described later. When a game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 during the valid period after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game is started. Note that, in the present embodiment, the general figure starting port 228 and the big hit generating gate 252 are separately provided. However, for example, the general figure starting gate 228 may also serve the function of the big hit generating gate 252. Alternatively, the same game ball passage detection switch may be used for the normal figure start gate and the big hit generation gate. Further, the game ball passage detection switch also serving as the big hit generation gate is not limited to the general figure start gate 228, and may be another game ball passage detection switch. For example, the second special figure start port 232, A game ball passage detection switch used for the first special figure starting port (lower) 231 or the like may be used.

  Next, the configuration of the variable winning device 2340 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the variable winning device 2340. In FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b is shown in a transparent manner in order to easily explain the internal structure of the variable winning device 2340.

  The variable winning device 2340 has, for example, a flat plate shape, and includes a mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b mounted at a predetermined interval to the front surface of the mounting base 2340a. I have.

  The mounting base 2340a is provided with a rectangular opening substantially at the center near the upper end, and a plate-like first door member 2341a is attached so as to cover this opening. The lower end of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by a solenoid (not shown) mounted on the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by the drive circuit 334. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234a is configured as described above. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first variable winning opening 234a, a predetermined number (for example, 8) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the first variable winning opening 234a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, a second variable winning opening 235a is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b as described below.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, an upper surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e standing upright from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. The decorative member 2340b has a first rolling region SP1 and a second rolling region SP2 in which a game ball can roll by a wall surface, and an open portion behind the rolling region SP1 is closed by a front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

  The first rolling area SP1 is open at the top, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided to be able to advance and retreat in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the opening. The shutter member 2351a is inclined slightly downward and forward from right to left, and is configured to be displaceable by driving a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334 (see FIG. 5). That is, in the present embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in a state in which the shutter member 2351a has advanced forward with respect to the mounting base 2340a (closed state), the first rolling region SP1 is closed, and the first ball of the game ball is closed. When entry into the rolling area SP1 is prevented, and when it is in a state of retreating backward (open state), the first rolling area SP1 is opened and the game ball enters the first rolling area SP1. Ingress is allowed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of ribs 2340i project rearward at substantially equal intervals on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b so as to face the shutter member 2351a, and the shutter member is closed. The game ball is decelerated by colliding with the game ball rolling on 2351a, and the residence time of the game ball on the shutter member 2351a is increased. In the present embodiment, with this configuration, a plurality of game balls mainly staying on the shutter member 2351a by opening the shutter member 2351a for a short time (for example, 0.06 seconds) can be simultaneously changed by the second variable. In some cases, it is possible to make the ball enter the winning opening 235a. Further, in the present embodiment, since the shutter member 2351a is on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the shutter member 2351a.

  At a position connecting the first rolling area SP1 and the second rolling area SP2, a winning count switch SW1 for detecting the passage of a game ball is disposed, and enters the first rolling area SP1. When the played game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided to the left, it passes through the winning count switch SW1. The winning count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured to input a detection signal to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passing of the game ball to the winning count switch SW1, the CPU 304 detects the winning in the second variable winning opening 235a and determines the number based on the winning (for example, 15 pieces). ) Is performed for paying out the prize balls. In the present embodiment, since the number of prize balls that can be obtained by winning the second variable winning opening 235a is larger than the number of award balls that can be obtained by winning the first variable winning opening 234a, various game characteristics can be provided. May be able to.

  The game ball that has passed the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling area SP2. The second rolling area SP2 is configured to be guided by the general passage 2340h and discharged downward. A discharge ball detection switch SW3 is provided in the general passage 2340h, and a game ball guided to the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through the discharge ball detection switch SW3. The ejection ball detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured to input a detection signal to the sensor circuit 322. In the present embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the passage of the game ball to the discharge ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed the general passage 2340h.

  In the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the number of game balls passing through the winning count switch SW1 and the number of passages through the discharge ball detection switch SW3 are used to enter / exit the second variable winning opening 235a of the game ball. By monitoring outs, there are cases where illegal winnings can be monitored. An illegal act includes, for example, an act using a ball with a thread or a game ball having a size larger than a rule (a so-called deca ball).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning opening 234a, and a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232. In this case, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls, and the second special figure display device 214 starts a special figure changing game. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 when the player hits left due to the arrangement of the second special figure starting port 232, In such a case, it is possible to enter the ball with high frequency due to the arrangement of the surrounding nails. In addition. The second special figure starting port 232 may be provided downstream of the second variable winning port 235a.

  Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting hole is provided. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that did not win even to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle of the player, and sets the firing rod and The shot hammer passes through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and strikes the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, a game nail, or the like, and receives a winning opening (a general winning opening 226a, a first variable winning opening 234a, a second winning opening 234a). The player wins the variable winning opening 235a) or the starting opening (the first special drawing starting opening (upper) 230, the first special drawing starting opening (lower) 231 and the second special drawing starting opening 232), whichever winning opening or starting. The player reaches the OUT port 240 without winning the prize, or only passing through the ordinary start port 228. In the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed on the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of a game ball received at the discharge ball reception port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In the present embodiment, all game balls ejected from the game board 200 (including game balls ejected from the out port 240 and game balls that have won various winning ports) are received by the ejection ball receiving port, Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

  The effect device 2 is arranged above the game area 124, the effect device 3 is arranged below the game region 124, and the effect device 4 is arranged on the left and right sides, respectively. An effect device 5 described below is arranged behind each effect device 4. In the case of the present embodiment, these are supported by the main body 104.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a are both closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter in the closed state. It suffices if it is difficult for game balls to enter.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 shows a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling a central part of the game, and a main effect of the production in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-controller 400 for performing control, a second sub-controller 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400, and a main controller 300 in response to a command transmitted by the main controller 300. A payout control unit 600 for controlling the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for controlling launch of game balls, and a power control unit 660 for controlling power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. I have.

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, And a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in the program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit has two built-in counters). It is equipped with. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is incorporated in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and a bottom plate full sensor. Then, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302 and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 and the 2. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a general symbol display device 210, and various state display units 328 (for example, General Figure Hold Lamp 216, Special Figure 1 Hold Lamp 218, Special Figure 2 Hold Lamp 220, High Accuracy Medium Lamp RK, Electric Support Medium Lamp RD, Right-Handed Lamp RM, Round Display A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the pump RR and the like, a driving means for driving a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 231a of a first special figure starting port (lower) 231 as an ordinary electric accessory, A driving circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving a door member 2341a of a first variable winning opening 234a and a shutter member 2351a of a second variable winning opening 235a as a special electric accessory is connected. are doing. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 or the first special figure starting port (lower) 231, the sensor circuit 322 detects that the ball has been detected. Is output to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 231 at that timing, and stores the latched value corresponding to the special figure 1 Stored in a built-in counter value storage register. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to FIG.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 via an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, a game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the device.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main controller 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (a main control unit main process described later is started).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with one sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured to be unable to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300 from the first sub-control unit 400. are doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Is also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times, A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, a configuration in which the ROM 406 is provided in the basic circuit 402 may be employed. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect devices 2 to 5, and the like, and a sensor circuit. 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the rendering devices 2 to 5 and the like, and a button sensor 426 that detects pressing of various buttons constituting the rendering button 136 and the operation key unit 190. Output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A VDP (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative design display device 208. 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored. In the present embodiment, the memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is configured by a recording medium (for example, an EEPROM, a flash memory, or the like) capable of maintaining a storage state even when the power is turned off. Thereby, for example, information for displaying the display regarding the big hit history can be held even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or the setting is changed. Note that a RAM in which stored information is volatilized when the power is turned off may be used.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball loan. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. The payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lent balls. Is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). In addition, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor 1044 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like. When the sensor 106 is open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When outputting the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stop of firing, which is output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 for supplying a ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on a control signal instructing the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off (for example, for example). , Capacitors). In the present embodiment, power of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500 and the discharge unit Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 6A to 6D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative design display device 208, and the ordinary figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The following describes the types of special maps and ordinary maps.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating game is performed on condition that the first starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 or the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 blinks a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). "Variation display" (special figure variation game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 blinks a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left). 2 fluctuation display "(special figure fluctuation game). When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 2 Is elapsed, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of the special figure may be performed continuously plural times.

  FIG. 6A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. 6A shows three types of special figures from “special figure A” to “special figure C”. In FIG. 6A, a white portion in the figure indicates a lamp to be turned off, and a black portion indicates a lamp to be turned on.

  In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols (“special symbol A” and “special symbol B”) are prepared as the special symbol stop symbol mode. The “special figure A” is a normal round winning symbol of six rounds (R). When the “special figure A” is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a big hit gaming state in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened in all rounds. After the game is over, the control state becomes the special figure low probability general figure high probability state. Also, "special figure B" is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and when "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a big hit game state where it is opened in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. After that, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state. In the present embodiment, two types of big hit symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more big hit symbols may be prepared. In addition, a jackpot that is substantially difficult to win in some rounds may be prepared. Also, a small hit symbol may be prepared.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure fluctuating game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether to make a big hit or a certain-variable big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure change game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure probable change” or simply “probable change”). Called a low probability state. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state, and the special figure low probability state and the special figure high probability state change the special figure. The time is configured to be significantly different. In addition, the game may shift to the time-saving state (electric support state) after the end of the big hit game. Here, the electric support state is defined as a predetermined time where the advantage of the player is higher than the non-electric support state, for example, by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Refers to the state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the state not in the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure low probability state. As described above, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to ordinary figures, and the “time reduction state” is a state related to special figures or a state related to ordinary figures and special figures. A time-saving flag is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the time-saving flag is set to ON, the vehicle is in the power-supply state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game in the normal state than in the low probability state of the general figure (probable change of the general figure). For example, the winning probability of the general-floating fluctuation game is 0/100 in the low-probability state of the general-purpose figure (non-electric support state), but is always off, whereas the high-probability state of the general figure (electric-support state). ), It is increased to 100/100 (that is, always hit). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general-purpose fluctuating game is shorter than in the non-electric support state (normal-figure variation). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is reduced to 2 seconds in the electric support state. In addition, in the electric support state, the opening time of the blade member 231a of the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 in one opening is likely to be longer than that in the non-electric support state (extending the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-power support state, the power chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power support state. Furthermore, the blade members 231a are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (the number of opening of the electric chew increases). For example, the blade member 231a that opens only once in the non-electric support state for one prize to the normal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and restarts for 2 seconds). Open). The probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 increases due to the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. The time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-electric support state is maintained. This is because a game ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of prize balls in a big hit game, and the first variable prize port 234a or the second variable prize port 235a (these variable prize ports may be called "attackers"). This is because if the number of winnings of the game balls to the game player decreases, the player may be disadvantaged. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time saving state), all of the figure change, the figure change, the extension of the power chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times the power chew is opened are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player has a higher advantage, and may be in the electric support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either of the extension of the electric-chu opening period or the increase of the number of electric-chu opening times is performed with an increased probability of entering the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231, the electric support state (time saving state) is set. Is also good. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is changed into a prize difficult state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an easy prize state in which game balls are easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is in an easy winning state for a longer time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the "special figure A" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game to be performed thereafter is completed, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure changing game is performed 50 times, and the non-power Transition to the support state (low probability state in ordinary figure). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric support ("Tokuzu B") is won, the game does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure low probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. When the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state after the big hit game ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a loss symbol. "Special figure C" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 6B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. FIG. 6B shows eight types of special figures from “special figure a” to “special figure h”, of which five special figures are big hits (“special figure a” to “special figure a”). E)). The "special figure a" is a 6R normal big hit design, and when the "special figure a" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to the big hit game state in which the first variable winning opening 234a is opened in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. Thereafter, the control state becomes the special figure low probability general figure high probability state. “Tokuzu b” is a 6R probable big hit symbol, and when “Tokuzu b” is stopped and displayed, the first variable winning opening 234a shifts to a big hit game state where it is opened in all rounds, and the big hit game ends. Then, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state. In addition, the “special figure c” is a 3R probability variable big hit symbol, and is a real 1R big hit that can be expected to obtain a payout in one of the three rounds. The second variable winning opening 235a shifts to a jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is opened in all rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special figure high probability general figure low probability state. The “special figure d” is a 6R probability variable big hit symbol, and is a big hit in which it is possible to expect to obtain a payout in all of the six rounds. The state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the variable winning opening 235a is opened in all rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state. The “special figure e” is a 10R probability variable big hit symbol, and is a big hit in which it is possible to expect to obtain a payout in all of the ten rounds. The state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the variable winning opening 235a is opened in all rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes the special figure high probability general figure low probability state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two types of stop symbols ("special figure f" and "special figure g") are prepared as small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbols. In the case of a small hit in "special figure f", the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a opens once for 0.06 seconds only once after the symbol stops, and in the case of a small hit in "special figure g". After the symbol stops, the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a performs opening for 0.06 seconds 12 times. In other words, when the small hit is made in the “special figure g”, more game balls are more likely to enter the second variable winning opening 235a than in the case where the small hit is made in the “special figure f”. You can get the ball. Note that the opening time and the number of times of opening of the shutter member 2351a can be set as appropriate. Also, the small hit symbol may be one type. In the small hitting game, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) into the second variable winning opening 235a, or when a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is obtained, a small value is obtained. The hit game ends, and the shutter member 2351a is not opened thereafter. During the small hit game, the state shifts to the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the small hit game ends.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since it is a simultaneous fluctuating machine, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 and the game shifts to the small hit game, a situation in which the special figure 1 is being displayed in a variable manner may occur. . In this case, when the small hit occurs in the special figure 2, the variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, and when the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the variable display of the special figure 1 is restarted. In addition, when the special figure 2 is changed to the big hit game with a big hit, the special figure 2 is displayed in a variable state, and when the special figure 2 is changed to the big hit with the big hit, the special figure 1 is changed and displayed. However, in this case, if a big hit occurs in one special map, the variable display of the other special map is forcibly terminated, the result of the variable display is discarded, and the result of the error is displayed It will be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a loss symbol. "Special figure h" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 6C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The ball has won the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230, the special figure 1 starting port (lower) or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 or the special figure 1 starting port ( Under the condition that the first starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered in the lower part) or that the second starting port sensor has detected that a ball has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232, the decoration is performed. In each of the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the symbol display device 208, "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" →. In some cases, “decorative display of decorative symbols” that switches the display in the order of “9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. In other words, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, separately from the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of the decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in the normal game state and the power support state in which the special figure 1 mainly performs the variable display, the decorative pattern is changed in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly used. In the probable change state in which the variable display is performed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the symbol variable display is performed only on the fourth symbol or the second special figure display device 214 described later. In the probable change state, the fluctuating display of the special figure 1 is performed, but the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is not performed, and the fluctuating display is performed only on the fourth symbol and the first special figure display device 212.

  A mode other than the case where the first special figure display device 212 confirms and notifies the 6R certain variable big hit in the normal game state or the electric support state, and the second special figure display device 214 notifies the 10R certain variable big hit in the certain variable state. In the case of notifying the big hit or the small hit in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, three or more decorative patterns having the same numbers other than "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are displayed. The combination of the decorative patterns arranged (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the 6R probable variable hit ("special figure B") is confirmed and notified by the first special figure display device 212 in the normal gaming state or the electric support state, the 10R probable variable hit (" In the case of confirming that it is a special figure e)), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when notifying the lost symbol of “special figure C” or “special figure h”, a combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns described above (for example, Eye) stop display.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display from the start of the “decorative symbol display” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as a decorative symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as “decorative symbol variable display”). ). The variation display of the decorative symbol is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

  FIG. 6 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode in a general figure. In this embodiment, there are two types of the stop display mode of the general symbol, namely, a general symbol "Picture A" and a non-standard symbol "Primary symbol B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has passed through the general figure starting port 228, the general figure display device 210 alternately lights up and down two LEDs. "Variation display" (normal figure variation game). Then, after the elapse of the fluctuation time, one of the symbols "Picture B", which is different from the "Picture A", which is a winning symbol, is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 6D as well, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the lamp to be turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the lamp to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “floating display of the ordinary figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the ordinary figure may be referred to as the “floating display of the ordinary figure”.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control section main processing.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores a special figure random number, a special figure round decision random number, a special figure electric support decision random number, a special figure design decision random number, and the like. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random numbers. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the special figure winning random number value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for a special figure, which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the determination of the success or failure (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for ordinary drawing is also provided. As will be described later, the start information storage unit for special maps stores a plurality of types of start information in a set in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal performs a reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and WDT 314 Operation permission, setting of initial values, and the like. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power-off), the process returns to step S103. If the low-voltage signal is off (the CPU 304 does not detect the power-off), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that, even immediately after the power is turned on, if the predetermined value (9 V) has not yet been reached, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly performed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a period for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from an output port (output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the power supply returns to the state before the power interruption (before the power failure). If the power supply does not return to the state before the power failure (the case where the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized) In ()), the processing proceeds to the processing after step S113 to execute the initialization processing.

  If it is not determined to return to the state before the power interruption (step S109; No), it is determined whether the cause is that the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is (step S113). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that an operation has been performed). When the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115), and the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side. If it is determined that the setting has been made (step S115; Yes), a setting change process is executed (step S117).

  When the setting change processing is executed, the 7-seg corresponding to the setting monitor in the accessory ratio / setting display 196 indicates “1” and flashes, indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, every time the setting change button 194 is pressed down, the 7-segment of the setting monitor is incremented, and the setting change button 194 is pressed down while the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor indicates “6”. Then, it returns to "1". In the present embodiment, at least one of the settings 1 to 6 having different jackpot probabilities can be selected. The setting is changed by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting. Is determined. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is deleted. Thereafter, after the setting is determined, the set value can be displayed again on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In the present embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio / setting display 196. However, for example, the set value may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or notified by voice output. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting is made in six steps from setting 1 to 6, but the setting may be other than the six step setting, or the setting may not be changed. In the present embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is “1”. However, the setting value before the power is turned off is retained, and the retained setting value is displayed. Is also good.

  If it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side ( (Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

  In step S119, an initialization process is performed to bring the basic circuit 302 into an initial state (step S119). Here, when the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out. When the power status information is not information indicating suspend, a predetermined area (for example, The checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in all the areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0). Is determined (whether or not the checksum result is normal), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) Executes an initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into an initial state. In the initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, the setting value set in the setting change process (step S117) is retained even when the initialization is performed. Here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the setting selected in step S117 are set in a transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power restoration command described later in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , To the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S121, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from a random number counter storage area for generating a general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except during the execution of the timer interrupt process started at a predetermined cycle.

  On the other hand, in step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read, and the stack pointer is reset (actually set). Further, at the time of power failure, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting each register, setting of interruption permission is performed. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the reset, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the processing is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state has been returned to the state at the time of power interruption, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 4 ms in the present embodiment). The unit timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (once) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (does not detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once about every 2 ms which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In the input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 5 including various ball detection sensors are input through input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor presence / absence of the detection signals, It is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. To describe the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the last two timer interrupt processes (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. The information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the detection signal storage area provided two times before in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ) Is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the sphere detection sensors, and the information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. To memorize. Further, the detection signals of the respective ball detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals of the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control timer interrupt process is repeated several times at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. For this reason, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal twice before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the absence of the detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 5 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last time, presence of previous detection signal, presence of current detection signal) , A first winning entry 226a, a first variable winning opening 234a, a second variable winning opening 235a, a first special figure starting port (upper) 230, and a first special figure starting port ( Bottom) 231 and it is determined that a ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232, or has passed the general figure starting port 228 or the big hit generation gate 252. That is, it is determined that there is a winning in these winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a and these starting openings 230, 231, 232, 228, 252. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in the first starting port (upper) sensor that detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information. Determines that there is a prize in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, that is, that a game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the subsequent prize in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 is determined. If the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the following processing associated with winning the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 is performed. Branch to subsequent processing without performing. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize once, it is not determined that there is a prize until the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches the pattern information, it is determined whether the pattern information matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value updating process and a basic random number updating process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 is updated, and then the general-purpose winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and Update the random number counter for generating each special figure random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from a random number counter storage area for generating a general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made one round, the value of the random number counter for generating an initial value corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a general-purpose winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99 is obtained, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating a general winning winning random number value, and The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and to determine that the random number counter for generating the general winning random number has made one round. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the general-purpose winning random number has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. Is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In the effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 210, the symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214. Various kinds of timers, including a special figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time of fluctuation / stop display, a timer for measuring a predetermined prize production time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end production period, and the like. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In the winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is achieved in the winning openings 234a, 235a, 226a and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the area is read, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original prize ball storage area.

  In step S217, a winning reception process is performed. In the winning reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information is acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as a set of start information in an empty area in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

  In step S219 executed after step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 5 are composed of one byte, and strobe information (in the case of ON, data is set), bit 6 , Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal drawing state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state updating processing performs one of a plurality of processings corresponding to the ordinary figure state. For example, in the ordinary symbol state updating process during the ordinary symbol change display (the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs included in the ordinary symbol display device 210 are turned on and off alternately. Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fluctuation display of a normal figure (normal figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the ordinary symbol state update processing at the timing when the ordinary symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (when the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the winning symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 so as to be in a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a lost symbol display mode. ON / OFF drive control of the two LEDs is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes in addition to the ordinary state updating process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / light-off driving control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the ordinary symbol A shown in FIG. 6D) and the lost symbol (the ordinary symbol B shown in FIG. 6D). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a general-purpose stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the ordinary figure fluctuating game is notified to the player.

  Further, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the general figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the ordinary figure hit flag is ON, in the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The setting area is set to the normal operation state, and the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 231a of the first special figure starting port (lower) 231 is set to the blade member 231a for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). Is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the general state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 231a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade 231a, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general-state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (timing when the value of the blade closing-time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state of the general figure is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. I do. Further, if the result of the normal figure variable game is a loss, the general figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the general-figure losing flag is on, even in the general-figure state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting is made to set the non-operating state of the ordinary drawing. In the ordinary figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general drawing related lottery process, the general figure changing game and the opening / closing control of the first special figure starting port (bottom) 231 are not performed (the general figure state is not operating) and the general figure holding is held. When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general figure variable game is determined to be a win or a non-prize by random number lottery based on the random number random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above. A hit determination is made to determine whether or not a hit is made, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of non-winning, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is obtained as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display device 210 is configured to obtain a general-purpose timer random value from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the obtained general-purpose timer random number value. One time for changing and displaying the figure is selected, and this changing display time is stored in the normal figure changing time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure changing display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved general-floating fluctuation games is stored in the general-figure-remaining-number storage area provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this general-purpose reserved number storage area. Further, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and preliminarily determines the stop symbol and the variation time before the hit / fail determination processing, and The result (the special figure prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308.

  Next, the special figure state updating processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state updating processing (the special figure 2 state updating processing) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update processing, one of the following plurality of processings is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state updating process during the special figure 2 change display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is used. ON / OFF drive control for repeating ON / OFF of the LED is performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of times saved in the number of times saved storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times saved.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R big hit flag, a 6R big hit flag, a 3R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a miss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in a special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R big hit flag is on, and the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on and the general figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure e and 6R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 6B are on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, and the general figure probability variation flag is off. In this case, either the special map b or the special map d, the 6R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability change flag is off, and if the general figure probability change flag is on, the special figure a and the 3R big hit flag are on. When the figure probability variation flag is also on, the ordinary figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure c, when the small hit flag is on, either the special figure f or the special figure g, or when the loss flag is on, The special figure h 2 display 214 performs a LED lighting-off drive control of which constitute the, to set indicating that it is a special symbol 2 stop display of the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays the 10R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure e), the 6R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure b, the special figure d), the 3R probability variable big hit symbol (special figure c), 6R Normally, one of a large hit symbol (special symbol a), a small hit symbol (special symbol f, special symbol g), and a lost symbol (special symbol h) is confirmed and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous fluctuating machine, the fluctuating display of the special figure 1 may be performed while the fluctuating display of the special figure 2 is performed. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, at the timing of the big hit symbol display of the special figure 2, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 1 and the missing symbol is stopped and displayed. Will be done. In addition, when the special figure 1 is displayed during the variable display of the special figure 2 and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed, the special figure 2 is displayed. At the timing of the small hit symbol display, the progress of the variable display time of the special figure 1 is interrupted. As a result, from the start of the variable display of the special figure 1 until the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. The time is extended by the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol in the special figure 2 to the end of the small hit game.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the special figure 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time savings stored in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time savings flag is on, the time savings flag is turned off. Further, the time reduction flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

  Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later, and then the process is terminated.

  Also, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, a big hit standby state is set to wait for the passing of the game ball to the big hit generating gate 252. In the present embodiment, the big hit does not occur and the expiration date is not provided until the game ball passes through the big hit occurrence gate 252 after the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. If the game ball does not pass through the big hit generation gate 252 until a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after the stop hit is displayed with the big hit symbol, the big hit may disappear.

  When the game ball passes to the big hit generation gate 252, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update processing, the special figure 2 operating is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is set. Is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the start of the game is displayed. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a) the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (the second variable winning opening). A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in an open state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the shutter member 2351a of 235a, and a door opening time management provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the timer for use. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is closed in a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a). A signal to be held is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in a storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing that repeats the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (10 rounds, 6 rounds, or 3 rounds in the illustrated embodiment) and starts at the end time, a predetermined end effect period (for example, (3 seconds), that is, a storage area of an effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is set to indicate the effect waiting period. In the present embodiment, if the general-figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the number of time savings (for example, 50 times) is set in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game. The time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on. If the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to off, the number of times saved is not set in the number of times saved storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special map probability change flag is set to ON, the probability change flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned ON at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

  Here, the time reduction means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the state of high probability of general figure (probable change of general figure). In the high probability figure state, the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation game is higher than in the low probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general-floor fluctuation game is shorter in the general-figure high-probability state than in the general-figure low-probability state. Further, the opening time of one opening of the pair of blade members 231a of the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is more likely to be longer in the high probability state of the normal figure than in the low probability state of the general figure (electric tube spread). . In addition, the pair of blade members 231a is more likely to open in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. The state in which any one of the normal figure change, the general figure change, and the electric power spread is set is referred to as an electric support (starting opening winning support by an electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the ordinary figure low probability state is maintained. This means that if the game is in the high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning port 234a (second variable winning port 235a) during the jackpot game until the game balls enter the ball. FIG. 1 There is a problem that many game balls enter the starting port (lower) 231 and the number of game balls (number of balls) that can be obtained during a big hit increases, thereby increasing gambling. Is to solve this. In the present embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is “1”, the number of balls to be played during the big hit game does not substantially increase. The time reduction flag may be kept on even during the game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the outlier flag is ON, the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, a state where the special figure 2 is not operating is set. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, a special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update processing) is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update processing, one of the following plurality of processings is performed according to the state of the special figure 1.

  For example, in the special figure 1 state update process during the special figure 1 change display (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined one of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is used. Lighting / light-off drive control for repeating the light-on and light-off of the LED is performed. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated. If the number of times saved in the number of times saved storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times saved.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 6R big hit flag, a miss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 1-related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 6R big hit flag is on, When the probability variation flag is also on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure B, when the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and when the general figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A, When the losing flag is on, the driving of the LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled so as to be in the respective modes of the special figure C, and the special figure 1 stop display is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings that indicate something. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 determines any one of the 6R normal big hit symbol (special figure A), the 6R positive variable big hit symbol (special figure B), and the lost symbol (special figure C). Display. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous variation machine, the variation display of the special figure 2 may be performed during the variation display of the special figure 1, but the variation display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 2, at the timing of the big hit symbol display of the special figure 1, the lottery result is discarded in the special figure 2 and the outlier symbol is stopped and displayed. Will be done.

  After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time savings stored in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time savings flag is on, the time savings flag is turned off. Further, the time reduction flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

  Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 1 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, a big hit standby state is set to wait for the passing of the game ball to the big hit generating gate 252. In the present embodiment, the big hit does not occur and the expiration date is not provided until the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 after the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. If the game ball does not pass through the big hit generation gate 252 until a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after the stop hit is displayed with the big hit symbol, the big hit may disappear.

  When the game ball passes to the big hit generation gate 252, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 1 state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the special figure 1 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image notifying the player of the start of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in a storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 1 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined prize production period ends (when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or a solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the door member 2341a of the first variable winning port 234a (until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected in the first variable winning port 234a). ), A signal for holding the door member 2341a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 1 state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 2341a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a, and a door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 is provided. The information indicating the closed period is set in the storage area of the timer. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 1 state updating process that is repeated a predetermined number of times (six rounds in the present embodiment) for opening and closing the door member and starts at a timing when the door member ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol In order to set to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the display device 208 is displayed, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 indicates the effect standby period. Set information. In the present embodiment, if the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the number of time savings (for example, 50 times) is set in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, and the RAM 308 Turns on the time saving flag provided in. If the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to off, the number of times saved is not set in the number of times saved storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. If the special map probability change flag is set to ON, the probability change flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned ON at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 1 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the outlier flag is on, the special figure 1 state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) The non-operating state of the special figure 2 is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 1 state updating process when the special figure 1 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Here too, the special figure-related lottery processing for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery processing) is first performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery processing) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the variable game of the special figure 2 is not performed, the state of the special figure 2 is inactive, and neither the special hit 1 nor the special figure 2 is in the big hit game, and the special game 2 is held. The first special figure 2 winning random number and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area are executed with the start condition that the number of the special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more. . In the special drawing 1 related lottery process, the floating game of the special figure 1 is not performed, the state of the special figure 1 is not operating, and neither the special hit 1 nor the special figure 2 is in the big hit game, and the special game is held. The first special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number storage area are executed with the start condition that the number of special figure 1 variable games is 1 or more. . That is, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 can start the variable game regardless of whether the special figure 2 is in the variable game or not, and the special figure 2 indicates that the special figure 1 is in the variable game. Regardless of whether or not there is, it is configured to be able to start a variable game (simultaneous variable machine).

  The notification of the result of the determination as to whether or not the special figure fluctuating game is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400. In the present embodiment, in the probable change state, the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is achieved. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the lottery is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (lower), and the normal game state and In the time-saving state, the notification of the lottery result based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is notified, and the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. This is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result. However, in the case where the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the probable change state is a big hit, in parallel with the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, or once the special figure 2 start The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the mouth 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is executed. In some cases. In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state becomes a big hit, the lottery based on winning in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 In parallel with the notification of the lottery result, or interrupting the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 and the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 and starting the special figure 2 Notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on winning in the mouth 232 may be executed.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number storage area. The combination of the random number value of FIG. 2 and the random number value of the special figure 2) is acquired, and the ROM 306 is determined based on the random number value of the special figure 2 in the acquired special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is determined using the hit / fail judgment table stored in (1) to determine whether the hit is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information, the determined result of the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is used, and the like. A symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 stores the result in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail judgment result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 reservation number at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the obtained special figure change time determining random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After extracting the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main controller 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 subtracts 1 from the special figure 2 reserved number in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special figure 1 related lottery processing and the special figure 2 related lottery processing may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure state update processing and the special figure related lottery processing are performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 so that a plurality of special figures are simultaneously changed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery process and the floating game relating to the holding of the other special map may not be performed according to the state of one special map. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special figures are simultaneously changed, in the normal game state and the time saving state, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the effect display is not performed with respect to the variable display of the special figure 2, and in the probable change state, the effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, while the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed. Although the effect display is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices for displaying the lottery results of each special figure. May be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately. Further, when fluctuations regarding a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 following step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in the illustrated embodiment, basic command, winning opening winning command, out ball command, launch position command, special figure change start command, special figure change stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2 A command transmitted at the start of the change, which is a command for specifying whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is to be stopped and displayed first), a game state command, a special figure start command, and a big hit generation gate valid start command. , Special figure end command, big win opening command, big hit round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, pre-read result information frame De, information capable of specifying the type of command, such as configuration commands), bit 0 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission processing. If the command type is the special figure change start command, the command data includes information indicating various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery processing, and the like. In the embodiment, when the special figure variation start command is set, stop symbol information capable of specifying a stop symbol is included. In the case of the special figure fluctuation stop command, the value includes various types of big hit flags, small hit flags, and loss flags, and in the case of the big hit round number specifying command, the number of big hit rounds is included. When the command type indicates the basic command, the command data includes device information, presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230, presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231, and special figure 2 start. The information includes presence / absence of winning in the mouth 232, presence / absence of winning in the first variable winning opening 234a, presence / absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235a, and the like. In the case of the pre-read result information command, the command data includes information such as the type of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of pre-reads stored in the pre-read number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the pre-read result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, the information includes setting information.

  In the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the command data is selected by the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, and loss flags stored in the RAM 308 and the special figure 1 related lottery processing and the special figure 2 related lottery processing. Information indicating the number of the timer, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the number of the special figure 2 variable game that are held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating the values of various large hit flags, small hit flags, and loss flags stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the reserved special figure. Information indicating the number of 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the reserved special figure. Information indicating the number of 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, and the like are set in the command data.

  In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating the special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in command data, and advance notice information (advance notice information, false notice) Prior notice information or no prior notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command type is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 subsequent to step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 subsequent to step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full error is monitored. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 subsequent to step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When the low-voltage signal is on (when the interruption of the power is detected), the process proceeds to step S243. When the low-voltage signal is off (when the interruption of the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. And then enter the HALT state.

  Next, it is used in the general figure-related lottery processing (step S223), the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229), and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The determination table will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a general-purpose permission / prohibition determination table, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure 1.2 / non-permission determination table. FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special figure determination distribution table.

  The universal figure approval / disapproval determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a universal figure approval / disapproval determination table used at the time of universal figure approval / disapproval determination. This table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), when this pass / fail determination table is used, there is no hit value in the ordinary low probability state, that is, the hit probability is 0%, In the high probability state, the range that the random number can take is 0 to 65535, and the winning value is 0 to 65535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). In the low probability state (when the working hours are not working), a constant probability (for example, 1%) may be used. (For example, 1%).

  9B is a table that is referred to when making a determination as to whether the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are correct or not. The record to be referred to is selected depending on whether the state is the special figure low probability state or the special figure high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (about 1/200) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The jackpot is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (approximately / 199) as a result of the success / failure determination of the jackpot lottery in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 2, the big hit is selected with the probability of 341/65536 (about 1/193) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The big hit is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (approximately / 192) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 3, the big hit is selected with a probability of 363/65536 (about 1/181) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The big hit is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (approximately / 180) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 4, the big hit is selected with a probability (about 1/175) of 375/65536 as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The big hit is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (approximately / 174) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 5, the big hit is selected with the probability (about 1/146) of 451/65536 as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The jackpot is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (approximately / 145) as a result of the success / failure determination of the jackpot lottery in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the special figure low probability state of the setting 6, the big hit is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (about 1/94) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the special figure high probability state, The big hit is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (approximately / 93) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery in the special maps 1 and 2.

  Also, regardless of any of the settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether the state is the special figure high probability state or the special figure low probability state, the small hit is selected as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery of the special figure 1. The small hit is selected with a probability of 6580/65536 (approximately 1/10) as a result of the success / failure determination of the big hit lottery in Toku-zu. Note that a small hit may occur in the special figure 1. Further, the small hit probability may be made different for each setting.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in any of the settings 1 to 6, the big hit probability in the special figure high probability state is slightly higher than the big hit probability in the special figure low probability state, but is regarded as almost the same. Is set to Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability differs depending on the setting. The bigger the setting is, the easier the big hit becomes, and the lower the setting is, the harder the big hit becomes. Therefore, the lower the setting is, the harder it is for a big hit to occur, but when the state shifts to the certainty change state, the number of occurrences of the small hit tends to be larger than that of the high setting, so that different game characteristics may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the big hit probability is set to be almost the same between the special figure high probability state and the special figure low probability state in any setting. Can be In the present embodiment, as the variation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state, for example, a variation time of 1 to 5 seconds is selected. Accordingly, in the special figure high probability state, as described above, when the player hits right, a large number of game balls are likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232. A large number of operations can be performed, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of small hits is increased. In the present embodiment, in the special figure high probability state, it can be said that the frequency of occurrence of small hits is increased, and thus it may be referred to as “small hit rush”. Further, in the state where the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is four (full), the one time of the special figure 1 is longer than the time required to complete the symbol change display of all the special figures 2. Since the time required to complete the symbol variation display is longer, a big hit is hardly generated in the special figure 1. On the other hand, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state, for example, a fluctuation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the special figure low probability state, although the frequency of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the small hit probability do not change when right-handed, the time until the result of the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed is approximately. Since it is every ten minutes, even if the player hits right, it is substantially disadvantageous for the player. In addition, in the special figure low probability state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 580 seconds for the outlier and the small hit, but the fluctuation time for the big hit is shorter than that, for example, It is set to 227 seconds.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the special figure determination distribution table. As described above, the stop symbol is determined based on the result of determining whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is correct. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the distribution table for special figure determination, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol mode of the special figure (refer to FIGS. 6A and 6B) is defined for each result of the determination of success or failure.

  First, if the result of the special figure 1 hit determination is a big hit, one of “special figure A” and “special figure B” is selected. As described above, the "special figure A" is a 6R ordinary big hit with the first variable winning opening 234a opened, and the "special figure B" is a 6R certain variable big hit with the first variable winning opening 243a opened. Each selection rate is １ ／ regardless of the setting.

  Next, if the result of the special figure 2 hit determination is a big hit, any one of “special figure a” to “special figure e” is selected. As described above, “special figure a” is a 6R ordinary big hit that the first variable winning opening 234a opens, “special figure b” is a 6R certain variable big hit that the first variable winning opening 234a opens, The special figure c is a 3R probability variable jackpot that the second variable winning opening 235a opens (2R out of 3Rs is a substantial 1R probability variable winning because the second variable winning port 235a opens short). , The second variable winning opening 235a is a 6R probability variable hit, and the "special figure e" is a 10R probability variable hit, the second variable winning opening 235a is opening. Regardless of the setting, the selection rates are 50/100 for “special figure a”, 2/100 for “special figure b”, 20/100 for “special figure c”, and 3/100 for “special figure d”. The “special figure e” is 25/100.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 hit determination is a small hit, one of “special figure f” and “special figure g” is selected. As described above, the "special figure f" is a small hit in which the second variable winning opening 235a is shortly opened once, and the "special figure g" is a second variable winning opening 235a in which the second variable winning opening 235a is shortly opened up to 12 times. Is a small hit. In the small hit, one opening time of the second variable winning opening 235a is as short as 0.06 seconds, but as described above, the game ball rolling on the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a stays. Since the structure is easy, a plurality of game balls can be entered by opening and closing the shutter member 2351a once. Therefore, in the special figure probable state, there is a case where the number of payouts between the big hits can be increased by generating many small hits (particularly, small hits in the “special figure g”).

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the big hit in the “special figure c” is substantially a 1R probability variable big hit, when the big hit in the “special figure c” occurs, the player is made to think that the small hit has occurred. May be able to.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S301 in FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. CPU 404 of first sub-control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from main control unit 300 or not.

  In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when effect data needs to be updated, effect data updating processing is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control processing, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S309 is converted to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 in accordance with the detection result. Is performed.

  In step S313 following step S311, a sound control process is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315 subsequent to step S313, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, when the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the various lamps 442 and 452, the command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450. I do.

  In step S317 subsequent to step S315, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command to the effect devices 2 to 5 in the effect data read in step S309, the command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S319 following step S317, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S303.

  FIG. 10B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interruption process (strobe interruption process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt triggers a predetermined timer interrupt process. Execute in the cycle of In step S341 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-controller main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. I do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S343 following step S341, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S319), and other update processing of random number values for effect And so on.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 11A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S401 in FIG. 11A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S403 subsequent to step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative design display device 208) corresponding to the command from a ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. Is performed, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, an image control process is performed. In the image control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the VDP 516, the command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 11B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 11C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S443 subsequent to step S441, other processing such as updating the effect random number value is performed.

  FIG. 11D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table and the like. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455. Otherwise (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S455, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 determines the information of the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axes and the image size of the VRAM 518). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S457 subsequent to step S455, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process proceeds to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S461, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio / setting display 196, and FIG. 12B is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific configuration of the dip switch board 198. It is.

  As described above, the accessory ratio / setting display 196 includes the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor. YH), and the setting monitor displays the current set value.

  Here, the continuous bonus ratio is the number of game balls to be acquired (that is, safe balls) due to the operation of the bonus when the bonus is continuously operated (that is, the first during the big hit game). It means the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a and winning. The ratio may be a ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a to the number of out balls. In addition, the accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls to be acquired (that is, safe balls) due to the operation of the accessory (that is, the first special figure starting port (lower) 231, the first variable winning port 234 a, and the second variable winning port 234 a). 2) The number of game balls obtained by opening the variable winning opening 235a and winning. The first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, the first special figure starting port (lower) 231 and the second special figure starting port 232 with respect to the number of out balls. And the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning the general winning opening 226a.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous character ratio exceeds 60% as a result of calculating the continuous character ratio, the two-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the continuous character ratio blinks and is displayed. Outputs a security signal (RY). Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output outside the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It should be noted that the output may be from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, the type application test of the gaming machine may be smoothly performed.

  Also, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, a two-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the accessory ratio blinks, and then the security signal (YH ) Is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output outside the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is made to blink, but, for example, the emission color is changed. Is also good.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, eight dip switches are provided on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and can read the position of each dip switch when the power is turned on, and change the appearance probability of the effect. The appearance rate, the entry rate of the effect mode, and the like can be set.

  Next, an example of the variable display of the special figures 1 and 2 in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 13A is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation when the special figure 2 has a big hit during the special figure 1 fluctuation, and FIG. It is a timing chart explaining an example of an operation when special figure 2 is a small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display in which a big hit symbol is finally displayed. After that, at the timing of t11, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the outlying symbol, but in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and reaches the timing of t12, one of the symbol change displays of the special figure 1 which has been held is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is changed. Be started. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. Thereafter, when the symbol fluctuating time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t13 is reached, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a non-designated symbol. Also at this time, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed. Thereafter, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t14 is reached, one of the symbol change displays of the special figure 1 that has been held is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol change time of the special figure 2 (for example, 227 seconds) elapses and becomes the timing of t15, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, while the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is the remaining symbol change. Regardless of the time, the process ends when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the result of the hit determination is discarded, and the stop is displayed with the missing symbol. After that, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t16 is reached, the big hit game is started. Thereafter, at the timing of t17 after the big hit game ends, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended are respectively digested, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started at the same time.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the simultaneous fluctuating machine, when the big hit symbol is displayed in the fluctuation display of one special figure, the result of the right / wrong determination of the other special figure is discarded, and the outlier pattern is displayed. It has become so. In the present embodiment, if the symbol change display of the special figure 1 being held when the big hit in the special figure 2 includes the symbol change display of the big hit, During the big hit game or in the symbol change display of the special figure 1 which is started after the big hit game is ended, a big hit notice may be given.

  Next, in the example shown in FIG. 13B, the symbol variation display is performed on both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display in which the small hit symbol is finally displayed. After that, at the timing of t21, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the outlying symbol, but the symbol variation display is continuously performed in the special figure 2. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t22 is reached, one of the symbol change displays of the special figure 1 which has been held is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is changed. Be started. In addition, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed. After that, when the symbol change time (for example, 580 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t23 comes, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation time is temporarily stopped at this timing. Thereafter, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 elapses and the timing of t24 is reached, the small hit game is started. Actually, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses and the game shifts to the small hitting game state, the game shifts to the small hitting game through the standby state of the small hit start time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Strictly, after the symbol display time of the special figure 2 is set at the timing of t23, a timer subtraction of the symbol display time of the special figure 2 is started in the next main controller timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, at the timing of t25 after the small hit game ends, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. In practice, when the small hitting game ends, the small hitting game state ends after a standby state for a small hit end wait time (for example, 0.5 seconds). On the other hand, in the special figure 1, at this timing, the progress of the suspended symbol variation time is resumed. Thereafter, when the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t26 is reached, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a non-designated symbol. In the present embodiment, since the progress of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the small hit game due to the occurrence of the small hit of the special figure 2, from the start to the end of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 The time actually taken is longer than the predetermined symbol fluctuation time (5 seconds), and more specifically, the small hitting game related to the small hitting ends after the small hitting occurs in the special figure 2. The time taken (interruption period) is the added time. That is, if the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 should have reached at the timing of t26 ', but the small hit has occurred. Thus, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is delayed until the timing of t26. The symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed at the timing of t26, and thereafter, when the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of the t27 is reached, the symbol variation display is suspended. The symbol variation display of FIG. 1 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. In the present embodiment, the game is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol in the special figure 2, and after the symbol display time elapses, the game shifts to the small hit game state, and a predetermined small hit start wait time has elapsed since the small hit game state started. The small hitting game is started after elapse of the small hitting game, and when the small hitting end wait time elapses after the small hitting game is over, the small hitting game state is configured to end. Either one of the small hit end wait times may not be provided, or both may not be provided.

  In this manner, in the present embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed in the variable display of one special figure in the simultaneous variable machine, the progress of the symbol variable display of the other special figure is temporarily stopped, and the small hit When the game ends, the progress resumes.

  In the present embodiment, an example of operating in the manner described above has been introduced. For example, a hit symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) stop> stop display weight (for example, 0.5 seconds)> hit (big hit, small hit) Hit) start weight (for example, 0.1 second for a small hit, several tens of seconds for a big hit (however, it may be different depending on whether it is the first hit or not). , Small hit) end weight (for example, 0.1 second for small hit, tens of seconds for big hit (however, it may be different depending on whether it is the first hit or not).) The operation may be performed. Here, "~ start weight" and "~ end weight" may be expressed as "~ interval", and a hit start effect and a hit end effect are performed in this time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the special figure 1 variable display, the progress of the special figure 1 variable display is interrupted. If the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the display of the special figure 1 during the measurement of the symbol display time of the special figure 1, the measurement of the symbol display time of the special figure 1 is not interrupted.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 14, in each of the symbol display devices (the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative symbol display device 208) in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above. An example of the operation will be described. Here, FIG. 14 (a) is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation of each symbol display device in the normal game state, and FIG. 14 (b) is each symbol display device in the case of a small hit in the normal game state. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the operation in.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, the symbol variation display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decoration symbol. In the normal game state, a decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. After that, at the timing of t41, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the out-of-design, but in the special figure 1, the design variation display is continuously performed, and the decoration design display device 208 also continues the variation display of the decoration design. Is displayed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 2 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t42 is reached, one of the symbol variation displays of the special figure 2 which has been held is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Be started. In the special figure 1, the symbol variation display is continuously performed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 continues to display the variation of the decoration symbol accordingly. Thereafter, before the symbol variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the swing variation display with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, and then, at the timing of t43, the special symbol 1 loses the symbol. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols that are displayed by the swing fluctuation. At the timing of t44 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 1 has passed, one of the symbol change displays of the special figure 1 that has been held is exhausted, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is displayed. At the same time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Similarly, before the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses, the decoration symbol display device 208 starts the swing variation display with the combination of the decorative symbols that are out, and then at the timing of t45. In addition, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the lost decorative symbols displayed by the swing fluctuation. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t46 is reached, one of the reserved symbol change displays of the special figure 1 is consumed and the symbol change of the special figure 1 is exhausted. At the same time as the display is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state and the electric support state, the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1, and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 2 is displayed. Although the variable display of the decorative pattern is not performed, the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the variable display of the special figure 2 may be performed. For example, the variable display of the minimal pattern is performed. Alternatively, it may be displayed whether or not the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is being executed in the fourth symbol.

  Next, in the example shown in FIG. 14B, the symbol variation display is performed in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decoration symbol. In the normal game state, a decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Thereafter, before the symbol change time of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the swing fluctuation display with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, and then, at the timing of t51, the symbol of the special figure 1 is lost. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols that are displayed with the swing fluctuation. In the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. When the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and reaches the timing of t52, one symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which has been held is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed. At the same time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Thereafter, when the symbol change time of the special figure 2 (for example, 580 seconds) elapses and the timing of t53 is reached, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, the progress of the symbol variation time is temporarily stopped at this timing. However, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously displays the decorative symbols while the symbol variable time of the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped. This may make it difficult for the player to understand that the symbol change display of the special figure 1 has been interrupted. Thereafter, at the timing of t54 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the small hitting game is started. Thereafter, during the small hitting game, after the swing fluctuation display is started with the combination of the decorative patterns at the outset, the original symbol fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 starts, t56. At the timing of ', the decorative design display device 208 starts a standing effect described later. In this case, the decorative symbol change display is displayed in accordance with the original symbol change time of the special figure 1, but the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 and the small hit game ends after the small hit occurs Until the time when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed, the timing until the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed is postponed, so from the timing when the symbol fluctuation time of the original special figure 1 elapses to the time when the special figure 1 is actually stopped and displayed. During the period, the swing fluctuation display is continuously performed by the combination of the decorative patterns on the outside. Therefore, the player has an excessive sense of expectation that the symbols are delayed until the symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby not only reducing the interest of the game, but also causing the decorative symbols to be displayed in a fluctuating manner and becoming a big hit. There are times when you let it. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in such a case, it may be possible to solve such a problem by causing the effect to be delayed. Thereafter, at the timing of t55 after the small hitting game ends, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started. On the other hand, in the special figure 1, at this timing, the progress of the suspended symbol variation time is resumed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a pause effect is continuously performed until the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, when the symbol variation time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses and the timing of t56 is reached, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with an outlying symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special effect 1 is stopped and displayed in the form of a missing symbol, and then the effect is finished. Thereafter, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t57 is reached, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is exhausted, and the special figure 1 is displayed. The symbol variation display is started. At the same time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in response to the start of the symbol variable display of the special figure 1, the variable symbol display is started. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the special figure 1 variable display, the decorative display of the decorative pattern displayed according to the special figure 1 variable display is continued. However, it is necessary to provide a period of time corresponding to the period from the time when the symbol fluctuating time of the original special figure 1 is reached to the time when the symbol is actually stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 so that the player is not bored. In some cases, it is possible to suppress a decrease in playability. In addition, the time to perform the staggered effect is the same as the time (interruption time) from when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol until the small hit game ends, but not the same time. It may be executed at least during a period relating to the opening / closing operation of the variable winning port (second variable winning port 235a) in the small hitting game. Further, a plurality of types of effects may be prepared for the pause effect, or only one type may be prepared. In addition, in the case of providing a set effect between a plurality of types, for example, the effect may be selected at random, or the type of the set effect may be changed during execution under certain conditions. More specifically, for example, the type of staging effect may be changed depending on whether or not a specific SP reach has been performed. Further, the timing at which the execution of the pause effect is started is not limited to the above, and may be started at an appropriate timing.For example, the pause effect may be started during the small hit game, Before a small hitting game starts, a staggered effect may be started.

  Next, a first setting suggestion effect execution process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating the first setting suggestion effect execution process. The first setting suggestion effect execution process is a process that is started, for example, when an out ball command is received from the main control unit 300. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the out ball command, and may be activated when a winning port winning command is received. In the present embodiment, when an out ball command or a winning opening winning command is received, a point (setting suggestion point) corresponding to the type is counted in the first sub control unit 400. For example, when the first sub control unit 400 receives an out ball command output from the main control unit 300 when a game ball passes through the out ball detection sensor SWout, the setting suggestion point is counted “1” and the variable winning opening is set. When the first sub control unit 400 receives a winning opening winning command output from the main control unit 300 when a game ball enters the (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a), the setting suggestion point. Are counted "10". Note that, even when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a winning opening winning command transmitted when the ball enters another winning opening, points corresponding to the winning opening may be counted. . In addition, the setting suggestion point is counted only when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the out ball command, and the setting suggestion point is not counted when the game ball wins in various winning holes. Good. Further, the points to be counted may be made different according to the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the count number by receiving the out ball command is set to “1”, while in the big hit game state, the count number is set to “10”. In the normal game state, the count number at the time of winning the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 230, which is easy to win in the normal game state, is reduced to increase the count number in the probability change state or the electric support state, or during the big hit game. In this example, the count at the time of winning the variable winning opening (the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a) is reduced, and the count at the time of winning the variable winning opening during the small hit game is increased. You may. Alternatively, "1" may be counted when the out ball command is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Further, a table for determining the count number for generating the first setting suggestive effect may be selected by customizing the player.

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the setting suggestion point (P) stored in the RAM 408 is equal to or more than “3000” (step S501). When the CPU 404 determines that the setting suggestion point is equal to or more than “3000” (step S501; Yes), it resets the value of the setting suggestion point (P) to “0” (step S503), and then performs a suggestion effect execution lottery. The processing is executed (Step S505). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the setting suggestion point is equal to or more than “3000”, that is, when it determines that it is less than “3000” (step S501; No), the CPU 404 ends this processing.

  In the suggested effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 performs a lottery on whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect for suggesting to the player whether or not the setting is high. Specifically, a determination table corresponding to a preset set value from the settings 1 to 6 is read from the ROM 406, and a lottery is performed based on the read determination table to determine whether to execute the first setting suggestion effect. In the present embodiment, determination tables corresponding to the settings 4 to 6 are prepared, and the occurrence probabilities are different from one another. For example, in setting 4, 1/4 and the first setting suggestion effect are likely to appear, in setting 5, 1/8 and the first setting suggestion effect are less likely to appear than in setting 4, and in setting 6, 1/16 and 1/16. The first setting suggestion effect is less likely to appear than setting 4 or setting 5. In this embodiment, the determination table corresponding to the setting 3 or less is not prepared, but may be prepared. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may appear only during a specific period. For example, when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power, a symbol change display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is performed. The first setting suggestion effect may appear only until the operation is performed. In such a configuration, the player may be able to recognize that the setting has been changed. Further, the appearance rate in each setting of the above-described first setting suggestive effect is merely an example, and the appearance rate can be set as appropriate.

  In the first setting suggestion effect in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), in the lower right part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the shoji is opened, and the "high setting!" A Gol character GLG that smokes appears, corresponding to an effect that at least suggests to the player that the setting is high. The appearance position of the Gol character GLG differs depending on the appearance timing, but may be the same. Note that the content of the effect is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that any effect may be used as long as the effect at least indicates that the setting is high to the player.

  The CPU 404 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect as a result of the lottery in the suggestion effect execution lottery process (step S507). When determining that the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S507; YES), the CPU 404 executes an execution timing selection process (step S509). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S507; No), the process ends.

  The CPU 404 selects whether to immediately start the first setting suggestion effect or to start at another timing in the execution timing selection processing. For example, in the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect is started promptly with a probability of 70%, and the first setting suggestion effect is started at the start of the next symbol change display with a probability of 30%. When the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the effect may be started immediately or may be started at a timing different from the execution determination timing.

  As a result of the selection in the execution timing selection process, the CPU 404 determines whether or not to immediately start the first setting suggestion effect (step S511). If the CPU 404 does not determine to immediately start the first setting suggestion effect (step S511; No), the CPU 404 sets the start setting so that the first setting suggestion effect is executed at the start timing selected and determined in the execution timing selection process. Is performed (step S513), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the CPU 404 determines that the first setting suggestion effect is started immediately (step S511; Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether a second setting suggestion effect different from the first setting suggestion effect is being executed. (Step S515).

  When the CPU 404 determines that the second setting suggestion effect is being executed (step S515; Yes), the CPU 404 performs a first setting suggestion effect execution lottery process of randomly selecting whether to execute the first setting suggestion effect (step S515; Yes). Step S521). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the second setting suggestion effect is being executed (step S515; No), the CPU 404 determines whether the SP reach is being performed (step S517). When the CPU 404 determines that the SP reach is being performed (step S517; Yes), the first setting suggestion effect is performed after the start of the symbol variation display started after the SP reach is completed or after the start of the big hit start effect. After the start setting is performed so that is started (step S519), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the SP reach is being performed (Step S517; No), the process of Step S513 is performed, and then the process is terminated.

  In addition, as a result of performing the first setting suggestion effect execution lottery in the first setting suggestion effect execution lottery process of step S521, the CPU 404 determines whether to execute the first setting suggestion effect effect (step S523). When the CPU 404 determines that the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S523; Yes), the CPU 404 performs start setting so that the first setting suggestion effect is started after the second setting suggestion effect ends ( Step S525), and ends this processing. That is, the execution period of the second setting suggestion effect and the execution period of the first setting suggestion effect may be shifted to eliminate a period in which both are performed at the same time, thereby making it possible for the player to easily understand the effect.

  Next, the notification effect determination processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating the notice effect determination processing. The notice effect determination process is performed when the main control unit 300 pre-reads that special (SP) reach is to be executed in the special figure pre-reading process (FIG. 8: step S224) in the main control unit timer interrupt process. A prefetch result information command including information indicating that the execution of the SP reach is prefetched is transmitted from the control unit 300 to the first control unit 400, and after the first control unit 400 receives this, the next symbol variation display is displayed. This is a process to be started when such a symbol variation start command is received. In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the description, when the SP reach is executed, the pre-read result information command including the information to that effect is transmitted. When the symbol variation display is prefetched, a prefetch result information command including information on the symbol variation display may be transmitted.

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the prefetch flag has already been set in the RAM 408 (step S601). The prefetch flag is a flag that is set when a prefetch result information command is received from the main control unit 300, and is cleared when the prefetch notice ends.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the prefetch flag is set (step S601; Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether the continuous announcement flag is set (step S603). The continuous announcement flag is a flag that is set while the continuous announcement is being executed, and is cleared when the continuous announcement ends. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the prefetch flag is set (step S601; No), the process proceeds to step S623.

  When not determining that the continuous announcement flag is set (step S603; No), the CPU 404 executes a continuous announcement lottery process (step S605). More specifically, the lottery is performed using the continuous notice selection table at the time of SP reach selection shown in FIG. Here, FIG. 18A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the continuous announcement selection table when SP reach is selected.

  In the continuous announcement lottery process, the CPU 404 refers to the SP advance selection continuous announcement selection table shown in FIG. 18A when receiving a pre-read result information command including information that pre-reads that SP reach is to be executed. , A record to be used is selected depending on whether a big hit or a big hit occurs. In the continuous announcement lottery, the same table is selected regardless of the settings 1 to 6. Therefore, when a pre-read result information command including information that pre-reads that a jackpot SP reach (or a miss SP reach) is to be executed is received, a continuous notice is executed with the same probability regardless of the setting. It will be. Actually, since the jackpot probability differs between the settings, it can be said that the probability of occurrence of the continuous notice also differs between the settings as a whole, but it is read ahead that the jackpot SP reach is executed. It can also be said that the probability that the continuous notice is executed in the case where it is performed and the probability that the continuous notice is executed when the execution of the miss SP reach is prefetched are the same regardless of the setting.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the CPU 404 receives a prefetch result information command including information that prefetches that a SP hit to be a big hit will be executed, the CPU 404 executes a continuous notice with a probability of 1/2. It is determined that the continuous notice is not executed with a probability of 1/2. Further, when the CPU 404 receives the prefetch result information command including the prefetched information that the out-of-SP reach is to be executed, the CPU 404 determines that the continuous notice is to be executed with a probability of 1/5, Is determined not to execute the continuous notice.

  As a result of executing the continuous announcement lottery process, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement has been won (step S607). If it is determined that the continuous announcement has been won (step S607; Yes), the CPU 404 sets the continuous announcement flag (step S609), and then sets the decoration pattern combination to "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". (Step S611), and the process moves to Step S623. Here, the combination of the chances of “decoration 3−decoration 5−decoration 7” is a combination of out-of-order decoration symbols, and is a combination of decoration symbols stopped and displayed when a specific condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, there are a case where a continuous notice using a stop symbol of a decorative symbol is executed as a pre-read notice and a case where a stop is displayed in combination of chances when setting suggestion to be described later is performed.

  If the CPU 404 determines in step S603 that the continuous announcement flag is set (step S603; Yes), the process proceeds to step S611, and the combination of decorative symbols is set to the above-mentioned chance. .

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines in step S607 that it has not won the execution of the continuous notice (step S607; No), the CPU 404 proceeds to the process of step S613, and the symbol variation display is turned 50 times after the power is turned on. It is determined whether it is the following (step S613). If the CPU 404 determines that the symbol variation display is 50 rotations or less after the power is turned on (step S613; Yes), the CPU 404 determines whether or not stop display of a chance eye as a suggestive effect was performed in the previous symbol variation display. Is determined (step S615).

  If it is not determined that the suggestion effect has been executed in the previous symbol change display (step S615; No), the CPU 404 executes the suggestion effect execution lottery process (step S617). Specifically, a lottery is performed using the SP-reach-selection-time setting suggestion effect selection table shown in FIG. Here, FIG. 18B is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the setting suggestion effect selection table when SP reach is selected.

  In the suggested effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 refers to the SP reach selected setting suggested effect selection table, reads a record corresponding to the selected setting, and determines whether to execute the suggested effect. Specifically, in the case of the settings 1 to 3, the suggestion effect is not executed, and in the case of the setting 4, the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/16, and the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 15/16. do not do. In the case of the setting 5, the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/8, and the suggestion effect is not executed with a probability of 7/8. In the case of the setting 6, the suggestion effect is executed with a probability of 1/4, and the suggestion effect is not executed with a probability of 3/4. Therefore, when the SP reach is executed and the execution lottery of the continuous announcement is omitted, the execution lottery of the suggestion effect may be performed, and the probability of the execution of the suggestion effect differs depending on the setting. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is not performed in the settings 1 to 3, and the suggestion effect is easily executed in the order of the setting 6> the setting 5> the setting 4. In addition, you may make it perform a suggestion effect also in the setting 1-3. In addition, the selectivity of the suggested effect is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is 50 rotations or less after the power is turned on, a suggestion effect described later may be executed. It is configured not to run. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed on condition that the symbol variation display is within 50 rotations after the power is turned on. However, the period during which the suggestion effect can be executed may be appropriately set. Alternatively, the period in which the suggested effect can be executed may not be set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop display of the chance eyes as the suggested effect is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the suggestion effect execution lottery is not performed in the next symbol variation display, so that the suggestion effect is not performed. This prevents the production from being performed continuously, which may cause the player to be discouraged that the production was not a continuous production, but may be set so high that a chance as a suggested production appears. In some cases, you can have expectations.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the table is set so that the probability of executing the suggested effect changes according to the selected setting, but the setting is not changed when the setting is changed. The table may be set so that the suggested effect is more easily executed than in the case. Further, the table may be set so that the suggested effect is more easily executed when the setting is changed to the high setting than when the setting is not changed.

  As a result of executing the suggested effect execution lottery process, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the execution of the suggested effect has been won (step S619). If the CPU 404 determines that the proposed effect has been won (step S619; Yes), the CPU 404 sets the combination of the decorative patterns to be the combination of the chances of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” ( Step S621) and the process proceeds to step S623. In the present embodiment, as in the continuous announcement, as in the continuous announcement, stop display is performed with a combination of the decorative patterns of the “decoration 3−decoration 5−decoration 7” to identify either the continuous announcement or the suggestion effect. Although it is not possible, the player may be able to have some expectations.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 determines in step S613 that the symbol variation display is not more than 50 rotations after the power is turned on (step S613; No), the CPU 404 determines that the suggestion effect was executed in the previous symbol variation display. (Step S615; Yes), and if it is not determined that the execution of the suggested effect has been won (Step S619; No), the process proceeds to Step S623.

  Next, in step S623, the CPU 404 starts the special pattern change display this time from the special figure 1 of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and executes the special pattern change display of the special figure 1 during this execution of the special figure change display. The fluctuation display result of FIG. 2 is displayed, and it is determined whether or not the result is to cause a small hit (step S623). The CPU 404 can determine, based on the special figure stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 300, whether or not the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed while the special figure 1 is fluctuating. It is possible to specify whether or not FIG. 1 is a small hit. If the CPU 404 determines that a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (step S623; Yes), it determines whether or not the prefetch flag is set in the RAM 408 (step S623). S625). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the execution of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 (step S623; No), the CPU 404 ends the announcement effect determination processing.

  If the CPU 404 determines that the prefetch flag is set (step S625; Yes), the CPU 404 executes a prefetch advance notice lottery process (step S627). As shown in FIG. 14 (b), when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the symbol change display of the special figure 1, the CPU 404 performs the initial display in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. The delay effect is executed after the symbol change time of the special figure 1 elapses, and it is determined whether or not to perform a pre-reading notice as the delay effect (the delay look-ahead notice effect). In the present embodiment, whether or not to perform the pre-reading advance notice is performed, for example, with a probability of 1/2. However, the pre-reading advance notice may be performed without fail.

  The CPU 404 determines whether or not the long-ahead pre-reading notice lottery has been won as a result of performing the long-ahead pre-fetch notice lottery process (step S629). If the CPU 404 determines that the player has won the delayed look-ahead preview lottery (step S629; Yes), the type of the small hit (whether a small hit is made with the "special figure f" or a small hit is made with the "special figure g") After performing the setting so that the prefetch notice effect is executed (step S631), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in step S625, the CPU 404 does not determine that the prefetch flag is set (step S625; No), or, in step S629, does not determine that the prefetching preliminary lottery is won (step S629). ; No), the process proceeds to step S633, and it is determined whether or not the symbol variation display of this special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach (step S633). When the CPU 404 determines that the current pattern variation display of the special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach (step S633; Yes), the CPU 404 is to give a presentation effect that does not include a notice, and to change the background and the like. A setting is made so that the stage change effect is executed (step S635). There is a case where a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 in the symbol fluctuation display including the SP reach and a long period is required until the SP reach is completed and the symbol is fixedly displayed, but if the swing fluctuation is continued during this period, In some cases, the player may have an unnecessary sense of expectation that the fluctuation will cause a big hit. In the present embodiment, in the case of performing a staging effect after performing the SP reach, by performing a stage change effect, it is possible to switch a disappointing feeling due to a shift in the SP reach, and to lose. In some cases, this can be easily recognized. It should be noted that, regarding the special figure 1, the contents of the design effect display may be different between the symbol change display that is out of position after the SP reach is executed and the design change display that is out of the box without the reach effect. In addition, a stage change effect may be performed after a result of executing a certain SP reach having a high jackpot reliability becomes incorrect. In addition, in the case where it is out of place without a reach effect, a staggered effect may be performed to avoid a stage change. Also, if a certain SP reach is executed and it is missed, if it is not interrupted due to a small hit in the special figure 2, a stage change effect is performed, but a certain SP reach is executed and it becomes a miss. In such a case, if the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted due to a small hit in the special figure 2, the effect is provided with a delay, but the stage change effect may not be accompanied. In addition, when a certain SP reach with a large hit reliability is executed and a loss occurs, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, a stage change effect is accompanied. The production may be performed for a long time.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 404 does not determine that the symbol variation display of this special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach (step S633; No), the CPU 404 sets so as to perform the normal pause effect as the pause effect ( Step S637).

  Thereafter, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the continuous announcement flag is set (step S639). If the CPU 404 does not determine that the continuous announcement flag is set (Step S639; No), the CPU 404 clears the prefetch flag (Step S641), and ends the announcement effect determination processing. On the other hand, when determining that the continuous announcement flag is set (step S639; Yes), the CPU 404 ends the announcement effect determination process without executing the process of step S641.

  In the present embodiment, when the execution of the SP reach is prefetched (that is, when the specific variation time is selected in advance), the lottery of the continuous announcement effect and the lottery of the setting suggestion effect are performed. As described above, for the setting suggestion effect, the execution lottery may be performed even when it is pre-read that the other variable time has been selected, or the setting suggestion effect may be performed regardless of the result of the pre-reading. A lottery may be performed.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery of the setting suggestion effect is performed when the execution lottery of the continuous announcement effect is not won. It may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the history of the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the history of the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed, for example, by operating the operation key unit 190 in the standby state. In this case, the history in which the continuous notice has been executed may not be distinguished from the history in which the setting suggestion effect has been executed. Further, the number of times the continuous announcement effect is executed or the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery of the continuous announcement effect and the setting suggestion effect is performed using the tables shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B. By doing so, the appearance rate of the continuous announcement effect and the setting suggestion effect may be changeable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery of the continuous announcement effect is performed even when the execution of the out-of-service SP reach is pre-read, but the execution lottery of the continuous announcement effect is performed only when the execution of the big hit SP reach is pre-read. You may do so. According to this, since the continuous announcement effect is always executed, the jackpot is always achieved, so that the expectation for the jackpot is further increased. On the other hand, if the chance eyes do not appear continuously, it is a setting suggestion effect. It may be understood that the interest in the game can be further enhanced. In addition, during a period in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, a period from turning on the power to 50 rotations), a continuous announcement effect is provided in both the case where the execution of the jackpot SP reach is prefetched and the case where the execution of the off-SP reach is prefetched. In the period other than the period in which the execution lottery is performed and the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the period exceeding 50 rotations after the power is turned on), the continuous lottery effect execution lottery is performed only when the execution of the jackpot SP reach is pre-read. In a period in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, the continuous announcement effect is executed, so that the big hit symbol mode may be finally displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the execution of the jackpot SP reach is pre-read and the execution is out of the continuous announcement effect execution lottery, the setting suggestion effect execution lottery is performed. Therefore, in the period from when the power is turned on to when the symbol variation display is executed 50 times, even if the display of the chance is suggested by the setting suggestion, the big hit symbol is finally finally displayed by accident. There is. Therefore, even when the setting suggestion effect is executed, a sense of expectation of a big hit may be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is suppressed from being continuously executed, but may be continuously executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to perform the continuous announcement effect in the next symbol variation display in which the setting suggestion effect has been executed, the continuous announcement effect is displayed from the next symbol variation display in which the setting suggestion effect has been executed. Although it will be executed, the continuous announcement effect may be suppressed from being executed in the next symbol variation display after the setting suggestion effect has been executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if there is a look-ahead flag and a small hit occurs in Tokujin Figure 2, there is a case where the delaying look-ahead preview effect is executed. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the wait-for-read notice effect is performed while the type of the small hit is provided, but the wait-for-read notice effect may be performed for the same content regardless of the type of the small hit. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2, the contents of the staging effect are made different depending on whether or not the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is accompanied by SP reach. Regardless of whether the SP reach is performed or not, the content of the staging effect may be the same.

  Next, a description is given, with reference to FIG. 17, of a first-time-big-hit suggestion effect selection process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. Here, FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating the first-time-big-hit suggested effect selection process. The initial big hit suggestion effect selection process is a process executed when, for example, a special figure change start command indicating that a big change symbol display is started is received from the main control unit 300 in the normal gaming state. is there.

  First, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 reads out the current setting value stored in the RAM 408 (Step S701).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 determines whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit (step S703). If the CPU 404 determines that it is a probability-change big hit, the CPU 404 refers to the first-time probability-change big-hit re-lottery setting suggestion effect selection table stored in the ROM 406 (step S705). On the other hand, when the CPU 404 does not determine that the big hit is a probability variable big hit, the CPU 404 refers to the initial normal big hit re-lottery setting suggestion effect selection table shown in FIG. 18C stored in the ROM 406 (step S707).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 selects a field to be used for the lottery from the referenced table and the current setting value read from the RAM 408, and determines the combination of the decorative symbol before the re-change and the combination of the decorative symbols after the re-change. A determination process is performed (step S709). More specifically, when the result of the present symbol variation display is a normal jackpot (for example, a jackpot in “Special Figure A”), the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first normal jackpot re-lottery selection in FIG. If any one of the settings 1 to 3 is referred to, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 100%, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration" 0-decoration 0 "(except for" decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "), select any one of the jackpot decoration pattern combinations.

  If the setting is 4, the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 90%, and the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols is changed with a probability of 10% before and after the re-lottery. That is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is referred to as “decoration 0−decoration 0−decoration 0”, “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”, “decoration 6−decoration 6−decoration 6”, and “decoration 8−decoration”. Any one of "8-decoration 8" is selected, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more.

  In addition, if the setting is 5, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 70%, and the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols is changed before and after the re-lottery with a probability of 20%. The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the lottery is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration" 8 ", and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to" decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ", and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 5%. That is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is “decoration 0−decoration 0−decoration 0”, “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”, “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4”, “decoration 6−decoration 6”. Any one of "decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8" In addition to the selection, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 5%, that is, before the re-lottery. Of the jackpot decoration pattern is selected from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9". Decoration 5-Decoration 5 ". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more.

  In addition, if the setting is 6, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with the probability of 50%, and the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols is changed with the probability of 36% before and after the re-lottery. The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the lottery is "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0", "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" and "decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration" 8), the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 7%. That is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is “decoration 0−decoration 0−decoration 0”, “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”, “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4”, “decoration 6−decoration 6”. Any one of “decoration 6-decoration 6” and “decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8” In addition to the selection, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is changed to "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 7%, that is, before the re-lottery. Of the jackpot decoration pattern is selected from "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 9-decoration 9-decoration 9". Decoration 5-Decoration 5 ". Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more. Note that there may be a case where an effect that can suggest that the setting is 6 is performed before and after the re-lottery.

  If the result of the present symbol variation display is a probability change big hit (for example, "big hit" in "Tokuzu B"), the setting suggestion effect selection table at the time of the first chance change big hit re-lottery selection in FIG. In the case of any one of 1-3, the combination of the big hit decoration patterns before and after the re-change is changed with a probability of 70%, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1"-"decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" (Except “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”). In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or the big hit end effect, an effect for notifying the transition to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game may be made. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-change with a probability of 5% is not changed, and the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is used. Select In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 25%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed from “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” to “decoration 0-decoration 0”. Any one of the jackpot decoration pattern combinations from “decoration 0” (excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”) and the jackpot decoration after the re-lottery The combination of the patterns is set to “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” or “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”. Thereby, it may be possible to see the combination of the big hit decorative symbols and to notify that the game is shifted to the certain change state after the big hit game.

  If the setting is 4, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 60%, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" ("decoration Excluding “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or the big hit end effect, an effect for notifying the transition to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game may be made. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-change with a probability of 5% is not changed, and the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is used. Select In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 25%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed from “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” to “decoration 0-decoration 0”. Any one of the jackpot decoration pattern combinations from “decoration 0” (excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”) and the jackpot decoration after the re-lottery The combination of the patterns is set to “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” or “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”. Also, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 2%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0”, “decoration 2—decoration 2”. -Decoration 2 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 ", and change the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery to" decoration 4-decoration 4 ". -Decoration 4 ". In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 8%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” and “decoration 5-decoration 5”. One of “decoration 5” and “decoration 9—decoration 9—decoration 9” is selected, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4.” In this embodiment, before and after the re-lottery, by changing the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns by odd numbers to the combination of jackpot decoration symbols by even numbers, by performing a seemingly contradictory effect of apparent rank down, it becomes a definite state after the jackpot game In some cases, the expectation of the shift can be further increased. In addition, when the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols from the odd symbol to the even symbol is changed before and after the re-lottery effect, the setting suggestion may always be included. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is different, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”, so that the player has four or more settings. You may be able to suggest that.

  In addition, if the setting is 5, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 40%, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" ( Excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”). In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or the big hit end effect, an effect for notifying the transition to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game may be made. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-change with a probability of 5% is not changed, and the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is used. Select In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 25%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed from “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” to “decoration 0-decoration 0”. Any one of the jackpot decoration pattern combinations from “decoration 0” (excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”) and the jackpot decoration after the re-lottery The combination of the patterns is set to “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” or “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 4%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” and “decoration 2-decoration 2”. -Decoration 2 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 ", and change the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery to" decoration 4-decoration 4 ". -Decoration 4 ". Also, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 16%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 5-decoration 5”. One of “decoration 5” and “decoration 9—decoration 9—decoration 9” is selected, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4.” In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 5%. -Decoration 2 "," decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "or" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 " The combination of the decorative patterns is set as “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 5%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” and “decoration 9-decoration 9”. −decoration 9 ”, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set as“ decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5 ”. Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more.

  In addition, if the setting is 6, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is not changed before and after the re-change with a probability of 20%, and "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" to "decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0" ( Excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”). In this case, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or the big hit end effect, an effect for notifying the transition to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game may be made. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-change with a probability of 5% is not changed, and the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is used. Select In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 25%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed from “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” to “decoration 0-decoration 0”. Any one of the jackpot decoration pattern combinations from “decoration 0” (excluding “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” and “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”) and the jackpot decoration after the re-lottery The combination of the patterns is set to “decoration 3−decoration 3−decoration 3” or “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”. In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 6%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” and “decoration 2-decoration 2”. -Decoration 2 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 ", and change the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery to" decoration 4-decoration 4 ". -Decoration 4 ". Further, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 30%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 5-decoration 5”. One of “decoration 5” and “decoration 9—decoration 9—decoration 9” is selected, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set to “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4.” In addition, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 7%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 0-decoration 0-decoration 0” and “decoration 2-decoration 2”. -Decoration 2 "," decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "," decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 "and" decoration 8-decoration 8-decoration 8 " The combination of the decorative patterns is set as “decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5”. Further, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before and after the re-lottery is changed with a probability of 7%, that is, the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns before the re-lottery is changed to “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” and “decoration 9-decoration 9”. −decoration 9 ”, and the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns after the re-lottery is set as“ decoration 5−decoration 5−decoration 5 ”. Thereby, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the setting is 4 or more or 5 or more. Note that there may be a case where an effect that can suggest that the setting is 6 is performed before and after the re-lottery.

  In the stop decoration symbol determination process, when the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols before and after the re-lottery is determined using the table as described above, the CPU 404 stops the jackpot decoration symbol before the re-lottery and stops after the re-lottery. The data of the jackpot decoration pattern is set so as to be a combination of the determined jackpot decoration patterns (step S711).

  Subsequently, the CPU 404 reads the payout number setting suggestion effect selection table corresponding to the current setting value read from the RAM 408 (step S713). Specifically, if the current setting value is “4”, the CPU 404 reads the payout number setting suggestion effect selection table for setting 4 shown in FIG. 19A, and if the current setting value is “5”, If so, the payout number setting suggestion selection table for setting 5 shown in FIG. 19B is read out, and if the current setting value is “6”, the payout number setting for setting 6 shown in FIG. Read the suggestion effect selection table. Normally, when a sharp number (number of drills) for every 2500 is counted, such as "2500 pt" or "5000 pt", a "number of drills display image", which will be described later, in which the display mode is changed is displayed ( For example, the display of the acquired total prize ball number is enlarged and displayed), and the player is notified of the fact. In the present embodiment, in addition to the drill number display image displayed by the drill number, Using the above-mentioned number-of-balls-setting suggestion effect selection table, the display mode may be changed even when the number becomes a number other than the number of drills (for example, a number such as “4560” or “5550”). By making a simple display, it is suggested that the setting is high.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the contents of the payout number setting suggestion effect selection table will be described. FIG. 19A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a setting 4 payout number setting suggesting effect selection table, and FIG. 19B is a diagram showing the contents of the setting 5 payout number setting suggestive effect selection table. FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a set 6 payout number setting suggestive effect selection table. Although the number-of-ballshots setting suggestion effect selection table corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 is not prepared, it may be prepared.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a), the setting number of balls to be set suggestion effect selection table for setting 4 does not make a high setting suggestion in a display mode of the total number of balls with a probability of 70%, and has a probability of 10% with a probability of 10%. When the number becomes "4440", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed, and when the total number of balls becomes "4560", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed with a probability of 10%. Then, with a probability of 10%, the display mode of the total number of balls is changed both when the total number of balls reaches “4440” and when the total number of balls reaches “4560”. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable with the timing of the change in the display mode of the total number of balls to be played during the big hit game, and may be able to have a sense of expectation for the high setting (setting 4 or more).

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the setting number payout number setting suggestion effect selection table does not perform the high setting suggestion by the display mode of the total payout number with a probability of 50% and the total payout number with a probability of 10%. When the number becomes "4440", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed, and when the total number of balls becomes "4560", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed with a probability of 10%. With a probability of 10%, the display mode of the total number of balls is changed both when the total number of balls reaches “4440” and when the total number of balls reaches “4560”, and with a probability of 5%, the total number of balls The display mode of the total number of balls to be displayed is changed both when the number becomes “4440” and when the number becomes “5550”, and when the total number of balls becomes “4560” with a probability of 5%, Total output in both cases when it reaches "5600" To vary the number of display modes. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable with the timing of the change of the display mode of the total number of balls to be played during the big hit game, and may be able to have an expectation for the high setting (setting 4 or more, or setting 5 or more). .

  As shown in FIG. 19 (c), the set number of balls to be set setting suggestion effect selection table does not make a high setting suggestion based on the display mode of the total number of balls with a probability of 30%, and has a probability of 20% with a probability of 20%. When the number becomes "4440", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed, and when the total number of balls becomes "5550", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed with a probability of 10%. With a probability of 10%, the display mode of the total number of balls is changed both when the total number of balls reaches "4440" and when the total number of balls reaches "5550". With a probability of 15%, the total number of balls When the number becomes "6660", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed, and when the total number of balls becomes "7777", the display mode of the total number of balls is changed with a probability of 15%. To As a result, the player feels a sense of incongruity in the timing of the change in the display mode of the total number of balls played during the big hit game, and can give a sense of expectation to the high setting (setting 4 or more, setting 5 or more, or setting 6). There are cases.

  The CPU 404 determines the change pattern of the display mode of the total number of balls using the number-of-balls setting suggestion effect selection table corresponding to the current setting value as described above, and the display mode of the total number of balls using the determined change pattern. Is set to change (step S715), and then the first big hit suggestion effect selection process ends.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the high setting suggestion is set to be different by referring to a different table for each setting, but the high setting suggestion is performed at the same appearance rate regardless of the setting. Alternatively, the higher setting may make it easier for the high setting suggestion to appear, or conversely, the higher the setting may be, the less likely it is for the high setting suggestion to appear. In particular, even if the appearance rates are the same irrespective of the settings, the appearance rates may naturally differ because the big hit probability differs between the settings in the first place. Or, in the first place, the setting suggestion does not actually perform a false effect, so for example, if the setting is 1, the appearance rate is 0%, and the appearance rate of the high setting suggestion is naturally set. It can be said that it changes with the difference. This can be applied to the setting suggestion effect described above, and it is needless to say that the setting suggestion effect described below can be applied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, in each symbol display device (first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208) in the pachinko machine 100 configured as described above. An example of the operation will be described. Here, FIG. 20A is a timing chart illustrating an example of an operation of each symbol display device when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts during the small hitting game in the normal game state, and FIG. Is a timing chart illustrating an example of an operation of each symbol display device when a small hit is made in a normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), in the special figure 2, a symbol change display with a small hit is performed, but in the special figure 1, a standby state is set. In addition, since the game is in the normal gaming state, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform the variable display of the decorative symbol, and displays the symbol in a standby state. Thereafter, at the timing of t61, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol. At the timing of t62 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the small hit game is started. During the small hit game, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 at the timing of t63, a lottery or the like for determining whether or not to make a big hit is performed, and then the symbol change of the special figure 1 is performed. The display is started, but since the small hit game related to the small hit in the special figure 2 is in progress, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, but the state is immediately interrupted. Thereafter, when the small hitting game ends at the timing of t64, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 which has been interrupted is restarted (substantially started). Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the original symbol variation time of the special figure 1 is approached, the swing variation is started by the combination of the decorative symbols that have been lost, and then the pause effect is started at the timing of t65. . After that, at the timing of t66, when the symbol fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the outlying symbol, and the special symbol display device 208 stops and displays the special figure 1 with the outlying symbol. At the same time, the production effect is finished, and the stop decoration is displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns. Thereafter, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and becomes the timing of t67, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 in which the symbol variation display is suspended is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is exhausted. The symbol variation display is started. At the same time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in response to the start of the symbol variable display of the special figure 1, the variable symbol display is started. Similarly, before the symbol change time (for example, 5 seconds) of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the swing variable display with the combination of the decorative symbols that are out, and then at the timing of t68. In addition, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of the lost decorative symbols displayed by the swing fluctuation. Thereafter, similarly, at the timing of t69 after the symbol display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Note that, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, there is a game property that recommends left-handing. Therefore, when a right strike is detected in the normal game state (for example, the passage of the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252 is detected), for example, a warning display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 to urge the left strike. However, in the small hitting game state, a profit cannot be given to the player unless the player makes a right-handed hit, so that a display prompting a right-handed even in a short time is displayed. In such a case, if a warning display prompting left-handing is made immediately after the small hitting game state ends, the game willingness may decrease. In the present embodiment, after the small hitting game is over, a display urging left-handing is not displayed for a certain period (for example, 30 seconds). This period (period indicated by t64 to t70) may be referred to as a “leftward warning suppression period”. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hitting game is executed, the right-handed operation is performed and the state continues, and the left-handed warning suppression period elapses even when the symbol change display is started a plurality of times. Until then, no warning is given to encourage left-handers.

  In this example, when a game ball wins in the special figure 1 starting port (upper) 230 during the small hit game related to the small hit in the special figure 2, the symbol change of the special figure 1 starts and the progress is interrupted. On the other hand, the decorative display corresponding to the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is displayed, but the variable display of the decorative symbol may not be started until the small hitting game is completed. In this case, the execution time of the variation display of the decorative symbol may correspond to the symbol variation time of the special figure 1, and the pause effect may not be executed. Alternatively, an effect different from the delayed effect may be executed.

  Next, in the example shown in FIG. 20B, the symbol variation display is performed on both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decoration symbol. In the normal game state, a decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Thereafter, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol at the timing of t71 before the symbol change time of the special figure 1 elapses. At this time, the progress of the special figure 1 during the variable display is temporarily suspended, and a suspension period is started. However, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously displays the decorative symbols while the symbol variable time of the special figure 1 is temporarily stopped. This may make it difficult for the player to understand that the symbol change display of the special figure 1 has been interrupted. Thereafter, at the timing of t72 after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 has elapsed, the small hit game is started. After that, even though the special figure 1 is the suspension period, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the variation of the decorative symbol, and thus may shift to SP reach at the timing of t73. That is, it can be said that a situation in which the SP reach effect is being performed during the small hit game can occur. Then, when the small hitting game ends at the timing of t74, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which has been interrupted is restarted. Since a certain period (for example, 30 seconds, a period shown from t74 to t75) from the timing of t74 is a left-handing warning suppression period, even if right-handing is continuously performed, if it is within the period, There is no warning to make a left strike. Note that, even if the left-handing warning suppression period has elapsed at the timing of t75, when right-handing is performed, a warning prompting left-handing is issued. As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, when a long symbol change time such as SP reach is selected, the small hit of the special figure 2 is displayed during the symbol change display of the special figure 1 being executed. Even if it occurs, it can be said that there is a case in which a warning urging left-handing is issued during the symbol change display of the special figure 1.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 21 shows a decorative symbol display device 208. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the general figure hold lamp 216 are omitted from the drawings. ing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21A, a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Also, a mini symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display area, and the variable display and the stop display are performed in accordance with the decorative symbol which is largely displayed at the center of the display screen.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol / holding number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol) and also notifying the number of holdings. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area of Toku-zu 2 is provided at the lower left. In addition, at the upper right of the display area, a symbol change notification area of special figure 1 is provided, and at the lower right, a symbol change notification area of special figure 2 is provided. It should be noted that a general-flag symbol change notification area and a general-figure reserved number display area may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 matches the reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 is Has been matched to the number of holds. Further, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1, while the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, for example, a large hit is stopped and displayed according to the result, and a small hit is displayed as “△”. Is stopped and displayed, and if it is off, it is stopped and displayed with "x". In addition, during the symbol change display of the special figure 1, the display of "-" blinks, and it may be possible to recognize that the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is being performed. The display in the design changing display area of the special figure 2 is the same as the display in the design changing display area of the special figure 1. Changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, blinking mode of the fourth symbol, or changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the number-of-reserved-number display area, the advance notice and the advance notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed are provided. May go.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 21 is a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided to the left of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal game state, the reservation icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reservation icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the number-of-retention display area of Toku-zu 1, and also by the number of reservation icons in Toku-zu 1. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 2. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 21A, two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and both the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a round pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that in FIG. 21A, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special map 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 21 is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). This is because a prize at the starting port 232 of the special figure 2 does not make much sense when the losing occurs or when a small hit occurs, is extremely long (for example, 580 seconds).

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a reserved icon display area of a special figure in which a display result is easily displayed in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state). That is, in the present embodiment, when the control state is the normal game state or the electric support state (the special figure low probability general figure high probability state), the display result of the special figure 1 is easily displayed as described above. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the control state is the probable change state (the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state) On the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be the same or different. .

  In the present embodiment, the symbol change display of the special figure is started in the order of the change start on the special figure display device → the start of the change display of the fourth symbol → the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon → the start of the change of the decorative symbol. However, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 21 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is performed. No change has occurred in the pending icon or decorative design yet.

  In FIG. 21C, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has been started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current symbol change) located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and the second hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative symbol has not been started.

  In FIG. 21 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 21 (e), the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change, reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change, has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Floating display of decorative symbols has not been started. Note that when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (g), an operation prompt notification image 136P for urging the user to press the effect button 136 within the validity period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol change display is started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the main character image. The change display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize from the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 or the like that the special figure is changing. . Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 21 (h), the validity period has decreased, and in FIG. 21 (i), the player has pressed the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the validity period, as shown in FIG. 21 (j), a reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry notice image 2071, a character display of "Chance!" Is displayed on the right side of the main character image.

  In FIG. 21 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the display of the change in the decorative pattern becomes visible, and thereafter, the apparatus enters the reach state as shown in FIG. Although the reach state entry notice image 2071 may be displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect which is a trigger of a notice of a currently performed symbol change display.

  In FIG. 21 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol / number-of-reservations display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, moves to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed. , SP (special) reach (swordsman reach). An image of the enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (n), and the duel between the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 may be not only an advance notice of entering a reach state but also an advance notice of developing to SP reach.

  FIG. 22: is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 step by step.

  In FIG. 22 (p) following FIG. 21 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 22 (s). In FIG. 22 (s), the protagonist of the hero defeats the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 22 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol / reserve count display area 284 and the mini symbol. Instead of non-display, a background image different from the background image may be displayed. Alternatively, in this scene, a display of a setting suggestion may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 7 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4” is displayed. The background here may be non-display or a background image different from the background image. In addition, the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are kept disappearing, and only the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbols are displayed. In addition, the variable display is continuously performed on any of the mini symbols until the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (v), the decoration design starts changing display again with the display of the character “Re-lottery!”, And a re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, "decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3" or "decorative 7-decorative", which is a combination of decorative patterns that determine a big hit and a transition to a probable change state advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game. The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7" is fueling the expectation of being finally displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (w), the combination of the decorative patterns is determined to be the "variable 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" from the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". This shows a state in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating this is displayed. At this time, an effect display EF1 in which stars flash around the decorative symbol after the stop is displayed, informing that the so-called stopped jackpot decorative symbol combination has been ranked up.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (x), the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” that has been determined to have the 6R certain variable big hit is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 22 (x) is stopped and displayed with “○”, and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of “777”. In FIG. 22 (x), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 22 (y), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "big chance big hit" is displayed together with a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here), and a character of "Please hit right!" Is urged to right-hand. In the big hit game start effect shown in FIG. 22 (y), a display including a setting suggestion may be displayed. In this case, only when a big hit that satisfies some condition is satisfied (for example, only in the case of the first big hit after the power is turned on, only when a big hit of 5 or more chan occurs, The display including the setting suggestion may be displayed only at the big hit with the largest number of balls (for example, only when the hit is 10R big hit).

  On the other hand, as a result of the re-lottery effect shown in FIG. 22 (v), for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (w ′) to FIG. There is. In other words, there may be a case where the re-lottery is failed. However, in the present embodiment, even when the stop display is not performed in the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the probable change big hit is determined, for example, the promotion effect in the big hit effect can be given a sense of expectation. In some cases, expectations can be maintained.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the mode of the re-lottery effect is one type, there are a plurality of types, and the degree of the change of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols before and after the re-lottery depends on the mode of the executed re-lottery effect. It may be changed, for example, in the order of re-lottery effect in the mode involving the action of the accessory> re-lottery effect by symbol change display by frame advance> re-lottery effect by high-speed fluctuation> re-lottery effect by slow fluctuation The degree of expectation that the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns changes before and after the lottery may be made high. The order and mode of the degree of expectation are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a jackpot game centered on a decorative symbol display device in a stepwise manner. 23, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (a), after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 has become a 6R probability variable hit (it is difficult to determine whether it is a normal hit or a probability variable hit in production). In this case, the state has shifted to the first round. In the first round, on the decorative design display device 208, the character "Congratulations!" Is displayed together with the character of Dr. Machiko on the center left side of the display screen, celebrating the big hit. In the case where it is determined that the winning pattern is a variable jackpot based on the combination of the decorative patterns at the time of the big hit (for example, the case of the big hit with the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”), As shown in FIG. 23 (a '), the character "Congratulations on great chance!" Is displayed in place of the character "Congratulations!", So that a great deal of balls can be obtained. In the lower left corner of the display screen, the number of hits from the first big hit (including small hits; sometimes referred to as “number of consecutive chans”) is displayed, and in the upper left corner, a big hit decoration when a big hit occurs The symbol "decoration 4" is displayed. In the upper center of the display screen, the current round number “1R” is displayed as a round number display, and below that, the number of prize balls acquired in the current jackpot game and the number acquired in the current jackpot game are displayed. “32/480 get!” Indicating the expected number of prize balls is displayed. That is, since four game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a after the start of the current big hit, the acquisition of the number of award balls of 32 is notified and the 480 prize balls of the present big hit are obtained. It is shown that the acquisition can be expected. In the lower right of the display screen, the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit is displayed, and this numerical value is equal to the number of the winning prize balls obtained in the big hit and the small hit. It is incremented (counted up) every time. Therefore, during the jackpot game relating to the first jackpot, the total acquired prize balls are not counted up until the jackpot ends, and remain at "0 pt". Each time a prize ball is acquired in a win, the number may be added to the total acquired prize ball number. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls generated by winning a variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a) is added. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize may also be added. For example, the number of prize balls obtained by winning a specific general prize port capable of winning by right-handing may be further added. It may be.

  FIG. 23 (b) shows a state where the third round game is being played. In the present embodiment, since the big hit is achieved by the combination of the big hits of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4”, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the hit is a constant change big hit or a normal big hit. Therefore, in the third round, a promotion effect for notifying whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit is performed. When the promotion effect is started, the character “Promotion Chance!” Is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to give a sense of expectation to the probability of a big hit. Note that the promotion effect may not be performed, the promotion effect may or may not be performed, or the promotion effect may be performed without fail. In the present embodiment, the promotion effect is not performed when it is determined that the jackpot is a variable jackpot by the combination of the decorative patterns at the time of the big hit, but the promotion effect may be performed. , Setting suggestions may be included.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), a state in which the result of the promotion effect is displayed is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 23 (c), a state in which the promotion effect has been successful is shown, and the characters “promotion!” And “the next small hit RUSH rush” are displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, It is reported that this big hit is a probable big hit. On the other hand, if the promotion effect has failed, the character "Sorry ..." is displayed as shown in FIG. It should be noted that, by failing in the promotion effect, it may be possible to confirm that a normal jackpot has been established, or to have another promotion effect (for example, a reversal effect in the ending) to make sure that the change is still positive. You may not make it clear whether it is a big hit or not. At the timing shown in FIG. 23C, it is the third round, and it is shown that 22 game balls have entered the first variable winning opening 234a and 176 prize balls have been acquired. I have.

  FIG. 23D shows a state in which the sixth round is over and a jackpot end effect is being performed. Note that the example illustrated in FIG. 23D illustrates a state in which an effect that is determined to be a probability-change big hit is being performed. When the big hit end effect starts, a character of “small hit RUSH rush!” Is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that the state is shifted to the certainty changing state (the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state). Also, an animation is started in which the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed on the lower right of the display screen is started, and 480 prize balls obtained in the current big hit are added. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal jackpot is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 23 (d '), the characters "big hit end" and "hour saving rush!" Are displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed, and it is notified that the state shifts to the electric support state (the special figure low probability general figure high probability state). In addition, the display indicating the total acquired prize ball count is performed in the same manner as when transitioning to the probable change state even when shifting to the electric support state, and the display of the total acquired prize ball number after the count up is displayed. Is displayed continuously until the power support state ends, but in the case of a normal big hit, the display of the total number of winning prize balls may not be performed.

  In addition, you may make it change the expectation degree which succeeds in the promotion effect during a jackpot game by the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns at the time of the jackpot. For example, the jackpot ("decoration 3" or "decoration 7") Probable change confirmation)> A jackpot with an odd symbol other than "decoration 3" and "decoration 7"> It may be easy to succeed in the promotion promotion in the order of the jackpot with an even symbol.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in the probable game state centering on the decorative symbol display device in a stepwise manner. 24, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  FIG. 24A shows a state in which the big hit game relating to the first big hit has ended, and the first symbol change display has started after shifting to the probable change state. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a simultaneous fluctuating machine capable of simultaneously performing the symbol fluctuating display on the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, so that when the big hit game ends, the special figure Both the symbol variation display of No. 1 and the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 start almost simultaneously. In the probable change state, different from the normal game state or the electric support state, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol fluctuating display of the special figure 2.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (a), the characters "Small hit RUSH rush!" Displayed in the big hit game end effect are continuously displayed, and the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is displayed. On the left side of the figure, there is shown a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner. At the bottom right of the display screen, the animation of counting up the number of prize balls (480) obtained in the jackpot game relating to the first jackpot is continuously performed. In addition, a mini symbol and a right-handed display for instructing right-handed are displayed at the upper left.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 24 is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the reservation icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reservation icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of reserved icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 282 of the special map 2, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 24A, three reserved icons h21, h22, and h23 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the reserved icons h21, h22, and h3 of the three special figures 1 are displayed. Each of h23 is displayed in a default display mode (a round, unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokujin 2 is a round hold icon. Note that in FIG. 24A, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. .

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area of the special map 1. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 24 is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). This is because the variable display in FIG.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (b) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 has ended after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 24 (b), in the present embodiment, after the big hit game ends, the “small hit RUSH entry” displayed in the big hit game end effect until the four symbol change displays of the special figure 2 end. "!" Is displayed continuously, and the effect of making it appear that the game has smoothly transitioned to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (b), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen also corresponds to “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration”. The display is stopped and displayed at the combination of the decorative symbols at the edge of "1". Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "441" in accordance with this. In addition, in the special figure 1, the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 24B, the count-up animation in the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen has ended, and the game has been won in the jackpot game relating to the first jackpot. “0480 pt” indicating the number of winning balls is displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (c) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the fourth symbol change display of the special figure 2 has started. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (c), there is no symbol change display on hold in the special figure 1 (that is, 0 on hold), and the display is stopped as a result of the loss. In addition, there is no symbol variation display that is suspended in the special figure 2 (that is, suspension 0). At the time of right strike, it is easy to win the second special figure starting port 242. Therefore, after the fourth symbol change display of the special figure 2 starts, for example, four game balls are placed in the second special figure starting port 242. As shown in FIG. 24 (d), there are cases where four balls are reserved and the special figure 2 is reserved. That is, in FIG. 24D, four symbol change displays of the special figure 2 are reserved, and four reserved icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. .

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (e) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the fourth symbol change display of the special figure 2 has ended. As shown in FIG. 24 (e), the character of "small hit RUSH rush!" Displayed in the big hit game end effect is still displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (e), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the departure, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right part of the display screen also corresponds to “decoration 9-decoration 6-decoration”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols at the edge of "2". Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "962" in accordance with this.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (f) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the fifth symbol change display of the special figure 2 has started. After the big hit game ends, when the fifth symbol change display of the special figure 2 starts, the character of "small hit RUSH rush!" Displayed from the big hit game end effect is erased, and the small hit RUSH is being displayed (that is, the probability change state). The character of “middle hit RUSH in” indicating “middle” is displayed above the display of the total number of winning prize balls. Also, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern, which has been displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen, moves to the center of the display screen and expands to the size normally displayed. In the present embodiment, this may make it possible to give a sense of expectation to the reserved consecutive chan. Thereafter, the display is performed in a similar manner until a big hit or a small hit is achieved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (g), a state in which the fifth symbol change display of the special figure 2 is completed after the big hit game ends. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (g), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the departure, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen also corresponds to “decoration 6−decoration 3−decoration 8”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative patterns on the edge. Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (h), a state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is a small hit is performed is shown. In this embodiment, the character "CHANCE!" Is displayed in place of the display of "small hit RUSH in progress" to notify that a win (small hit or big hit) will occur. It should be noted that the character "Chance!" May not be displayed, the character "Chance!" May not be displayed, or the symbol change "Chang!" May be always displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (i), the small hit symbol ("special symbol g") is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed accordingly. . In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at “666” in accordance with the stopped and displayed decorative symbol. In addition, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, “表示” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has occurred.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. When the small hit game is started, the character "SMALL BONUS!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen to notify that the small hit game (or the 3R big hit game that appears to be a small hit game) is being performed. The display of the number of consecutive channels displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen is updated to "second time", and the fact that it is the second consecutive channel is notified. In addition, at the upper left of the display screen, “decoration 6”, which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit, is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” has been displayed. Have been.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (k), one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a due to the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 15 winning balls are obtained. The character "15/150 get!" Indicating that 150 prize balls can be expected in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this time, the addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen has not been performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (l), a state is shown in which the small hitting game has been completed because ten game balls have entered the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 winning balls are obtained. In addition, the character “150/150 get!” Indicating that 150 small prize balls can be expected in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen has not been performed.

  After that, when the small hit game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 24 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “small variation” indicating that the probable change state is continuing. In addition to the display of the characters “RAT RUSH CONTINUE!”, The decorative design is displayed in a small size, moved to the upper right portion of the display screen, and the variable display is started. In addition, an animation in which the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen starts counting up and 150 prize balls acquired in the small hit game are added is shown. . As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired during the small hitting game is not added during the small hitting game, but is added after the symbol change display after the small hitting game is started. ing. This may allow the player to concentrate on the game.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (n) shows a state when the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 has ended after the small hit game has ended. As shown in FIG. 24 (n), in the present embodiment, even after the end of the small hit game (or the big hit game), the "small hit RUSH continues!" Is displayed continuously, and the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game (big hit game) is counted up to the display of the total acquired prize ball numbers. The effect is to make the transition to the probable change state appear smooth. At the timing shown in FIG. 24 (n), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decorative pattern displayed on the upper right portion of the display screen is also “decorative 7-decorative 1-decorative”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols at the edge of "8". Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "718" in accordance with this.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (o), a state is shown in which the small hit is completed and the second symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed. Even at this timing, the animation in which the display of the total number of acquired prize balls counts up continues. Then, the animation of counting up the display of the total number of winning prize balls ends at the timing shown in FIG. It is added and updated to “0630 pt”.

  Next, a first setting suggestion effect as an example of a high setting suggestion effect displayed with at least the detection of an out ball as a condition will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 25 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the setting suggestion effect centering on the decorative symbol display device. This effect is a setting suggestion effect executed based on the first setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (1a) to (1e) show a state in which the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the normal game state. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (1a), the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (1b), the point gauge PTG is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen, and the character "CHANCE WITH GAUGE MAX" is displayed, and the expectation that setting suggestion may be made may be made. May be able to have. Thereafter, each time the game ball passes through the out ball detection sensor SWout, for example, one point is counted, and by prize in the first start winning opening (upper) 230, for example, five points are counted and the point is updated. It is shown that the gauge increases as it is performed. Thereafter, when the points are accumulated by a predetermined number (for example, 3000 pt), the gauge in the point gauge PTG indicates that the gauge is full, as shown in FIG. 25 (1d). Then, as shown in FIG. In the lower right part, a character GLG of a Gol smoking a cigarette appears along with the character of "high setting!", Indicating that "high setting!" In the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect may be performed when the number is 4 or more, but the first setting suggestion effect may be performed when the number is 2 or more or 3 or more. Is also good. If the first setting suggestion effect is not performed, the point gauge may not be displayed, or the point gauge may be displayed, but the first setting suggestion effect may not be performed. It may be. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, there may be a prize port to which points are added and a prize port to which points are not added, or points may be added each time all the prize ports are won. In this case, it is possible to arbitrarily set how many points are added to any winning opening. The point gauge PTG may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed when the points are almost full. Further, the points may be indicated by numerical values instead of the gauges. In this case, the numerical value may be always displayed, or may be displayed only when the number of sharp points becomes good (for example, 1000 points).

  The effect examples shown in FIG. 25 (2a) to FIG. 25 (2b) show a state in which the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the big hit game state. In this effect example, in the big hit game state, for example, it is performed when a predetermined number of points are accumulated. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (2a) shows a state in which a jackpot game that has shifted to a certain-variable jackpot has been started. Thereafter, for example, each time a game ball passes through the out ball detection sensor SWout, for example, one point is counted, and each time a game ball passes through the first variable winning opening 234a, for example, twenty points are counted, Each time a game ball passes through the 2 special figure starting port 232, for example, 10 points are counted, and when the number of points reaches a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the first setting suggestion effect in which is appeared is performed, which indicates that the setting is high. When the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the big hit game, the above-described point gauge PTG may be displayed. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, there may be a prize port to which points are added and a prize port to which points are not added, or points may be added each time all the prize ports are won. In this case, it is possible to arbitrarily set how many points are added to any winning opening. In the big hit game state, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25 (3a) to (3b) show a state in which the first setting suggestion effect is performed in the probable change state. In this effect example, even in the probability change state, for example, it is performed when a predetermined number of points are accumulated. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (3a), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the character “during small hit RUSH” indicating that the decorative symbol is in the stable state is displayed on the right side of the display screen. It is displayed in the lower part. Thereafter, when the points are added to reach a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. 25 (3b), a first setting suggestion effect in which the Gol character GLG appears in the probable change state is performed, indicating that the setting is high. May be. When the first setting suggestion effect is performed during the probable change state, the above-described point gauge PTG may be displayed. Further, it goes without saying that the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, there may be a prize port to which points are added and a prize port to which points are not added, or points may be added each time all the prize ports are won. In this case, it is possible to arbitrarily set how many points are added to any winning opening. Further, in the probable change state, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

  In the effect example shown in FIGS. 25 (4a) to (4b), neither the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 nor the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, there is no suspended symbol variation display, and the big hit. A state in which the first setting suggestion effect is performed in a standby state in which the game state is shifted to a state other than the gaming state (small hitting gaming state) is shown. In this production example, in the customer waiting state (a state in which the stop result of the decorative symbol is displayed or a customer waiting demonstration as shown in FIG. 25 (4a)), for example, the number of points is a predetermined number. 25 (4a), a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer is performed, and then, for example, the player does not win any of the winning openings and out. When the number of points reaches a predetermined number due to the passing of the game ball to the ball detection sensor SWout, as shown in FIG. 25 (4b), the first setting suggestion that the Gol character GLG appears during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect In some cases, an effect is performed to indicate that the setting is high, and the above-described point gauge PTG may be displayed when the first setting suggesting effect is performed during the customer waiting state. Further, the number of points to be added by passing through the winning opening or the out ball detection sensor SWout is not limited to the above, and it is needless to say that the number of points can be arbitrarily set. Some winning points may not be added to the points, or points may be added each time a prize is won for all the winning points. In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed only during the execution of the customer-waiting demonstration effect, even in the customer waiting state, or the display of the decorative symbol is stopped. The first setting suggestion effect may be executed only in a state where is displayed, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed in the customer waiting state.

  FIG. 25 (5a) to FIG. 25 (5c) show the operation when the execution condition of the first setting suggestion effect is satisfied during the SP reach. In this production example, when the points accumulate during SP reach and the execution condition of the first setting suggestion effect is satisfied, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is delayed in order to concentrate the player on SP reach. I have. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 25 (5a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, SP reach is performed, and a state in which the lord character and the swordsman character face each other is shown. At this timing, the points are accumulated, and the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is determined. After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (5b), the character of the lord wins and the decoration pattern fluctuates and fluctuates with the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". However, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is not started even at the timing of FIG. 25 (5b). Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (5c), the SP reach effect shifts to the default background image, and the decorative design is restored to the original size. The first setting suggestion effect in which the character GLG of the grandfather Gol appears in a state of swinging and fluctuating in the above manner. In the present embodiment, by doing so, the SP reach effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed simultaneously, so that the problem of being unable to concentrate on the effect may be less likely to occur.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25 (5b ′), when the character of the lord is defeated and the decorative pattern fluctuates due to the combination of “decoration 4−decoration 3−decoration 4”, then, As shown in FIG. 25 (5c ′), even after shifting from the SP reach effect to the default background image, the first setting suggestion effect is not started, and the next symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 25 (5d ′). After the start of the variable display, the first setting suggestion effect whose start has been suspended is started.

  In the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect is performed after the SP reach effect is completed so that the SP reach effect and the setting suggestion effect are not performed at the same time. A setting suggestion effect may be executed. In addition, the start timing of the first setting suggestion effect that is executed after the SP reach effect has ended is not limited to the above, and it goes without saying that the first setting suggestion effect can be started at any timing.

  In addition, the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is delayed during the execution of the SP reach effect. In such a case, the start of the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be delayed. Also, the start of the setting suggestion effect may not be delayed, and these effects and the setting suggestion effect may be performed in an overlapping manner.

  FIG. 26 (1a) shows a state in which a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects are simultaneously performed during the execution of the jackpot game end effect. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (1a), when the big hit game end effect starts, the Sabohani group appears, which indicates that the setting is high. The effect in which the Sabohani group appears may be referred to as a second setting suggestive effect. Then, when points accumulate during execution of the second setting suggestion effect and the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, the character GLG of the Gol is displayed superimposed on the group of Sabohani, and a plurality of setting suggestion effects are displayed. Are sometimes performed at the same time. In the present embodiment, the character GLG of the grandfather Gol in the first setting suggestion effect is displayed so as to be superimposed on the group of Sabohani in the second setting suggestion effect. It may be displayed.

  FIGS. 26 (2a) to (2b) show an example of an effect that may be performed separately from the effect example shown in FIG. 26 (1a), and a second setting suggestion effect is performed during the jackpot game end effect. In this state, if the points accumulate and the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, avoid executing the second setting suggestion effect in a superimposed manner, and after the second setting suggestion effect ends. This shows a state in which the first setting suggestion effect is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (2a), when the big hit game end effect starts, a group of Sabohani appears, which may indicate that the setting is high. In this case, points may be accumulated and execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be determined. In this case, in the big hit game end effect, the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. The character GLG of the grandfather is displayed, and a state in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed is shown. In this way, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed, if the second setting suggestion effect is being executed, the start of the first setting suggestion effect is reserved until the second setting suggestion effect ends. You may do so.

  FIGS. 26 (3a) to (3d) are views for explaining the menu mode in which the player shifts by operating the operation key unit 190 or the effect button 136 in the standby state. In the present embodiment, the operation key unit 190 and the effect button 136 may be operated not only during the execution of the demonstration effect shown in FIG. 26 (3a) but also in a standby state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Thus, the mode can be shifted to the menu mode. Alternatively, the mode may be shifted to the menu mode only during execution of the demonstration effect.

  For example, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (3a), a menu screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 26 (3b). On the menu screen, “member registration”, “password input”, “passcode issuance”, “volume / brightness setting”, and “setting suggestion setting” can be performed. “Member registration” is for registering in the database of customers managed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 100. "Password input" allows the player to register the two-dimensional code or password downloaded from the maker here to the pachinko machine 100 with the past game history of the player. As a result, for example, a notice that does not normally appear may appear, or the reliability of the notice may change. “Password issuance” is to display the game history in the pachinko machine 100 in two-dimensional code or character code at the request of the player. The player can register the game history on the database by capturing the displayed two-dimensional code or character code with a portable terminal or the like and uploading the captured image to the manufacturer via the Internet. The “volume / brightness setting” adjusts the volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 of the pachinko machine 100 and the brightness of the decorative design display device 208 and various decorative lamps by operating the operation key unit 190 by the player. can do.

  When the player operates the operation key unit 190 at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (3b) to operate “setting suggestion setting”, as shown in FIG. 26 (3c), the “setting suggestion effect customizing” screen is displayed. Transition. On the “setting suggestion effect customization” screen, the characters “Please select a game state in which the launch ball suggestion effect is easy to appear” are displayed, and the game state in which the launch ball suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) is likely to appear is displayed as “ It can be selected from any of the normal game state, the “probable change state”, the “electric support state”, and the “big hit game”. Note that other game states may be selectable. In the example shown in FIG. 26 (3c), the cursor is positioned on the item "easy to appear in normal times", the item is highlighted, and the first setting suggestion effect is likely to appear in the normal game state. The setting is shown. Note that two or more items may be selectable, or only one item may be selectable.

  When the game state in which the first setting suggestion effect is likely to appear is selected as described above, a type of setting suggestion effect that is likely to appear from a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects is selected as shown in FIG. Is available. Specifically, the setting is suggested by the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit, and the setting is suggested by the display of the number of the symbol change display during the big hit. One of the following is suggested from the start during the interval, the suggestion from the re-lottery at the time of the big hit, and the suggestion from the stop pattern. Alternatively, two or more can be selected. In the example shown in FIG. 26 (3d), a state is set in which two suggestion effects of “suggest by number of balls” and “suggest by re-lottery” are set to be executable, and other setting suggestion effects appear. Not to be. In the present embodiment, the type of the setting suggestion effect that appears is set, but the appearance rate of each of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects may be set.

  Next, an example of a re-lottery effect performed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating stepwise an example of a re-lottery effect centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 27A shows a state in which the decoration pattern is fluctuated and displayed, and as a result, the pattern fluctuates with the combination of the decoration patterns of the “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” (big hit). . After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the decorative pattern which fluctuated fluctuates starts high-speed fluctuation, and when the re-lottery effect is successfully performed, as shown in FIG. A combination of decorative patterns for the 6R probable jackpot of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” to be announced is derived, and the effect display in which the star flashes to make it easier to easily recognize and confirm that the probable change jackpot is confirmed. EF1 is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the probability has changed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (d), the final display is made with the combination of the decorative symbols of the 6R sure-change big hit of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". In accordance with this, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also displayed as “777”, and “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. A stop display is shown, indicating a big hit. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect display is performed when the combination of the decorative symbols, which is a big hit but it is not clear whether or not it is the probability variable hit, is changed to the decorative pattern combination for definitely notifying that the probability is the big hit. The EF1 is displayed so that the promotion is recognized.

  On the other hand, if the re-lottery effect fails, as shown in FIG. 27 (c '), the combination of the big hit decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed again, and the swing fluctuation is performed. In this case, the effect display EF1 may be displayed. In this embodiment, the symbol is not changed in the re-lottery effect, and even if the symbol fails, the effect display EF1 is displayed. It is suggested. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that it is a probable jackpot. Note that setting suggestion may be included by displaying the effect display EF1. Thereafter, when the symbol fluctuating time elapses and the symbol stop display timing comes, as shown in FIG. 27 (d '), the display is fixedly displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1". In accordance with this, the mini symbol whose display is displayed at the upper left corner of the surface is also displayed as “111”, and in the symbol change informing area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, “O” is displayed. Is stopped and a big hit is indicated. In addition, when there is no change in the combination of the jackpot decorative patterns before and after the re-lottery effect, but the effect display EF1 is displayed, only the setting suggestion may be included. For example, there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect in the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot of “decoration 1−decoration 1−decoration 1”, but when the effect display EF1 is displayed, the setting 1 is denied. A setting suggestion may be made. In addition, there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect in the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”, but when the effect display EF1 is displayed, the setting 4 or more is determined. A setting suggestion may be made. In addition, there is no change before and after the re-lottery effect with the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, but when the effect display EF1 is displayed, the setting 6 is determined. A suggestion may be made, and conversely, the effect may be more pleasing to the player than a case where the promotion is not performed in the re-lottery.

  In the present embodiment, when the re-lottery effect fails, setting suggestion may be performed. Specifically, when the re-lottery fails, the normal operation is to make the same combination of decorative symbols displayed before and after the re-lottery, as shown in FIG. 27 (c ″). It is a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols for confirming that the probability change is a big hit, and may be a different symbol before and after the re-lottery. That is, the decoration pattern combination before the re-lottery was “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”. Combinations may be derived. In the present embodiment, setting suggestions may be made by making the big hit symbols different before and after the re-lottery. In this case, as shown by the symbol after the re-lottery, the effect suggests that the setting is 4 or more. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect display EF1 is displayed even though the re-lottery effect has failed so that the player can feel uncomfortable so that the effect is a setting suggestive effect. . Note that the effect display EF1 may not be displayed, or when the effect display EF1 is displayed, it is a certain-variable big hit, for example, an effect that succeeds in the promotion in a big hit game is performed. It may include suggesting that When the effect display EF1 is not displayed, setting suggestion may not be included. Thereafter, when the symbol change time elapses and the symbol stop display timing comes, as shown in FIG. 27 (d ''), the symbol is displayed in a fixed combination of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4”. At the same time, the mini symbol whose display is displayed at the upper left corner of the surface is also displayed as “444”, and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / number-of-reservations display area 284 shows “O”. Is stopped and a big hit is indicated. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the re-lottery effect fails, the setting effect may be suggested, so that the effect may be enhanced in some cases. It should be noted that a combination of the jackpot decorative pattern combination and the display of the effect display EF1 may be related to the setting suggestion. In the present embodiment, the effect display EF1 is displayed when the re-lottery is successful and when the setting is suggested, and the effect display EF1 is in the same mode. May be. Further, when the effect indication EF1 is displayed and the setting is suggested, the setting may be a false setting suggestion. For example, the higher the setting, the easier the setting suggestion (false setting suggestion) is made, The lower the setting, the harder the setting suggestion (false setting suggestion) may be. Further, in this effect example, the setting suggestion is performed by displaying the effect display EF1, but the setting suggestion may be performed by, for example, making the color or pattern of the symbol different from normal. , The sound output that is output when a big hit is made different from the normal one (usually "congratulations" is output, but in the case of setting suggestions, "chance" is output, etc.) May be performed. In addition, the setting suggestion may be performed using another probable change confirmation notification effect, and the setting suggestion may be performed by executing the probable change confirmation notification effect at a timing different from the normal execution timing. Alternatively, the probable change confirmation notification may include a setting suggestion. In addition, setting suggestion may be made based on the effect content in the re-lottery effect, and for example, a display requesting the operation of the effect button 136 is different from a normal display (a different color and a different size from the normal display). In such a case, the setting suggestion may be included, or the setting suggestion may be performed when the operation means (for example, the effect button 136) for which an operation is required at the time of re-lottery is different from normal.

  Note that the setting suggestion in the re-lottery effect may be executed when a specific condition is satisfied. For example, the setting suggestion may be made when the number of symbol fluctuation display times during the big hit is small, such as within 30 times from the previous big hit. Suggestions may be made. Further, for example, the date of the event in the game hall may be set using RTC (Real Time Clock), and the setting may be suggested on the date. Further, for example, the generation condition may be customized by the player on a setting screen that can be shifted during the demonstration effect, and the setting suggestion may be performed when the customized condition is satisfied. The above can be applied to the setting suggestion effects described above, and it is needless to say that the setting suggestion effects described below can also be applied.

  Next, an example of an effect related to the total number of acquired prize balls in the big hit game state executed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the setting suggestion effect in the big hit game state centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIGS. 28 (1a) to (1d) show an example of a normally performed effect of the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit. FIG. 28 (1a) shows a state in which a big hit game relating to the 10R certain-variable big hit in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (1a), the game has shifted to the eighth round, and since 74 gaming balls have been won in the second variable winning opening 235a in the big hit game, 1215 game balls in the big hit game "1110 / 1500get!" Is displayed below the number-of-rounds display at the upper center of the display screen, indicating that the player has won the game, and that 1500 payouts can be expected in the jackpot game. In the lower left corner of the display screen, "8th" indicating the number of occurrences from the first time is displayed. In the lower right corner of the display screen, “1380 pt”, which is the total number of awarded balls acquired in the first to seventh big hit games and small hit games, is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 28A, 2490 prize balls have been acquired from the start of the first big hit game to the present.

  Thereafter, when one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, 2010 prize balls have been acquired since the first jackpot game started, and 2505 total acquired prize balls with a good drill. You can say that you got the number. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when a sharp prize ball number (2500) is obtained in this manner, as shown in FIG. 28 (1b), an effect image including the character "2500pt Get !!" (Sometimes referred to as a “number-of-killed display image”) is displayed in a large size in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to congratulate the player on obtaining a prize ball. Note that if the total winning prize balls count “2500 pt” in the process of counting up the display of the total winning prize balls after the jackpot game ends, a sharp number display image such as “Get 2500 pt !!” is displayed. It may be displayed.

  FIG. 28 (1c) shows a state in which the hit from the first time to the fifteenth hit and the big hit game related to the 10R certain-variable big hit in FIG. 2 is being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (1c), the process has shifted to 4R, and since 32 game balls have been won in the second variable winning opening 235a in the big hit game, 480 game balls are obtained in the big hit game. The character "480 / 1500get!" Is displayed below the number of rounds display at the upper center of the display screen, indicating that there is a match, and that 1500 payouts can be expected in the big hit game. In the lower left corner of the display screen, “15th” indicating the number of occurrences from the first time is displayed. In the lower right corner of the display screen, “4510pt”, which is the total number of winning prize balls obtained in the first to fourteenth big hit games and small hit games, is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (1c), 4990 prize balls have been acquired from the start of the first big hit game to the present.

  Thereafter, when one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, 5005 prize balls have been obtained since the first big hit game started, and a total of 5,000 well-acquired prize balls have been obtained. You can say that you got the number. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a sharp prize ball count (for example, a prize ball count that is a multiple of 2500) is obtained, as shown in FIG. 28 (1d), “5000 pt get! Is displayed large in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to congratulate the player on obtaining a prize ball. In addition, when the total winning prize balls count “5000 pt” in the process of counting up the display of the total winning prize balls after the jackpot game ends, a sharp number display image such as “Get 5000 pt !!” is displayed. It may be displayed. In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion using the number-of-cuts display image is performed according to the determination in the suggestion effect appearance pattern determination process in step S715 of the suggestion effect selection process at the time of the first big hit shown in FIG. Instead of the drilling number display image shown in 1d), the setting suggestion may be made by changing the display mode of the character “5000” as shown in FIG. 28 (1d ′). In this case, for example, since the display mode of “5000” related to the setting 5 changes, it is suggested that the setting is 5 or more. The mode of the setting suggestion is not limited to this, and another method may be used. For example, the setting may be suggested by an audio output or a light emission mode of a lamp.

  FIGS. 28 (2a) to (2d) show an example of an effect in which setting suggestion is performed in connection with the display of the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit. 28 (2a) to FIG. 28 (2b) have the same effect contents as FIGS. 28 (1a) to FIG. 28 (1b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 28 (2c) shows the ninth hit from the first time, and shows a state in which the big hit game relating to the 10R certain-variable big hit in Toku-zu 2 is being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (2c), the game has shifted to 2R, and since 11 game balls have been won in the second variable winning opening 235a in the big hit game, 165 game balls are obtained in the big hit game. The character "165 / 1500get!" Is displayed below the number of rounds display in the upper center of the display screen, indicating that there is a match, and that 1500 payouts can be expected and required in the jackpot game. In the lower left corner of the display screen, “9th” indicating the number of occurrences from the first time is displayed. In the lower right corner of the display screen, “4380 pt”, which is the total number of awarded balls acquired in the first to eighth hits and small hits, is displayed. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 28 (2c), 4545 prize balls have been acquired from the start of the first big hit game to the present.

  Thereafter, when one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a, 4560 prize balls have been obtained since the first big hit game started. In the present embodiment, for example, FIG. In the suggestion effect appearance pattern determination process of step S715 in the first time jackpot suggestion effect selection process, it is determined that the total suggestion effect number is 4560 shots and the setting suggestion effect is performed. Is not a multiple of 2,500 shots, but the number-of-kills display image is not displayed, but the number-of-kills display image including the character “4560pt Get !!” is displayed as a setting suggestion effect. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the setting is high due to the uncomfortable feeling of displaying the number-of-kill display image with the total number of winning prize balls other than the so-called number of kills. The drilling number display image as the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 28 (2d) suggests that the setting is 4 or more. When displaying the number-of-kills display image with the total number of winning prize balls other than the number-of-kills, and suggesting the setting, a display mode different from the normal number-of-kill display image (for example, a different number display mode). It may be easy to recognize that the setting suggestion is performed. The mode of the setting suggestion is not limited to this, and another method may be used. For example, the setting may be suggested by an audio output or a light emission mode of a lamp.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous announcement effect centering on the decorative symbol display device in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 29 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and a special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the general-purpose holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29A, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 29A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in a stopped state, and the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. To indicate this, “x” is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 29 is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 29A, three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed. All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that the third hold is a hold to be prefetched, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched and shown. Has the same display mode as that of the other reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 (circular blank pattern and white display mode). The same applies to the following description. Note that a pre-reading notice (for example, the display mode of the reserved icon changes to the display mode of the pre-reading notice) may be performed using the reserved icon to be pre-read.

  In FIG. 29B, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 changes to the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 29C, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3−decoration 5−decoration 7”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In other words, in this effect example, the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eyes is displayed with a deviation, and the player may be able to recognize that either the continuous notice or the setting suggestion is displayed.

  In FIG. 29D, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes the icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 29 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 again stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7", and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In other words, in this example of the production, the display of the missing pattern in the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eyes is continuously performed, and the setting suggestion is suppressed from being continuously displayed. In some cases, it is possible to recognize that continuous announcements are being made instead of suggestions, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the big hit.

  In FIG. 29 (f), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 29 (g), the decorative symbol of “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started.

  In FIG. 29 (h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. Note that the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Also, the decorative symbol change display, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, moves to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed. , SP reach (swordsman reach). After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 29 (i) to (m) are performed. However, since the effects similar to the effects shown in FIGS. 21 (o) to 22 (y) are performed, detailed description is omitted. I do.

  As described above, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 29, the continuous notice effect in which the combination of the decorative patterns at the opportunity of “decoration 3−decoration 5−decoration 7” is performed continuously increases the expectation for the big hit. May be possible.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of the setting suggestion effect in the decorative symbol change display centering on the decorative symbol display device in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 30 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and a special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the general-purpose holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30A, the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 30A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in a stopped state, and in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, To indicate this, “x” is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2.

  Furthermore, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 30 is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is located on the left of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 30A, three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed. All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that the third hold is a hold to be prefetched, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched and shown. Has the same display mode as that of the other reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 (circular blank pattern and white display mode). The same applies to the following description. Note that a pre-reading notice (for example, the display mode of the reserved icon changes to the display mode of the pre-reading notice) may be performed using the reserved icon to be pre-read.

  In FIG. 30B, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 30C, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3−decoration 5−decoration 7”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In other words, in this effect example, the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eyes is displayed with a deviation, and the player may be able to recognize that either the continuous notice or the setting suggestion is displayed.

  In FIG. 30D, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes the icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 4−decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In other words, in this example of production, the display of the missing pattern in the combination of the decorative patterns of the chance eyes is not continuous, and the player can recognize that the setting suggestion has been performed instead of the continuous notice, and expect the high setting. In some cases, the feeling can be given.

  FIG. 31: is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect in the decoration design variable display centering on a decoration design display device in steps.

  FIG. 31 (1a) to FIG. 31 (1e) show an example of the effect of displaying the start number of the big hits which is the number of the symbol change displays during the big hit. In addition, the start number between big hits in the present embodiment refers to a symbol variation display number from the end of the power support state which normally shifts after the big hit end to the next big hit. In addition, it may be the symbol change display number from the end of the normal big hit to the next big hit (that is, it may include the symbol change display number in the electric support state).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (1a), the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in a stopped state, and the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. To indicate this, “x” is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2.

  Further, since the control state (game state) in FIG. 31 (1a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the holding icon display of special figure 1 is displayed on the left side of the fluctuating icon display area 280. An area 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 31 (1a), the three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a round pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (1a), the big hit start number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (1a), the start number display during the big hit is displayed as "244 rotations after the big hit", and after the power support state which shifts after the big hit game related to the normal big hit ends, the special figure 1 and This indicates that the symbol change display of the special figure 2 has been performed 244 times. In addition, in this embodiment, although the big hit start number display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be displayed on another display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or the like).

  In FIG. 31 (1b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 changes to the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the start number display during the big hit is counted by one, and the display is updated to “245 rotations after the big hit”.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (1c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination of "decorative 5-decorative 4-decorative 1", and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 31 (1d), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes the icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the start number display during the big hit is counted by one, and the display is updated to “246 rotations after the big hit”.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (1e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 8-decoration 7", and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In the present embodiment, the big hit start number display is displayed in this manner. For example, the big hit start number display shown in FIG. 31 (1e) is displayed in a manner shown in FIG. 31 (1e ') to suggest setting. May be performed. That is, the mode of the numbers in the big hit start number display shown in FIG. 31 (1e ') is different from the normal display, and in this effect example, the even number setting (any of setting 2, setting 4, and setting 6) is used. ?). In this example, the setting suggestion of the even number setting is produced. However, for example, a combination of numbers that implies the current setting (for example, if the display mode is changed by 444 rotations, the setting 4 or more is suggested). By changing the display mode when the display mode changes at 555 rotation, which indicates that the setting is 5 or more, various settings can be suggested. It is to be noted that the setting suggestion by the display of the number of hits during the big hit indicates that, for example, the low setting tends to increase the number of symbol changes during the big hit, so that the low setting is more likely to appear (for example, in the case of setting 2 or 3). Then, a setting suggestion effect such as negating the setting 1 may be performed, so that the player is not bored.

  FIGS. 31 (2a) to (2e) show an effect of displaying the remaining symbol change display times in the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) which shifts after the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit. An example is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the special figure 1 is in a state in which the symbol is stopped and displayed, while the special figure 2 is in a symbol change display state. In the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 in the corner, “x” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 to indicate that, but in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2, "-" Indicating that the symbol variation is being displayed is displayed. In addition, in the electric support state, since the effect display mainly performing the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the effect related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 (variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed on the decorative symbol display device. Absent.

  Furthermore, since the control state (game state) in FIG. 31 (2a) is the electric support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the left side of the fluctuating icon display area 280. An area 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 31 (2a), three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the three reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are All of them are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the remaining symbol variation display count display in the electric support state is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 31 (2a), the remaining symbol variation display count display indicates “Electric support remaining eight times”, and the remaining symbol variation display count until the end of the electrical support state may be eight. It is shown. In the present embodiment, the remaining symbol change display count display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed on another display device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or the like).

  In FIG. 31 (2b), the reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, respectively, and the reserved icon at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 changes to the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the remaining symbol variation display count display is decremented by one, and the display is updated to "7 remaining electric support".

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (2c), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 5−decoration 4−decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. It should be noted that two game balls have entered the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 until the current symbol change display is completed, so the reserved number of the special figure 1 is four.

  In FIG. 31 (2d), the hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes h0, and the reserved icons located at the display positions of the second to fourth reserved icons h12 to h14 become the first to third reserved icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1, respectively. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the remaining symbol change display count display is decremented by one, and the display is updated to “6 remaining electric support”.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (2e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 8-decoration 7”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In the present embodiment, the remaining symbol variation display count display is displayed in this manner. For example, the remaining symbol variation display count display shown in FIG. 31 (2e) is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 31 (2e '). The setting may be suggested. That is, the form of the numbers in the remaining symbol change display count display shown in FIG. 31 (2e ') is different from the normal display, and this production example suggests that the setting is 6. In this example of the effect, the setting suggestion of the setting 6 is directed. For example, a number suggesting the current setting (for example, if the display mode changes in the remaining 45 rotations, the setting 4 or 5 is suggested). However, when the display mode changes in the remaining 44 rotations, setting 4 or more is suggested, etc.), by changing the display mode, various mode setting suggestions can be performed.

  The mode of change of the display mode of the numbers is not limited to the above-described one. For example, the display mode may be changed by changing the color, size, and shape of the numbers, or the display mode may be changed by adding a character. By doing so, the setting may be suggested. In addition, for example, when the display “Electric support remaining six times” is displayed, the setting suggestion may be made by deleting the remaining symbol variation display count display. Further, for example, when "246 rotations after big hit" is displayed, the setting suggestion may be made by deleting the big hit start number display. In addition, the number-of-big-hit start number display and the remaining symbol change display number display may be displayed, for example, as many times as the sharpness such as “10”. In this case, for example, a specific number other than the number of times the sharpness is good The setting may be suggested by displaying the number of times (for example, “66”).

  In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the setting suggestion is made by changing the display mode of the symbol change display number and the display mode of the remaining symbol change display number of the electric support. The effect performed when the number of times is a specific number of times (for example, every five times) is performed when the number of times is different from the specific number of times (for example, the fourth time, etc.). Good. In addition, a specific effect may be performed at a specific number of times (for example, every five times), and setting suggestion may be performed by performing an effect different from the specific effect. Further, in the present embodiment, an example of the effect of performing the setting suggestion with the remaining symbol variation display number of the electric support has been described. However, for example, in a so-called ST machine, the setting suggestion may be performed with the remaining symbol variation display number of the positive variation. Good.

  Next, another example of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 32 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the setting suggestion effect centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 32 (A) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 has been completed in the normal game state, and the decorative symbols have been stopped and displayed in a combination of out of alignment in accordance therewith. In the present embodiment, normally, the mini symbols displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen are also stopped and displayed in the same symbol combination in accordance with the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 32). In the case where the display is stopped at the combination of the decorative patterns out of the "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "417".) In the effect example shown in FIG. The mini-design is “121” for the combination of the decorations of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, and the setting 1 and the setting 2 are denied, that is, it is suggested that the setting is 3 or more. are doing. In addition, the display mode of the mini symbol is not limited to the above-described one. For example, when a mini symbol different from the combination of the decorative symbols is “456”, it may be suggested that the setting is 4 or more. Good. Alternatively, a high setting may be suggested based on the frequency at which the combination of the decorative symbol and the result of the mini symbol do not match.

  FIG. 32 (B) shows another example of the effect of setting suggestion using a mini symbol. In this effect example, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the combination of the decorative symbols out of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, the mini symbol is stopped and displayed at “1-1-panda”. For example, this shows a state in which setting suggestion for negating setting 1 is being performed. When a “panda” appears in the mini symbol, the symbol may be used as a high-setting symbol, such as setting 6 being determined, or may be used as a symbol indicating that a setting change has been made. You may.

  FIG. 32 (C-1) to FIG. 32 (C-2) show an effect example in the case of over-winning in the small hitting game. That is, in the small hitting game according to the present embodiment, the small hitting game ends when ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a, but the game balls enter from the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a. It may take some time to pass the winning count switch SW1 after passing. Therefore, a prize of more than ten game balls (so-called over prize) may occur in the second variable prize port 235a. In the present embodiment, in the case of an over-prize in the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 32 (C-2), 165 prize balls are generated because 11 game balls have won, and “165 / 150get!” Indicating the number of prize balls that can be expected to be obtained in the small hit game is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. In this embodiment, when an over-winning has occurred, a predetermined over-winning sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the number of prize balls for the over-prize may not be displayed. Further, the over-winning sound may not be output.

  In the present embodiment, setting suggestion may be performed when an over-winning prize occurs. For example, instead of the normal over-winning sound (voice output of "picone") shown in FIG. 32 (C-2), as shown in FIG. 32 (C-2 ') or FIG. In some cases, an over-winning sound including setting suggestions may be output. In the effect example shown in FIG. 32 (C-2 '), the normal over-winning sound is set to another over-winning sound to indicate that the setting is high. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 32 (C-2 ″), for example, a sound “Sigoro” is output in place of the normal over-winning sound, suggesting that the setting is 4 or more. I have. In the present embodiment, a setting suggestion effect by voice output was performed as a suggestion effect performed at the time of the over-winning. . In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect in the case of an over-winning in the small hitting game state has been described.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example of an effect in which the setting is suggested by an over winning sound has been described. For example, the opening sound of the variable winning opening output at the start of the round and the winning sound output at the time of winning the variable winning opening are described. For example, an unusual sound may be output to suggest setting.

  In addition, when a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and a transition is made to a certain effect mode among the plurality of effect modes, a specific condition (for example, when the next symbol variation display after SP reach is performed is started) And the like, the setting may be made in some cases, and the setting may be suggested by shifting to a certain effect mode at a timing different from a specific condition. In addition, there may be a case where a transition is made to a look-ahead mode in which a specific reach effect is finally performed in advance, and in this case, setting suggestion is made by shifting to a look-ahead mode even when a specific reach effect is not performed. It may be performed. In a pachinko machine that produces a jackpot by displaying a combination of jackpot decoration patterns on any one of a plurality of activated lines, a specific activated line (for example, a center line) is used. In some cases, the combination of big hit decorative symbols may be displayed to suggest setting. Further, an effect (tutorial effect) for explaining when the setting suggestion is performed may or may not be performed. Further, the timing at which the setting suggestion is performed may be constantly notified, or the notification may be made when the timing at which the setting suggestion is approaching.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an example of an effect when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the variable display of the special figure 1 in the normal game state will be described. Here, FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining an example of the standing effect centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 33 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and a special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the general-purpose holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  FIG. 33 (a) shows a state in which the 49th symbol change display is performed in the electric support state shifted to after the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit. As in the present embodiment, in the simultaneous variation machine in which both the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 may be performed at the same time, when the symbol variation display is started, the number of remaining variations in the electric support state is reduced. Is decremented. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the symbol change display is started 50 times after the power support state, the power support state ends, and the game mode shifts to the normal game state. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (a), the end of the jackpot game relating to the normal jackpot is the last symbol variation display in the electric support state. For this reason, in the lower right part of the display screen, the character of "DENSO SAPOLAST" is displayed, and the fact is notified. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (a), both the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 are simultaneously performed. In addition, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a symbol variation display in which the symbol variation time to be a small hit is 580 seconds.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 33A is the electric support state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this electric support state, a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the power support state, the display of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the number-of-retention display area of Toku-zu 1, and also by the number of reservation icons in Toku-zu 1. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 2. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 33 (a), four reserved icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and all four reserved icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a round pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special map 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 33 is the electric support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state), and thus the special figure 1 starting port (lower) 231 is won. This is to cause the variable display of the special figure 1 to be executed many times.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (b) shows a state in which the 49th symbol change display including the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 has been completed after the end of the normal big hit game. As shown in FIG. 33 (b), in the present embodiment, after the end of the normal big hit game, the electric support state is continued until the symbol change display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started 50 times. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (b), the special figure 1 is displayed as a result of the departure, and in accordance with this, the decoration pattern is also a combination of the departure decoration patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stop display. In addition, the mini symbol is stopped and displayed at "417" in accordance with this. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit is still performed is continuously performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which the big hit game related to the normal big hit has ended and the 50th symbol change display has started on the special figure 1. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (c), in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is continuously performed, and the number of the symbol variation display held is four (that is, the hold 4). Further, in the special figure 1, there are three symbol variation displays which are suspended (that is, suspension 3). In addition, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), when the 50th symbol variation display starts and the electric support state ends, the game shifts to the normal game state. More disadvantageous. Therefore, in the decorative design display device 208, the display of "right-handed" displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen disappears, and a left-handed suggestion "return to left-handed!" Notification is performed. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit is still performed is continuously performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33D shows a state in which the jackpot game relating to the normal jackpot has been completed, the 51st symbol variation display has been completed in the special figure 1, and the result of the loss has been displayed. ing. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33D, the display is stopped at the combination of the symbols "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1". Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "541" in accordance with this. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit is still performed is continuously performed.

  In FIG. 33 (e), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special map 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 changes to the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit is still performed is continuously performed.

  FIG. 33 (f) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is performed a plurality of times, and the result of a certain symbol variation display is displayed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (f), the display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 8—decoration 0—decoration 3”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 1 is three, and the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 2 is four. Hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (f), the special figure 2 continues to perform the symbol variation display with the small hit.

  In FIG. 33 (g), the reservation icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the reservation icon at the display position of the first reservation icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 changes to the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit still occurs is continuously performed.

  FIG. 33 (h) shows a state in which a transition has been made to SP reach after reaching reach. In addition, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display in which the small hit is still performed is continuously performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (i), a state is shown in which the symbol variation display, which is the symbol variation time of 580 seconds in the special figure 2, ends, and a small hit result (for example, “special figure f”) is derived. ing. In the present embodiment, as described above, the progress of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted during the period from the stop display of the small hit symbol to the end of the small hit game relating to the small hit, and substantially, The display of the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is postponed by an amount corresponding to the interruption. However, even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 and a small hit occurs, the effect of the decorative symbol change display according to the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is continuously performed without interruption.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (j), the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted even during the small hit game. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, SP reach is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (j), it is shown that the lord character is defeated by the swordsman character and is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 4—decoration 3—decoration 4”. Then, when the small hitting game is over, as shown in FIG. 33 (k), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the special figure 2 starts, and the progress of the suspended symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is resumed. You. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in order to return to the default background image from SP reach, all of the symbols are temporarily displayed except for the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 and the mini symbol. Is shown.

  Thereafter, when the arrival of the initial symbol fluctuation time (for example, 90 seconds) of the special figure 1 approaches, as shown in FIG. 33 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 4”. The swing fluctuation is started with the combination of the decorative symbols. Then, when the initial symbol change time of the special figure 1 arrives, while the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (m) displays the character "Wait a minute" together with a plurality of child panda characters. A normal production effect is provided (normal production effect 1). The normal effect in which the character of the child panda appears appears when the “special figure f” is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214 during the symbol change display of the special figure 1. The content of the staging effect is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate. After that, when the symbol change time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 33 (n), the result of the loss is displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the decoration pattern display device 208 displays “decoration 4”. -Decoration 3-Decoration 4 is stopped and displayed at the combination of the decorative patterns at the outset, and the mini design is also stopped and displayed at "434" in accordance with the combination, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 1 is two, and the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 2 is three. Hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 33 (n), the special figure 2 is still continuously displaying the symbol variation. In the present embodiment, when the special figure f is displayed in the special figure 2 and a small hit occurs, the effect shown in FIG. In the case where another small hit result (for example, “special figure g”) is displayed in FIG. 2 and a small hit occurs, instead of the production effect shown in FIG. ) May be performed for a long time to produce the effect (normal time effect 2). It should be noted that the same effect may be provided for the same effect regardless of the type of the special figure stopped when the small hit occurs. In this effect example, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 in the symbol change display of the special figure 1 in which the SP reach is performed, for example, a special pause effect for the SP reach is performed as the pause effect. Alternatively, a stage change effect in which the background image changes may be performed together with or after the pause effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, an example of a pre-reading notice effect that may be performed when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining an example of a wait-reading notice effect centering on the decorative symbol display device.

  FIG. 34 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, which includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, and a special symbol 2 hold lamp. The illustration of 220 and the general-purpose holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  FIG. 34A shows a state in which the 50th symbol change display is performed in the power support state shifted after the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit. That is, this is the last symbol variation display in the electric support state after the end of the big hit game related to the normal big hit. For this reason, in the lower right part of the display screen, the character of "DENSO SAPOLAST" is displayed, and the fact is notified. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are the simultaneous variation machines capable of simultaneously displaying the symbol variation, the timing shown in FIG. In the figure, both the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 are performed at the same time. In addition, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a symbol variation display in which the symbol variation time to be a small hit is 580 seconds.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 34A is an electric support state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this electric support state, a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the power support state, the display of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the number-of-retention display area of Toku-zu 1, and also by the number of reservation icons in Toku-zu 1. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 2 reservation lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 2. In addition, you may make it also represent by the number of reservation icons of special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special map 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the reserve icon on the right side is the reserve icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 34A, four reserved icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and all four reserved icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that the third hold is a hold to be prefetched, and for convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched and shown. Has the same display mode as the other reserved icons h11, h12, and h14 (circular blank pattern and white display mode). The same applies to the following description. Note that a pre-reading notice (for example, the display mode of the reserved icon changes to the display mode of the pre-reading notice) may be performed using the reserved icon to be pre-read. 34 (a) to (e) are the same as FIGS. 33 (a) to (e) except that the third hold in the special figure 1 is to be prefetched. The description is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (f), the symbol variation display which is the symbol variation time of 580 seconds in the special figure 2 is completed, and a small hit result (for example, “special figure g”) is derived. The situation is shown. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the period from the occurrence of the small hit to the end of the small hit game related to the small hit, the progress of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, and the special figure The display is postponed by an amount corresponding to the interruption of the display of the symbol variation display result of No. 1. However, even if a small hit occurs in the special figure 2, the effect of the variation display of the decorative symbol according to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is continuously performed without interruption.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (g), the progress of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted even during the small hit game. Then, when the small hit game ends, as shown in FIG. 34 (h), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the special figure 2 starts, and the progress of the suspended symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is resumed. You.

  Thereafter, when the arrival of the initial symbol change time (for example, 9 seconds) of the special figure 1 approaches, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative symbol> the right decorative symbol> the middle decorative symbol, and as a result, FIG. As shown in ()), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the swing fluctuation starts with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 1”. Then, in this effect example, when the initial symbol change time of the special figure 1 comes, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (j) displays a shoji on the entire display screen and releases the shoji. The character GLG who smokes cigarettes from the inside appears, and the character of "heat" is displayed, indicating that a pre-reading notice using a stall effect is being performed. The execution time of the wait pre-reading notice effect is a period from the time of the small hit to the end of the small hit game relating to the small hit (that is, the period in which the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted). . It should be noted that the execution time of the above-described wait-staging effect (the wait-ahead look-ahead announcement effect) does not necessarily need to coincide with the period during which the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. Any time may be set as long as it corresponds to the suspended period. Also, the execution time of the pause effect (the delay look-ahead notice effect) is always performed for a fixed time (for example, 2 seconds, etc.) regardless of the period during which the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. Is also good. After that, when the symbol change time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 34 (k), the result of the loss is displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the decoration pattern display device 208 displays “decoration 4”. -Decoration 5-Decoration 1 is stopped and displayed at the combination of the outlying decorative symbols, and the mini symbol is stopped and displayed at "451" in accordance therewith, and the display result of the outlier is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. At this time, the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 1 is two, and the number of symbols to be changed in the special figure 2 is three. Hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 34 (k), the special figure 2 is still continuously displaying the symbol variation. In the present embodiment, when "special figure g" is displayed in special figure 2 and a small hit occurs, a pre-reading notice effect is performed with the contents shown in FIG. 34 (j). In the case where the result of another small hit (for example, “special figure f”) is displayed in the special map 2 and the small hit occurs, the content is different from that shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (j ′), an effect in which a Savohani group appears may be performed as a delayed look-ahead preview effect. In addition, in the case of a small hit, the same effect may be provided for the same content regardless of the type of the special figure stopped. In this case, for example, the color of a certain character or character may be changed depending on the type of small hit. In addition, the reliability of the prefetch notice to be executed may be different depending on the type of the small hit. Further, the reliability of the pre-reading notice may differ depending on the type of the small hit and the content of the pre-reading notice to be executed.

  In FIG. 34 (l), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes the icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, the special figure 2 is still performing the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 34 (m), the decorative symbol of “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (n), the decoration pattern of “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the swing fluctuation starts with the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4”. Is done. Also, at this time, the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 have been deleted, and only the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbols are displayed. In addition, the variable display is continuously performed on any of the mini symbols until the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (o), the decorative design starts to change and display again the character with the character "Re-lottery !!", and a re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery effect, "decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3" or "decorative 7-decorative", which is a combination of decorative patterns that determine a big hit and a transition to a probable change state advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game. The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7" is fueling the expectation of being finally displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (p), the state in which the combination of the decorative symbols does not change from the combination of the big hits of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 4” and the re-lottery effect has failed is shown. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (q), the display is stopped at the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”. In addition, the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 34 (q) is stopped and displayed with “○”, and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of “444”. In FIG. 34 (q), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 34 (r), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “Challenge big hit” is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit, and a character of “Please hit right!” Is displayed. He is pushing right.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the special figure 1 variable display, and the design variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted. In the case where there is a target and the pre-reading notice is performed based on this, the pre-reading notice is performed in a staggered effect, so that the player can enjoy the time until the symbol is stopped and displayed, and the big hit In some cases, expectations can be given to In addition, in the case where the pre-reading advance notice effect is performed during the period shown in FIG. 34, a big hit may or may not always occur. Further, in this effect example, the effect example in which the design change display of the special figure 1 in which the progress is interrupted by the special figure 2 being a small hit is out of order is shown, but the special figure 2 becomes the small hit. In the event that the symbol fluctuation display of Toku-zu 1 where the progress is interrupted due to this is a big hit, the pre-reading notice effect is not performed so long, that is, after the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbol starts, Until the display in FIG. 1 is confirmed, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the symbol change display of the special figure 1, and when the result of the special figure 1 during the symbol change display becomes a large hit, a staggered effect is provided. After the swing fluctuation has started without executing the (preliminary preview notice production), the fluctuation is continued until the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. Effect) may be executed. Further, in this effect example, for example, a continuous notice as a pre-reading notice effect that is repeated a plurality of times, a pre-reading mode as a pre-read notice effect that continues a plurality of times, the execution is started earlier than the pre-reading notice effect, and these are started. There may be a case where the pre-reading notice effect is performed in a superimposed manner during the execution of the pre-read notice effect.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 (a) to (h), in the normal gaming state, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in which the special figure 2 is a big hit. An example of the effect will be described.

  FIG. 35 shows a decorative symbol display device 208. The first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp. The illustration of 220 and the general-purpose holding lamp 216 is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35A, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 35A, the special figure 1 is in a state of being stopped and displayed, while the special figure 2 is in a symbol change display, and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the reserved number display area 284, "x" is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 to indicate that, and in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2, the symbol change is being displayed. "-" Is displayed. The symbol change display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol change display that becomes a big hit.

  Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 35A is a normal game state (a special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the left of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 35A, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0, and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 2.

  Thereafter, when the game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (b), as shown in FIG. 35 (c), in parallel with the symbol change display on the special figure 2 display device 214. Then, symbol variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35D, the decorative symbol during the variable display is reduced and moved to the lower right corner of the display screen, and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 becomes a big hit. The character "Preparing for big hit !!" is displayed large in the center of the display screen to notify that the display is in progress. In the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the symbol change time of the special figure 2 is extremely long, about 10 minutes. In some cases, the player does not notice this and stops playing the game, which may be disadvantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as described above, for example, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is a big hit, The result of the symbol variation display in FIG. 2 is to be notified that a big hit has occurred. In addition, by using such a configuration, there is a case where it is possible to prevent unnecessary beating. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed for a moment, the display of "Preparing for the big hit !!" is performed. May surprise the player. Alternatively, the display of “Under preparation for a big hit !!” may be performed without starting the change display of the decorative symbol. In this case, the large decoration pattern is being prepared without the fluctuation display being once performed, so that it is possible to give an illusion as to whether or not the previous fluctuation has been continued, so that the user can feel as if he has obtained one hold. May be possible. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (d), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is increased by one, and one reservation icon h11 is displayed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (e), the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the undesignated symbol (“special figure C”), and the decorative pattern is also adjusted to “special figure 3-special figure 4- It is stopped and displayed at the combination of the decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Tokushi 1". In addition, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is also stopped and displayed at "341" in accordance with the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed. In addition, the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is still continued, and the display of the character “Preparing for big hit !!” is still continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (f), the symbol change display of the special figure 1 which has been suspended is started. At this time, the decorative design is also starting to fluctuate according to the design fluctuating display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special map 2 is still continued, and the display of the character "Preparing for big hits !!" is still continued. For this reason, it may be possible to make it appear that a prefetch notice (continuous notice) is being performed.

  After that, the symbol fluctuating time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (g), a state where the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (for example, “special figure b”) is shown. In accordance with this, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. Also, at this time, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being executed is discarded, and a stop display is performed with a missing symbol. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of decorative symbols out of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", and also stops and displays the mini symbol at "417" accordingly. I have. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (h), the character "Challenge big hit" is displayed together with the character "Challenge big hit" indicating a big hit, and the player makes a right-hand hit. This encourages the passing of the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit occurrence gate 252, the big hit game starts.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the design change display of the special figure 1, the result of the design change display of the special figure 1 is discarded at that time, and the out-of-design is changed. Will be displayed. In addition, when there is a symbol change display suspended in the special figure 1, after the big hit game related to the big hit in the special figure 2 is finished, the symbols are sequentially consumed. In the same manner, when a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 during the design change display of the special figure 2, the result of the design change display of the special figure 2 is discarded at the time of the big hit in the special figure 1, and the outlying pattern Will be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a simultaneous fluctuating machine has been described. However, the present invention is also applicable to other types of pachinko machines, for example, it is also possible to apply to a type 1 and type 2 mixer.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 (1a) to (1h), a description will be given of an effect example in a case where a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 during the symbol change display of the special figure 2 in the probable change state. 36, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  FIG. 36 (1a) shows a state where the symbol variation display is being performed in the probable change state. As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a simultaneous variation machine capable of simultaneously performing the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pachinko machine 100 has the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 Both of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 are performed in parallel. In the probable change state, different from the normal game state or the electric support state, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol fluctuating display of the special figure 2.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1a), the total acquisition prize in which the character “during small hit RUSH” indicating that it is during the small hit RUSH (that is, during the probability change state) is displayed as “0480 pt”. It is displayed above the display of the number of balls. Also, a mini symbol and a right-handed display for instructing right-handedness are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 36 (1a) is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, the designation of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of reserved icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  In FIG. 36 (1a), three reserved icons h21, h22, and h23 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the three reserved icons h21, h22, Each of h23 is displayed in the default display mode (circular pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokujin 2 is a round hold icon. Note that, in FIG. 36 (1a), in order to make it easy to understand that four reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, reserved icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area of the special map 1. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 36 is a probable change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). This is because a large number of variable displays are executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1b), a state is shown in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with an outlier symbol (“special figure C”). In accordance with this, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, "x" indicating that the display has been stopped and displayed with a lost symbol is displayed. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol change display is still continued, and the decorative symbol is also changed and displayed according to the symbol change display of the special figure 2.

  Thereafter, one symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which has been held is consumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1c) shows that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. I have. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1d), a state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has been completed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 36 (1d), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is also “decorative 6-decorative 3-decorative 8”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative patterns on the edge. Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is still continued.

  After that, one symbol change display of the special figure 2 which has been held is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. The character "The big hit is approaching!" Is displayed, and the notice of the big hit in the special map 1 is given. As a result, the player can recognize that a big hit has occurred, and may be able to further increase the sense of expectation for the big hit and prevent unnecessary hitting. In addition, you may make it change the display mode of the decorative symbol during the variable display and notify the big hit of the special figure 1 in advance. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36 (1f), the decorative pattern during the variable display moves to the upper right corner of the display screen and is reduced and displayed, while the character of "approaching big hit !!" is enlarged and displayed.

  After that, the symbol fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (1g), the state where the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (for example, “special figure B”) is shown. In accordance with this, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. Also, at this time, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is discarded, and the stop display is performed with a missing symbol. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols out of “decoration 0-decoration 3−decoration 4”, and also stops and displays the mini symbol at “034” accordingly. I have. After that, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (1h), the character "Challenge Big Hit" indicating that the big hit has been displayed, the big hit is notified, and the big hit start effect is performed. The situation is shown. After that, when it becomes possible to accept the passage of the jackpot occurrence gate, as shown in FIG. 36 (1i), the characters "waiting for jackpot!" The player is hit right to urge the player to pass the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit occurrence gate 252, the big hit game starts.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 during the design change display of the special figure 2, the result of the design change display of the special figure 2 is discarded at that time, and the out-of-design is changed. Will be displayed. In addition, when there is a symbol change display suspended in the special figure 2, the special game is sequentially consumed after the big hit game related to the big hit in the special figure 1 is completed. In addition, when a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the special figure 1 change display, the result of the special figure 1 display change display is discarded at the time when the special figure 2 hits the big hit. Will be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 (2a) to (2e), an effect example in the case where a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 in the probable change state will be described. Note that, in this effect example, the design variation display of the special figure 2 is not suspended and the design variation display is not performed, and as shown in FIG. The display is in a standby state in which the decorative symbols are not displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 36 (2a) shows a state in which only the special figure 1 is displaying the symbol variation in the certainty variation state. In the probable change state, unlike the normal gaming state or the electric support state, the decorative display is displayed in a fluctuating manner in accordance with the design fluctuating display of the special figure 2. Not done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2a), the total acquisition prize in which the character “during small hit RUSH” indicating that it is during the small hit RUSH (that is, during the probability change state) is displayed as “0480 pt”. It is displayed above the display of the number of balls. Also, a mini symbol and a right-handed display for instructing right-handedness are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 36 (2a) is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, the designation of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of reserved icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (2a), there is no symbol change display which is suspended in the special figure 2, so that no pending icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and Since the symbol variation display of FIG. 2 is not performed, the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 280 either. Also, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special map 1. Here, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 36 is a probable change state (special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state), so that the special figure 2 This is because a large number of variable displays are executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2b), a state is shown in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a non-designated pattern (“special figure C”). In accordance with this, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, "x" indicating that the display has been stopped and displayed with a lost symbol is displayed. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display has not been started yet, and the decorative symbols are also stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols out of the "decoration 6-decoration 3-decoration 8".

  Thereafter, one symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which has been held is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2c) shows that the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. I have. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. In this effect example, after the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, no warning display regarding the big hit is performed, but the warning display may be performed.

  After that, the symbol fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (2d), a state where the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (for example, “special figure B”) is shown. In accordance with this, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. On the other hand, since the symbols are still stopped and displayed in the special figure 2, the decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols out of the "decoration 6-decoration 3-decoration 8". Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (2e), the character "challenge jackpot" indicating that the jackpot has been hit is displayed, but the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not performed. In order to alert the player, there is a case where right-handing has not been performed, so that the character "Right-hand-out and pass through the big hit generation gate!" Is displayed to urge right-handing. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit occurrence gate 252, the big hit game starts.

  Next, an example of the effect in the case where the small hits are held consecutively in the probability change game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the effect on the display of the total number of awarded spheres centered on the decorative symbol display device in a stepwise manner. 37, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37A, 35 small hits and big hits including the first big hit have occurred, and the character “35th” is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The number of consecutive chan is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (a), a state in which the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is performed in the certainty change state is shown. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is not performed, and there is no held symbol change display. In the probable change state, different from the normal game state or the electric support state, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol fluctuating display of the special figure 2.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (a), the character "small hit RUSH" indicating that it is in a probable change state is displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen, and below it. "12215pt" is displayed as the total winning prize ball number display, and 12215 prize balls are obtained by winning from the first big hit to the variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a). Is shown.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 37 is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the reservation icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reservation icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of reserved icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1.

  In FIG. 37A, four reserved icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the four reserved icons h21, h21, and h21 of the special figure 1 are displayed. h22, h23, and h24 are all displayed in a default display mode (a round, plain, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokujin 2 is a round hold icon. Note that the first hold and the third hold are symbol change displays that are small hits, and in FIG. 37A, the first change that is a symbol change display that is a small hit is provided for convenience of explanation. Although the hatching icons h21 and h23 of the third special figure 2 are shown by hatching, actually, the same display mode as the other holding icons h22 and h24 of the special figure 2 (circular blank pattern and white Display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area of the special map 1. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 37 is a probable change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). This is because the variable display in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (b), a state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has been completed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (b), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is also “decorative 6-decorative 3-decorative 8”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative patterns on the edge. Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "638" in accordance with this.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (c), it is shown that the symbol change display of the special figure 2 which is a small hit is being performed. In this embodiment, the character "CHANCE!" Is displayed in place of the display of "small hit RUSH in progress" to notify that a win (small hit or big hit) will occur. It should be noted that the character "Chance!" May not be displayed, the character "Chance!" May not be displayed, or the symbol change "Chang!" May be always displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (d), the small hit symbol ("special symbol g") is stopped and displayed, and the decoration symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed accordingly. . In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at “666” in accordance with the stopped and displayed decorative symbol. In addition, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, “表示” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has occurred.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (e) shows a state in which the small hit game has started. When the small hit game is started, the character "SMALL BONUS!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen to inform that the small hit game (or the 3R big hit game that appears to be a small hit game) is being performed. The display of the number of consecutive channels displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen is updated to “36th”, and the user is notified that this is the 36th consecutive channel. In addition, at the upper left of the display screen, “decoration 6”, which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit, is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” has been displayed. Have been.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (f), one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a due to the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 15 winning balls are obtained. The character “15/150 get!” Indicating that 150 small prize balls can be expected in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this time, the addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen has not been performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (g), a state is shown in which the small hitting game has been completed because ten gaming balls have entered the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 winning balls are obtained. In addition, the character “150/150 get!” Indicating that 150 small prize balls can be expected in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen has not been performed. Also, in this effect example, a small hit is included in the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2, which is reserved, and the character of "W-UP chance!" The information is displayed in a wrapped state, and the player is informed in advance that a pending consecutive change will occur.

  After that, when the small hitting game is finished and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, as shown in FIG. 37 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “small variation” indicating that the probability variation state is continuing. In addition to the display of the characters "RAT RUSH CONTINUE!", The decorative design is displayed in a small size, moved to the upper right portion of the display screen, and the variable display is started. In addition, in this example of the production, since the pending consecutive chan is performed, the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen is not counted up, and the inverted display is performed. Has been notified. That is, the total number of acquired prize balls before the occurrence of the small hit remains “12215pt”. In addition, the character display of “W-UP chance!” Is also continuously displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired during the small hitting game is not added during the small hitting game. The addition is reserved even after the symbol variation display has started. This may allow the player to have a sense of expectation for the pending consecutive chan. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the count of the total acquired prize balls is not performed, the reverse display is performed to notify the fact, but the display may be performed in another display mode. For example, mosaic display may be performed to make it difficult to identify the current total number of acquired prize balls.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (i) shows a state when the symbol variation display of the first special figure 2 has ended after the small hit game has ended. As shown in FIG. 37 (i), in this embodiment, even after the end of the small hitting game (or the big hitting game), the "small hitting RUSH continues!" Is continuously displayed, and the character "W-UP CHANCE!" Is also displayed continuously, so that the small hitting game is smoothly shifted to the stable state after the end of the small hitting game. I'm doing a production that looks like. At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (i), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen is also “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols at the edge of "8". Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "718" in accordance with this.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (j), a state is shown in which the small hit has been completed and the second symbol change display of the special figure 2 is being performed. This symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is a small hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (k), in this effect example, before all of the symbol variation displays held during the small hitting are exhausted, the decorative symbol which was displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen is displayed. Move to the center and zoom in. At this time, the decorative symbol during the variable display overlaps with the character “W-UP Chance!”, But the decorative symbol during the variable display may overlap with the character “W-UP Chance!”. . The display of the total number of winning prize balls is still in a state where the count-up is reserved.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (l), the small hit symbol (“special symbol g”) is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 8—decoration 8—decoration 8” is stopped and displayed accordingly. . In addition, the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed at “888” in accordance with the stopped and displayed decorative symbols. In addition, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, “表示” is stopped and displayed, indicating that a small hit has occurred. That is, a state in which a small-reserved consecutive chan is generated is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (m) shows a state in which the small hit game has started. When the small hit game starts, the character "SMALL BONUS!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen to inform that the small hit game is being performed, and the number of consecutive chans displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen. The display is updated to "37th time" and the 37th consecutive channel is notified. In addition, at the upper left of the display screen, “decoration 8”, which is a combination of decorative patterns when a small hit, is displayed, and it is notified that the combination of “decoration 8—decoration 8—decoration 8” has been displayed. Have been.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (n), one game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a due to the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 15 winning balls are obtained. Indicates that 165 prize balls have been obtained in addition to the number of prize balls obtained in the previous small hit, and that it is expected that 300 prize balls can be obtained in the current small hit in addition to the previous small hit. The letters “165/300 get!” Are displayed at the upper center of the display screen. In other words, when a pending consecutive chan occurs, the number of prize balls added to the number of prize balls acquired in the previous hit is notified. At this time, the addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen has not been performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 37 (o), a state is shown in which the small hitting game has been completed because ten gaming balls have entered the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and are obtained in the previous small hit. "300 / 300get!" Indicating that 300 prize balls are obtained by adding the 150 small balls and that 300 prize balls can be expected in this small hit together with the previous small hit. Is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen has not been performed.

  After that, when the small hitting game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 37 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “small variation” indicating that the probable change state is continuing. In addition to the display of the characters "RAT RUSH CONTINUE!", The decorative design is displayed in a small size, moved to the upper right portion of the display screen, and the variable display is started. In addition, the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen starts an animation of counting up, and shows that 300 prize balls acquired in two small hit games are added. Have been. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a pending consecutive chan occurs, after the first small hitting game is completed, the acquired number of prize balls is not added and displayed, and the second small hitting (ie, , The number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game related to the small hit game that has been held consecutively, and added together after the end of the small hit game. As a result, there is a case where the player can have a feeling of acquiring a large amount of prize balls. Thereafter, the display of the total number of winning prize balls is counted up as shown in FIGS. 24 (m) to (p), and as a result, as shown in FIG. "12515pt" to which the number of prize balls has been added is displayed.

  Note that, in this production example, an example in which small hits are held consecutively is shown. However, for example, a 3R likelihood change big hit or the like is also applied to a large hit that has the same small hit as the appearance of a large continuous hit (for example, “W-UP”). And the like may be displayed. With such a configuration, it may be difficult to distinguish between a big hit and a small hit, and the game may be sharpened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, an example of an effect in a case where a large hit has been made for a consecutive hold after a small hit in the probability change game state will be described. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of an effect on the display of the total number of awarded spheres centered on the decorative symbol display device in a stepwise manner. 38, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38A, 35 small hits and big hits including the first big hit have occurred, and the character “35th” is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The number of consecutive chan is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (a), a state in which the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is performed in the certainty change state is shown. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is not performed, and there is no held symbol change display. In the probable change state, different from the normal game state or the electric support state, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol fluctuating display of the special figure 2.

  Also, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (a), the character “during small hit RUSH” indicating that the state is the probable change state is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen, and below it. "12215pt" is displayed as the total winning prize ball number display, and 12215 prize balls are obtained by winning from the first big hit to the variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a). Is shown.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 38 is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the reservation icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reservation icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of reserved icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1.

  In FIG. 38A, four reserved icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the four reserved icons h21, h21, and h21 of the special figure 1 are displayed. h22, h23, and h24 are all displayed in a default display mode (a round, plain, white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokujin 2 is a round hold icon. The first hold is a symbol change display that becomes a small hit, and the third hold is a symbol change display that becomes a big hit. In FIG. 38 (a), for the sake of explanation, hatching is applied to the first hold icon h21 that is a symbol change display that becomes a small hit, and a third hold icon h23 that is a symbol change display that becomes a big hit is displayed. Is shown with cross-hatching, but in fact, it has the same display mode (circular blank pattern and white display mode) as the reserve icons h22 and h24 of the other special drawings 2. The same applies to the following description.

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area of the special map 1. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 38 is a probable change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). This is because the variable display in FIG. FIGS. 38 (a) to (f) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to (f) except that the symbol variation display of the third special figure 2 which is held is a big hit. ) Is the same as that of FIG.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (g), a state is shown in which the small hitting game has been completed because ten game balls have entered the second variable winning opening 235a. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, ten game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by repeating the short opening of the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 150 winning balls are obtained. In addition, the character “150/150 get!” Indicating that 150 small prize balls can be expected in this small hit is displayed at the upper center of the display screen. At this point, addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen has not been performed. Also, in this example of production, the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2, which is on hold, includes a big hit, and the character "Large Bonus Super Heat!" The information is displayed in a wrapped state, and the player is informed in advance that a pending consecutive change will occur.

  After that, when the small hit game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 38 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “small variation” indicating that the probable change state is continuing. In addition to the display of the characters "RAT RUSH CONTINUE!", The decorative design is displayed in a small size, moved to the upper right portion of the display screen, and the variable display is started. In addition, in this example of the production, since the pending consecutive chan is performed, the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen is not counted up, and the inverted display is performed. Has been notified. That is, the total number of acquired prize balls before the occurrence of the small hit remains “12215pt”. Further, the character display of "Large bonus super heat!" Is also displayed continuously. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls acquired during the small hitting game is not added during the small hitting game. The addition is reserved even after the symbol variation display has started. This may allow the player to have a sense of expectation for the pending consecutive chan.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (i) shows a state in which the first symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has ended after the small hit game ends. As shown in FIG. 38 (i), in the present embodiment, even after the end of the small hit game (or the big hit game), "small hit RUSH continues!" Is displayed continuously, and the character of "Large bonus super heat!" Is also displayed continuously. And directing them to look like they are. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (i), the special figure 2 is displayed as a result of the loss, and the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen is also “decorative 7-decorative 1-decorative”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols at the edge of "8". Also, the mini symbols are stopped and displayed at "718" in accordance with this.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (j), a state is shown in which the small hit has been completed and the second symbol change display of Tokuju 2 has been performed. This symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (k), in this effect example, before all of the symbol variation displays held during the small hitting are exhausted, the decorative symbol which was displayed small in the upper right portion of the display screen is displayed. It moves to the center and is enlarged and displayed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach effect is started. At this time, the decorative pattern during the variable display overlaps with the character "Large bonus super heat!", But the decorative pattern during the variable display overlaps with the character "Large bonus super heat!" Is also good. The display of the total number of winning prize balls is still in a state where the count-up is reserved.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (l), the big hit symbol ("special figure e") is stopped and displayed, and in accordance with this, it is notified that the 10R certain variable big hit of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is confirmed. The combination of the big hit decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed at "333" in accordance with the stopped and displayed decorative symbol. In the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, “停止” is stopped and displayed to indicate that a big hit has occurred. That is, a state in which a jackpot-reserved consecutive chan is generated is shown. Finally, in FIG. 38 (m), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "big chance big hit" is displayed together with a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here), and a series displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen. The display of the number of chans is updated to “37th”, and it is notified that it is the 37th chan chan.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (n), a state in which the game of the first round is performed is shown. In the first round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "Congratulations on Great Chance!" Along with the character of Dr. Machiko on the slightly left side of the center of the display screen, and congratulates on the 10R probability change big hit. . And, in the upper left corner of the display screen, "decoration 3" which is a jackpot decoration pattern at the time of a jackpot is displayed. In the upper center of the display screen, a display of “1R” which is the current number of rounds is displayed as the number of rounds. At the timing shown in FIG. 38 (n), two game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a by opening the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a, and 30 winning balls are obtained. In addition, it shows that 180 prize balls were acquired in addition to the number of prize balls acquired in the previous small hit, and that 1650 prize balls can be expected in the big hit in total including the previous small hit. The character “180 / 1650get!” Is displayed below the display of the number of rounds. In other words, when a pending consecutive chan occurs, the number of prize balls added to the number of prize balls acquired in the previous hit is notified. At this time, the addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right part of the display screen has not been performed.

  FIG. 38 (o) shows a state in which the tenth round has been completed due to ten game balls having entered the second variable winning opening 235a in the tenth round, and a big hit end effect has been performed. Since the big hit this time is a 10R positive change big hit, the character of "small hit RUSH continuation!" Indicating that the positive change state continues is displayed. In the big hit game of this time, in a certain round (for example, the third round), eleven game balls enter the second variable winning opening 235a and an over-winning occurs. "1665 / 1650get!", Which indicates that 1650 prize balls can be obtained by adding up to 150 prize balls obtained at the same time, and that 1650 prize balls can be expected to be obtained in this big hit together with the previous small hit. Characters are displayed at the top center of the display screen. That is, since the number of prize balls generated by over-winning is also included, the number of prize balls actually obtained is displayed more than the number of prize balls expected to be obtained in the previous small hit and the current big hit. Will be done. Note that the number of prize balls generated by over-winning may not be included. Also, at this time, the addition to the display of the total acquired prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen is not performed.

  After that, when the big hit game ends and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 starts, as shown in FIG. 38 (p), the character of “continue small hit RUSH!” Continues on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display also shows that the decorative design is displayed small, moved to the upper right portion of the display screen, and the variable display is started. In addition, an animation is started in which the display of the total number of winning prize balls displayed in the lower right portion of the display screen is counted up, and 1665 prize balls obtained in the previous small hit game and the current big hit game are added. Is shown. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a pending consecutive champion occurs, the acquired number of award balls is not added and displayed after the first small hit game is completed, and the big hit 2 ( That is, the small hit game is added together with the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game relating to the big hit with the pending consecutive change. As a result, there is a case where the player can have a feeling of acquiring a large amount of prize balls. Thereafter, the display of the total number of winning prize balls is counted up as shown in FIGS. 24 (m) to (p), and as a result, as shown in FIG. 38 (q), 1665 pieces are added to “12215pt”. "13880 pt" to which the number of award balls is added is displayed. Note that, in this effect example, since the number of prize balls to be added is as large as 1665, it is shown that the animation is continued after the big hit game is completed, for example, during the execution of the ninth symbol change display. I have. In this case, even if the suspension of the four symbol change displays is exhausted, the small decorative symbols may be continuously displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen until the count-up of the total acquired prize balls is completed. .

  In the present embodiment, when a pending consecutive chan is generated, the total number of prize balls obtained in the big hit game (small hit game) related to the previous hit (big hit / small hit) is displayed on the display of the total obtained prize balls. Instead of counting, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game (small hit game) related to the later hit is counted and counted up after the end of the hit game related to the later hit. Therefore, if the next jackpot is promised by the probability change, the number of award balls won in the jackpot game related to the previous probability change jackpot will not be counted in the total acquired award ball number display, and the subsequent jackpot will not be counted. In the case of a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot is completed, the number of acquired prize balls may be collectively counted up to display the total acquired prize balls.

  Also, in this production example, an example in which two consecutive chans are generated during the reservation is described. After the hit game according to (small hit) is completed, the number of prize balls acquired in the series of the hit games may be collectively counted up to display the total acquired prize balls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the example of the effect of the small-reserved rendezvous chan and the example of the effect of the large-reservation rendezvous-chan have been described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. Because some combinations are common, for example, in the case of a big hit and a small hit, the effect on the display is performed in the same mode or a similar mode, and it is determined which hit has occurred. You may make it difficult. More specifically, for example, the effect in the case of a big hit is made as shown in FIG. 37 (l) to FIG. In this case, it is also possible to make the effect such as shown in FIGS. 38 (l) to 38 (n) appear as if the big hits (for example, 3R probability variable big hits) are consecutive.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pending consecutive chan occurs, the total acquired prize balls are counted up collectively. For example, when a certain condition is satisfied, the pending consecutive chan occurs. In such a case, the count-up of the total number of winning prize balls may be permitted collectively. For example, when a certain number of consecutive chan (for example, 10 consecutive chan), a reserved consecutive chan is generated thereafter. In such a case, the total number of awarded balls may be counted up at a time, or a condition can be set by a player, and when the set condition is satisfied, the total number of awarded balls is counted up. May be performed collectively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, an example of a process from the stop of the big hit symbol to the start of the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 39 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a process from the stop of the big hit symbol to the end of the big hit game.

  Note that the game state shown in FIG. 39 is a special figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state (normal game state), but a similar operation may be performed in another game state, or a different operation may be performed. You may. In the present embodiment, for example, the execution time of the big hit start effect differs depending on the game state, but the process from the stop of the big hit symbol to the occurrence of the big hit is the same in any game state.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the special figure 2 is in the symbol change display, while the special figure 1 is in the symbol stop display. After that, at the timing shown at t81, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, and when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses and the timing of t82 is reached, the condition device is activated, and The right-handed display lamp RR of the control lamp board 254 is turned on, and the waiting state for the big hit start wait time (for example, 10 seconds) is set. At this time, at least a game state command indicating that the condition device has been operated and a firing position command indicating right-handing are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. When these commands are received by the first sub-control unit 400, a jackpot start effect is started, and a right-handed display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, even during the symbol stop display of the special figure 1, when the condition device related to the big hit of the special figure 2 operates and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the gaming state command to that effect, The display of the menu display is prohibited, and control is performed so that the menu display is not displayed even when the display operation of the menu display is performed.

  At the timing of t83 after the jackpot start wait time has elapsed, the jackpot generation gate monitoring state is enabled, and when the game ball passes through the jackpot generation gate 252, the jackpot game starts. At this time, at least a big hit generation gate valid start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. When the first hit control gate valid start command is received by the first sub-control unit 400, a gate entry waiting effect is started, and the player is prompted to pass the game ball to the hit hit generation gate 252. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the game state command indicating that the condition device has been operated, the control is performed such that the display of the menu display is prohibited. The timing at which the display of the display is prohibited is not limited to the above-described timing. For example, the timing at which the big hit occurrence gate valid start command is received may be used, or the special figure fluctuation stop command transmitted at the timing of t81 may be the first sub-command. The timing at which the control unit 400 receives the information may be used.

  Thereafter, the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 at the timing of t84, and when this is detected, the big hit game is started at the timing shown by t85, and the first round is started. At this time, the big hit occurrence gate monitoring state becomes invalid. After that, the big hit game is exhausted, and when the big hit game ends at the timing shown by t86, the condition device is also in a stopped state (inactive state), and the gaming state is also a special figure high probability general figure low probability state or a special figure low probability. Move to the normal high probability state. After that, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 start the symbol variation display on condition that the symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, when the gaming state is the special figure high-probability ordinary figure low-probability state and the special figure 2 does not hold the symbol change display, or the gaming state is the special figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state and the special figure 1 If there is no hold on the symbol change display, the display of the menu display is set to the permission state, but in the game state other than the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state, there is no hold of the symbol change display, The display of the menu display may be prohibited even when the symbol variation display is not being performed.

  FIG. 40 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect performed until a big hit game starts, in a stepwise manner. 40, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40A, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 40A, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in a stopped state, and the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. To indicate this, “x” is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2.

  Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 40 is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is located on the left of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284.

  In FIG. 40A, two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and both the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode).

  In FIG. 40B, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes the icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, for example, the decorative symbols are changed and displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 21 to 22, and as a result, the big hit symbols are displayed on the first special figure display device 212 as shown in FIG. 40 (c). At the same time, the display is stopped at the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”. Then, after the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds), as shown in FIG. 40 (d), the big hit start effect is performed until the big hit start wait time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. Will be At the same time as the start of the big hit start effect, a right-handed display is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After the jackpot start wait time has elapsed, the game ball is monitored for passing to the jackpot generation gate 252. As shown in FIG. 40 (e), "waiting for jackpot!" Is displayed, and a gate entry standby effect in which the character “!” Is displayed is started, and the player is prompted to pass the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (f), the big hit game starts as shown in FIG. 40 (g), the first round starts, and the first variable winning opening 234a (or the second variable winning opening 235a) is opened.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the big hit game can be started.

  FIG. 41 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started while the symbol change of the special figure 2 which becomes a big hit during the animation demonstration which is the standby effect. It is a figure which shows the production example in a case step by step. 41, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41A, the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is being executed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a symbol variation display in which a big hit is achieved. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41A, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 41A, since the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, the fourth symbol / reservation number at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the display area 284, to indicate this, blinking of “−” indicating that the symbol is being changed is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2.

  Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 41 is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is located on the left of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41A, there is no suspension of the symbol change display of the special figure 1, and thus the reservation icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed in the reservation icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. On the other hand, there are two holdings of the symbol change display of the special figure 2, and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is "2".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (b), the display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the player is notified that the combination is out of order. . On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is still performed, but in the normal gaming state, the effect display corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not performed.

  A shifted symbol is displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Symbol demonstration is started. In the present embodiment, the symbol demonstration is a symbol variation display (for example, in the normal gaming state, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212) which is a target of the variation display of the decoration symbol. In addition, this is an effect that is executed in a standby state, which is not a jackpot game state, and the display of the combination of decorative symbols stopped and displayed is maintained, and for example, the menu screen is displayed by operating the effect button 138. can do. Although the display of the background is omitted, a part or all of the background may be different from the background displayed when the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.For example, during the display of the symbol demo, The background displayed when the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner is the same, but the animation may be different or a completely different background may be displayed.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of the symbol demo, the display switches from the symbol demo to the animation demo as shown in FIG. The animation demonstration is an effect that is executed as a standby effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), the title of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed to increase the desire to play. Also, in this state, it is possible to shift to the menu screen by operating the effect button 138, for example. After a predetermined execution time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the animation demonstration is switched to the symbol demonstration again. After that, the pattern demonstration and the animation demonstration are alternately repeated until the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the animation demonstration, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (e), the first special figure display is made as shown in FIG. 41 (f). The symbol change display is started in the device 212, and the decoration symbol display device 208 switches from the display of the running animation demonstration to the decoration symbol change display.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (g), the decorative symbol during the variable display is reduced and moved to the lower right corner of the display screen, and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 becomes a big hit. The character "Preparing for big hit !!" is displayed large in the center of the display screen to notify that the display is in progress. In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the symbol variation display according to the special figure 2 is not performed, so that the player may stop playing without knowing that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 will be a big hit. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, for example, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is a big hit, The result of the symbol variation display in FIG. 2 is to be notified that a big hit has occurred. In addition, by using such a configuration, there is a case where it is possible to prevent unnecessary beating. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed for a moment, the display of "Preparing for the big hit !!" is performed. May surprise the player. Alternatively, the display of “Under preparation for a big hit !!” may be performed without starting the change display of the decorative symbol. In this case, a large jackpot is being prepared for a big hit without once displaying a change in a large decorative pattern, so that it is possible to give an illusion as to whether or not the previous change has continued, so that the user feels that one hold is obtained. May be possible.

  After that, the symbol fluctuating time of the special figure 2 has elapsed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (h), the state where the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (for example, “special figure b”) is shown. In accordance with this, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. Also, at this time, the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being executed is discarded, and a stop display is performed with a missing symbol. At the same time, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of decorative symbols out of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", and also stops and displays the mini symbol at "417" accordingly. I have. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41 (i) displays the character “challenge big hit” indicating that the big hit has occurred, and also displays the upper right corner of the display screen. A right-handed display is displayed at the corner.

  After the jackpot start wait time has elapsed, the game ball is monitored for passing to the jackpot generation gate 252, and as shown in FIG. 41 (j), "waiting for jackpot!" Is displayed, and a gate entry standby effect in which the character “!” Is displayed is started, and the player is prompted to pass the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (k), the big hit game starts as shown in FIG. 41 (l), the first round starts, and the second variable winning opening 235a (or the first variable winning opening 234a) is opened.

  On the other hand, when performing an effect in which the gaming state after the end of the big hit is determined to be a certainty change state (small hit RUSH), as shown in FIG. 41 (i ′), the character “big chance big hit” is displayed. The displayed big hit start effect is executed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (j '), a gate on which characters "waiting for a big chance!" The entry waiting effect is started, and the player is prompted to pass the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. That is, in the big hit start effect and the gate entry promotion effect, the type of the big hit may be guessed to the player by making the mode of the effect different.

  FIG. 42 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of an effect when a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the effect of the symbol demonstration that is the standby effect. 42, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted. The effects shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (c) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (c), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the symbol demonstration, the symbol change time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (d), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol (for example, “special figure b”). It is shown. In accordance with this, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. However, since the symbol demonstration is still being performed, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the big hit has occurred in the special figure 2. After that, when the symbol display time of the special map 2 elapses, the big hit start wait time is set and time counting is started. As shown in FIG. 42 (e), the big hit start effect corresponding to the set big hit start wait time is performed. Is performed, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the symbol demonstration is still ongoing.

  When the jackpot start wait time elapses and the game ball is monitored for passing to the jackpot occurrence gate 252, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The character "Right-hand and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which the display for promoting the passage of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is being performed over the display of the symbol demonstration. Then, when the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (g), the big hit game starts as shown in FIG. 42 (h), the first round starts, and the second variable winning opening 235a (or the first variable winning opening 234a) is opened.

  On the other hand, in the case of performing an effect in which the gaming state after the end of the big hit is determined to be a probable change state (small hit RUSH), as shown in FIG. In some cases, the character "Right-handed to get a great chance!" That is, there are cases where the type of the big hit can be estimated to the player by making the display mode for promoting the passage of the big hit generating gate different.

  In this manner, in this effect example, in the normal gaming state, when the big hit occurs in the special figure 2, the display which promotes the passing of the big hit occurrence gate 252 by being superimposed on the display of the symbol demonstration without performing the big hit start effect. Is displayed in some cases.

  FIG. 43 is an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing step by step another example of an effect in the case of a big hit in the special figure 2 during the effect of the symbol demonstration which is a standby effect. is there. 43, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is being executed, and the second special figure display device 214 is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (a), the decorative symbol is varied according to the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Also, in the state shown in FIG. 43 (a), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed, but since the second special figure display device 214 is stopped and displayed in a non-designated pattern, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 in the upper right corner, as shown to that effect, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1, "-" indicating that the symbol is changing is blinking, and the special figure 2 is displayed. In the symbol change notification area, "x" indicating that the missing symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed.

  Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 43 is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is located on the left of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a), there is no suspension of the symbol change display of the special figure 1, and therefore, the reserved icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. In addition, there is no suspension of the symbol change display of the special figure 2, and the number-of-reservations display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284 is “0”.

  Thereafter, the game ball wins in the second special figure starting port 232, and the symbol variation display is started on the second special figure display device 214. At the timing shown in FIG. A state is shown in which both of the symbol change display in FIG. 2 are executed.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (c) is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5−decoration 4−decoration 1”, and is notified to the player that it is a deviation. . On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is still performed, but in the normal gaming state, the effect display corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not performed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 43 (d) to (i) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 43 (d) to (i) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 42 (c) to (h), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, in this effect example, after the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which becomes a big hit during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 starts, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being executed ends, and thereafter, When the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol during the execution of the symbol demonstration as the standby effect, the symbol demonstration is displayed without performing the big hit start effect. , There is a case where a display for promoting the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed.

  FIG. 44 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of an effect when a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the animation demonstration that is a standby effect. 43, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 44 (a) to (d) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 41 (a) to (d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the animation demonstration, the symbol changing time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (e), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol (for example, “special figure b”). It is shown. In accordance with this, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. However, since the animation demonstration is still being performed, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the big hit has occurred in Toku-zu 2. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the big hit start wait time is set and the timer starts, but as shown in FIG. 44 (f), the big hit start effect corresponding to the set big hit start wait time is made. Is performed, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the animation demonstration is still continuing.

  After that, when the jackpot start wait time elapses, the state of monitoring the passing of the game ball to the jackpot occurrence gate 252 is monitored. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The gate entry waiting effect is not performed. In addition, in this effect example, even in a state where the passing of the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252 is monitored in the animation demonstration, a display for promoting the passing of the big hit generation gate 252 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the animation demonstration is completed and the process proceeds to the symbol demonstration, as shown in FIG. 44 (h), the display for promoting the passing of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, superimposed on the display of the symbol demonstration. Is done. In the present embodiment, if a transition from the animation demonstration to the symbol demonstration is made after monitoring the passage of the game ball to the big hit occurrence gate 252, then the transition to the animation demonstration is not performed again. Alternatively, the program may shift to an animation demo. In addition, when a transition from the anime demonstration to the symbol demonstration is performed after the big hit start production period has started, the transition to the animation demonstration may not be performed again. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (i), the big hit game starts as shown in FIG. 44 (j), the first round starts, and the second variable winning opening 235a (or the first variable winning opening 234a) is opened.

  As described above, in this effect example, in the normal gaming state, even when the big hit occurs in the special figure 2, the display for promoting the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 may not be displayed. .

  FIG. 45 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device, and shows an example of an effect in which a transition to a menu screen (setting screen) is possible and a transition is restricted during execution of a standby effect. FIG. 43, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45A, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 45 (a), the special figure 1 is in a state of being stopped and displayed, while the special figure 2 is in a symbol fluctuating display, and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the reserved number display area 284, "x" is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 to indicate that, and in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2, the symbol change is being displayed. “-” Is blinking. The symbol change display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol change display that becomes a big hit.

  Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 45A is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the left of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 45A, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 2. Further, in this effect example, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is not performed, and the symbol demonstration is performed as the standby effect because the symbol is in the standby state.

  In this state, when the player operates the effect button 136 (or the operation key unit 190) at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (b), a menu screen (setting screen) is displayed as shown in FIG. 45 (c). In some cases. On the menu screen, “member registration”, “password input”, “passcode issuance”, “volume / brightness setting”, and “setting suggestion setting” can be performed. Thereafter, the operation key unit 190 is operated by the player, and “end” is selected by the cursor as shown in FIG. 45 (d), and when it is determined, the symbol demonstration is again performed as shown in FIG. 45 (e). Return to It should be noted that while the setting operation is being performed on the menu screen, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the symbol demonstration, the symbol change time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (f), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol (for example, “special figure b”). It is shown. In accordance with this, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. However, since the symbol demonstration is still being performed, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the big hit has occurred in the special figure 2. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the big hit start wait time is set, and time measurement is started. As shown in FIG. 45 (g), the big hit start effect corresponding to the set big hit start wait time is performed. Is performed, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the symbol demonstration is still ongoing.

  When the jackpot start wait time has elapsed and the game ball is monitored for passing to the jackpot generation gate 252, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The character "Right-hand and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which the display for promoting the passage of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is being performed over the display of the symbol demonstration.

  In the present embodiment, when the condition device is activated as described above after the symbol display time has elapsed, the display of the menu screen is restricted, and the effect button 136 (or the operation key unit 190) is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Even if is operated, the symbol demonstration is continuously performed as shown in FIG. 45 (j), and the menu screen is not displayed.

  As described above, in this effect example, there is shown a case where the menu screen can be displayed even in the standby state, and a case where the display of the menu screen is restricted in some cases.

  FIG. 46 (1a) to FIG. 46 (e) are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a case where the special figure 2 has a small hit during the execution of the standby effect, in a stepwise manner. In FIG. 46, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (1a), the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 46 (1a), the special figure 1 is in a state of being stopped and displayed, while the special figure 2 is in a symbol change display, and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the reserved number display area 284, "x" is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 to indicate that, and in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2, the symbol change is being displayed. “-” Is blinking. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 being executed is a symbol variation display that results in a small hit.

  Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 46 (1a) is the normal game state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the left of the variable icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (1a), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 2. Further, in this effect example, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is not performed, and the symbol demonstration is performed as the standby effect because the symbol is in the standby state.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the symbol demonstration, the symbol change time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (1b), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol (for example, “special figure g”). The situation is shown. In accordance with this, “△” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. However, since the symbol demonstration is still being performed, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the small hit has occurred in the special figure 2. Thereafter, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, as shown in FIG. 46 (1c), the small hit game is started. Then, in the present embodiment, during the small hit game, when the effect button 136 (or the operation key unit 190) is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (1d), as shown in FIG. The menu screen is displayed even during the hit game. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the condition device is activated due to a big hit, the display of the menu screen is restricted even in the standby state, but in the small hit game state, the standby effect (symbol demonstration, animation demonstration) is executed. A state in which a menu screen can be displayed by operating the effect button 136 or the like during the operation is shown. In the present embodiment, the display of the menu screen is permitted during the small hit game, but the display of the menu screen may be limited during the small hit game.

  FIG. 46 (2a) to FIG. 46 (2h) show, in a step-by-step manner, an example of an effect when a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 during the production of the symbol demonstration in the probable change state (the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state). FIG. 42, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  FIG. 46 (2a) shows a state in which only the special figure 1 is performing the symbol variation display in the probability variation state. In the probable change state, unlike the normal gaming state or the electric support state, the decorative display is displayed in a fluctuating manner in accordance with the design fluctuating display of the special figure 2. Not done, symbol demonstration is being done.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (2a), the total acquisition prize in which the character “during small hit RUSH” indicating that it is during the small hit RUSH (that is, during the probability change state) is displayed as “0480 pt”. It is displayed above the display of the number of balls. Also, a mini symbol and a right-handed display for instructing right-handedness are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 46 (2a) is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, the designation of the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of reserved icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (2a), since there is no symbol change display which is suspended in the special figure 2, no pending icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and Since the symbol variation display of FIG. 2 is not performed, the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 280 either. Also, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area of the special map 1. As described above, the control state (game state) in FIG. 46 (2a) is a probable change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state). This is for performing the variable display of many times.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (2b), a state is shown in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a non-designated pattern (“special figure C”). In accordance with this, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, "x" indicating that the display has been stopped and displayed with a lost symbol is displayed. On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display has not been started yet, and the symbol demo in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the combination of the decorative symbols out of "decoration 6-decoration 3-decoration 8" is continuously performed. I have.

  Thereafter, one symbol change display of the special figure 1 which has been held is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (2c) shows that the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started. I have. The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. In this effect example, after the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, no warning display regarding the big hit is performed, but the warning display may be performed.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the symbol demonstration, the symbol change time of the special figure 1 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (2d), the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol (for example, “special figure B”). It is shown. In accordance with this, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284. However, since the symbol demonstration is still being performed, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the big hit has occurred in the special figure 1. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 elapses, the big hit start wait time is set, and the timer starts. However, as shown in FIG. 46 (2e), the big hit start effect corresponding to the set big hit start wait time. , The symbol demonstration is still ongoing.

  When the jackpot start wait time has elapsed and the game ball is monitored for passing to the jackpot generation gate 252, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (2f) overlaps the symbol demo display and displays the lower part of the display screen. The character "Right-hand and pass through the jackpot generation gate!" Is displayed. That is, a state is shown in which the display for promoting the passage of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is being performed over the display of the symbol demonstration. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (2g), the big hit game starts as shown in FIG. 46 (2h), the first round starts and the first variable winning opening 234a (or the second variable winning opening 235a) is opened.

  As described above, in this effect example, if a big hit occurs in the symbol change display of the special figure 1 which is not the target of the effect display during the execution of the symbol demonstration in the probable change state, the symbol demonstration is not performed without the big hit start effect. There is a case where a display that promotes the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed on top of the display.

  FIG. 47 is an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect performed until the big hit game starts. 47, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (a), the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is being executed, but the second special figure display device 214 has stopped displaying the non-design, and the symbol change of the special figure 1 has been stopped. The display is a symbol change display that becomes a big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (a), the decorative symbol is varied according to the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Also, in the state shown in FIG. 47A, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is performed, but the symbol stop display is being performed in the special figure 2, so that the fourth symbol in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the reserved number display area 284, as shown to that effect, in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1, a blinking “−” indicating the change is displayed, and the symbol change notification of the special figure 2 is performed. In the area, “X” indicating that the missing symbol is stopped is displayed.

  Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 47 is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is located on the left of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284.

  In FIG. 47 (a), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and both of the three reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode). Further, since the number of holdings in the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is two, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / number of holdings display area 284 is “2”. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is not suspended, and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 is “0”.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display progresses, and as a result, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the big hit symbol is displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 4- The display is stopped at the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4". Then, after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 1 has passed, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the big hit start effect is performed until the big hit start wait time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. Will be At the same time as the start of the big hit start effect, a right-handed display is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The jackpot start wait time has elapsed, and the state of monitoring the passage of the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252 is monitored. As shown in FIG. 47 (d), "waiting for jackpot!" Is displayed, and a gate entry standby effect in which the character “!” Is displayed is started, and the player is prompted to pass the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. However, the player continues left-handing against the right-handing instruction, and when the game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in (), a warning announcement (warning notification) of “Please right-click!” Is output from the speaker 120 during the execution of the gate entry standby effect. The means for issuing a warning is not limited to audio output, and may be performed by display or by a lamp.

  Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (g), the big hit game starts as shown in FIG. 47 (h), the first round starts, and the first variable winning opening is started. 234a (or the second variable winning opening 235a) is opened.

  FIG. 48 is an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect performed until the big hit game starts in the probable change state. 48, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48A, 35 small hits and big hits including the first big hit have occurred, and the character “35th” is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The number of consecutive chan is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a), a state in which the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is performed in the certainty change state is shown. On the other hand, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is not performed, and there is no held symbol change display. In the probable change state, different from the normal game state or the electric support state, the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is performed in accordance with the symbol fluctuating display of the special figure 2.

  Also, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (a), the character "during small hitting RUSH" indicating that it is in a probable change state is displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen, and below it. "12215pt" is displayed as the total winning prize ball number display, and 12215 prize balls are obtained by winning from the first big hit to the variable winning opening (first variable winning opening 234a, second variable winning opening 235a). Is shown.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 280 appears at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 48 is a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probable change state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the normal gaming state, the reservation icon display area of the special figure 1 is omitted, but the reservation icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided.

  In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is represented by the number of reserved icons of Toku-zu 2 in addition to the number of lights of the Toku-zu 2 holding lamp 220 and the numerical value shown in the reserved-number display area of Toku-zu 2. The number of reservations is represented by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 reservation lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. In addition, you may make it represent also by the number of reservation icons of special figure 1.

  In FIG. 48A, four reservation icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the reservation icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, and the four reservation icons h21, h21, and h21 of the special figure 1 are displayed. h22, h23, and h24 are all displayed in a default display mode (a round, plain, white display mode). On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area of the special map 1. Further, since the number of holdings in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is four, the number of holdings of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / number of holdings display area 284 is “4”. On the other hand, there is no hold of the symbol change display of the special figure 1, and the number-of-holds display of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is “0”.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display progresses, and as a result, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the big hit symbol is displayed on the second special figure display device 214, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays "decoration 3- The display is stopped at the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 3−decoration 3” with the 10R sure-change jackpot determined. Then, after the symbol display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special figure 2 has passed, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), a big hit start effect (character of "big chance big hit") indicating that the certain variable big hit is confirmed Is displayed until the big hit start wait time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses.

  The jackpot start wait time has elapsed, and the state of monitoring the passage of the game ball to the jackpot occurrence gate 252 is monitored. As shown in FIG. 48 (d), "waiting for a large chance!" A gate entry standby effect in which the character "Let's pass through the gate!" Is displayed is started, and the player is prompted to pass the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252. In this effect example, since a big hit has occurred in the probable change state in which right-handing is performed, the player normally continues right-handing. Therefore, after the state of monitoring the passage of the game ball to the big hit generation gate 252, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), before passing through the big hit generation gate 252, the second special figure starting port 232 is started. The game ball may win. However, since such an event is a normally conceivable event in a state where right-handed driving is continuously performed, no warning notification is particularly performed as shown in FIG. 48 (f). In such a case, a warning may be issued.

  Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (g), the big hit game starts as shown in FIG. 48 (h), the first round starts, and the second variable winning opening 235a (or the first variable winning opening 234a) is opened.

  FIG. 49 is an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device, in a case where a power interruption / recovery occurs in a state where a display promoting the passage of the big hit occurrence gate is displayed during the symbol demonstration. It is a figure which shows the production example of step by step. 49, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49A, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 49A, the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol during the execution of the symbol demonstration, and after the big hit start effect period has elapsed, the state is the gate entry waiting state. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (a), the character "Right-click and let through the big hit generation gate!" Is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, superimposed on the symbol demo display. That is, a state is shown in which the display for promoting the passage of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is being performed over the display of the symbol demonstration. In addition, in the special figure 1, it is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol. Also, in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284 at the upper right corner of the display screen, since the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed with a missing symbol, “x” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1. Since the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, “○” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2.

  Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 49A is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the left side of the fluctuating icon display area 280. A display area 281 is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. At the timing shown in FIG. 49A, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 2.

  Thereafter, for example, due to a power outage of the game store due to the influence of lightning, etc., a power interruption occurs in the pachinko machine 100 at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (b), and thereafter, when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 49 (c). Then, the pachinko machine 100 is backed up. At this time, the power recovery command and the firing position command are transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 responds to these commands according to the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. At 208, a so-called first appearance in the morning of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1" is displayed, and a right-handed display is displayed. In addition, the power restoration command also includes the number of symbol change displays suspended in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and in the fourth symbol / suspension number display area 284, the number of reserved figures of the special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, the hold number display before the power interruption occurs is displayed in the hold number display of FIG. In addition, since the power restoration command does not include information indicating that the passing of the game ball to the jackpot generation gate 252 is monitored, the passing of the jackpot generation gate 252 displayed before the power failure is performed. The display that promotes is hidden.

  When such a situation occurs, the player may not notice that the player should right-hand due to the occurrence of a power cut or power recovery. However, in the first sub-control unit 400, since it is known from the firing position command transmitted at the time of power restoration that the player should right-hand, left-handing is continuously performed by the player, and FIG. When the game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 at the timing shown in ()), as shown in FIG. 49 (e), during the symbol demonstration, "Please hit right" from the speaker 120! Is output. This may cause the player to notice that it is necessary to make a right-hand. Thereafter, when the game ball passes through the big hit generation gate 252 at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (f), the big hit game starts as shown in FIG. 49 (g), the first round starts, and the first variable winning opening 234a (or the second variable winning opening 235a) is opened.

  As described above, in this effect example, if the power interruption / recovery occurs while the display for promoting the passage of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is displayed during the execution of the symbol demonstration, the symbol demonstration restarts, but the big hit occurs. The display for facilitating the passage through the gate 252 is not displayed, and in this state, if left-handed driving is continued, a warning may be displayed.

  FIG. 50 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative design display device, and is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of an effect when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the effect of the animation demonstration which is a standby effect. . 50, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 50A, the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is being executed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a symbol variation display in which a small hit is achieved. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (a), the decorative symbol is varied according to the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Also, in the state shown in FIG. 50 (a), since the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, the fourth symbol / reservation number in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the display area 284, to indicate this, blinking of “−” indicating that the symbol is being changed is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2.

  Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 50 is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is located on the left of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 50A, there is no suspension of the symbol change display of the special figure 1, so that the reservation icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed in the reservation icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. On the other hand, there are two holdings of the symbol change display of the special figure 2, and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is "2".

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (b), the display is stopped at the combination of the decorative symbols out of "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the player is notified that it is out of alignment. . On the other hand, in the special figure 2, the symbol variation display is still performed, but in the normal gaming state, the effect display corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is not performed.

  A shifted symbol is displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and when the symbol display time of the special figure 1 (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Symbol demonstration is started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of the symbol demo, the display is switched from the symbol demo to the animation demo as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the animation demonstration, the symbol change time of the special figure 2 elapses, and at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (e), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol (for example, “special figure g”). It is shown. In accordance with this, “△” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. However, since the animation demonstration is still being performed, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the small hit has occurred in the special figure 2. Thereafter, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, as shown in FIG. 50 (f), the small hit game is started, but in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation demonstration is continuously executed, and the right-handed driving is performed. The display is superimposed on the display of the animation demo.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the small hit game executed due to the occurrence of the small hit in the special figure 2, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, so for example, the timing shown in FIG. When the player wins the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, a winning winning sound is output from the speaker 120 as shown in FIG. 50 (h). Not started. In Toku-zu 1, a winning / non-prize judgment is made by winning a game ball to the first toku-zu start port (upper) 230, and the symbol change display of Toku-zu 1 is started. Will be interrupted.

  Thereafter, when the small hit game ends during the execution of the animation demonstration, as shown in FIG. 50 (i), the symbol change display of the special figure 2 based on the reservation starts, and the symbol change of the special figure 1 which has been interrupted. Display resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the animation demonstration is switched to the decorative symbol variable display, and the variable icon display area 280 displays the variable icon h0. In addition, regarding the icon displayed based on the winning in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 during the small hit game, the holding icon is displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 and then the variable icon display area is displayed. An animation may be performed at 280 in which the suspension icon moves and becomes a fluctuating icon. In the present embodiment, an example is described in which one game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 while the small hit game is being performed during the execution of the animation demonstration. In the case where the small hitting game is being performed, if two or more game balls win the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, the first and subsequent special figure starting port (upper) 230 The symbol change display corresponding to the winning game ball is suspended. Further, in the present embodiment, if one game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 while the small hit game is being performed during the execution of the animation demonstration, the special figure 1 Although the example in which the symbol variation display starts and is immediately interrupted has been described, the symbol variation display may not be started and may be suspended.

  In this manner, in this demonstration example, when a small hit game occurs during the execution of the animation demo, the animation demonstration continues during the small hit game, and the special game is performed during the small hit game during the animation demonstration. Even if a game ball wins at the starting port according to FIG. 1, the animation demonstration is continued without starting the display of the variation of the decorative pattern. In this case, the icon (variable icon) relating to the winning of the game ball on the special figure 1 is displayed. -Hold icon) is displayed, and the icon is displayed after the small hit game is over.

  FIG. 51 is an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing step by step another example of an effect when a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 during the effect of the animation demonstration as a standby effect. It is. 51, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted. The effects shown in FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (h) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (h), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, if the execution time of the animation demonstration has elapsed but the small hit game is still being executed, the animation demonstration ends and the process shifts to the symbol demonstration, as shown in FIG. 51 (i). Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, but the decorative symbol is displayed in the symbol demo that was executed before shifting to the animation demo. In this case, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns out of the "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1".

  Thereafter, when the small hitting game ends during the execution of the symbol demonstration, as shown in FIG. 51 (j), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 based on the reservation starts, and the symbol variation of the special figure 1 which has been interrupted. Display resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to change the change icon. h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In addition, regarding the icon displayed based on the winning in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 during the small hit game, the holding icon is displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 and then the variable icon display area is displayed. At 280, an animation is performed in which the hold icon moves and becomes a fluctuating icon. When the animation demo is shifted to the symbol demo, the animation is displayed based on the winning in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230. The icon to be performed may be displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 280 as the fluctuating icon h0.

  In this manner, in this demonstration example, when a small hit game occurs during the execution of the animation demo, the animation demonstration continues during the small hit game, and the special game is performed during the small hit game during the animation demonstration. Even if a game ball wins at the starting port according to FIG. 1, the animation demonstration is continued without starting the display of the variation of the decorative pattern. In this case, the icon (variable icon) relating to the winning of the game ball on the special figure 1 is displayed. (Hold icon) is not displayed, and thereafter, the icon is displayed when the mode is shifted from the animation demonstration to the symbol demonstration before the small hit game ends.

  FIG. 52 is an example of an effect centered on the decorative design display device, and shows an example of an effect in which a game ball is awarded to the first special figure starting port during the effect of the animation demonstration as a standby effect, in a stepwise manner. FIG. 52, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted. Also, the effects shown in FIGS. 52 (a) to (e) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 41 (a) to (e), and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 (d) to (e), when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 during the animation demonstration, as shown in FIG. 52 (f), “Pokko! Is output from the speaker 120, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. The starting winning sound output at this time is a starting winning sound corresponding to the stage before the transition to the animation demo, and in this production example, the starting winning sound corresponding to the default stage in which the normal background is displayed is output. Have been. In this effect example, a plurality of effect stages are prepared, and a state is shown in which, when a start prize is won, a start prize sound is output according to the effect stage that has shifted. In stage A where a background different from the normal background is displayed, when a start winning is achieved, a start winning sound “Pong!” Is output from the speaker 120 as shown in FIG. In some cases, it is possible to make the player recognize the current stage by making it different from the start winning sound output in. In a stage B different from the stage A, when a start prize is won, as shown in FIG. 52 (f ″), a start prize sound “pin!” Is output from the speaker 120, which is different from the default stage and the stage A. By outputting the start winning sound, the player may be able to recognize the current stage. In addition, regardless of the production stage before shifting to the animation demonstration, if there is a start prize during the animation demonstration, a start prize sound corresponding to the default stage may be output.

  FIG. 53 is an example of an effect centering on a decorative symbol display device, and is a step-by-step example of another effect in the case where a game ball is awarded to the first special figure starting port during the animation demonstration as a standby effect. FIG. 52, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 53 (a), the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is being executed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a symbol variation display in which the small hit is achieved. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure 1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 53 (a), since the symbol variation display of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, the fourth symbol / reservation number in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the display area 284, to indicate this, blinking of “−” indicating that the symbol is being changed is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of the special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2.

  Further, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 53 is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is located to the left of the variable icon display area 280. Is provided.

  In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is indicated by the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 reservation lamp 218, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 in the fourth symbol / reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons in Toku-zu 1. The reserved number of the special figure 2 is represented by the lighting number of the special figure 2 retaining lamp 220 and the reserved number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 53 (a), there is no suspension of the symbol change display of the special figure 1, and thus the reservation icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed in the reservation icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. On the other hand, there are two holdings of the symbol change display of the special figure 2, and the holding number display of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / hold number display area 284 is "2".

  Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), a state is shown in which a transition is made to "stage A" different from the default stage in which the normal background is displayed. In “Stage A”, at least the effect contents in the symbol variation display are different from the default stage, and in some cases, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of game characteristics. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 53 (b) to (g) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 53 (b) to (g) are the same as those in FIGS. 51 (b) to (g) except that the stage is “Stage A”, and therefore the description is omitted. I do.

  In this effect example, when the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 is subsequently won at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (g), a starting winning sound is output from the speaker 120 as shown in FIG. 53 (h). However, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not start the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the present embodiment, the start winning sound corresponding to the stage A is output instead of the starting winning sound corresponding to the default stage. That is, in this production example, if a small hit according to Tokuzu 2 occurs during the animation demonstration, and if a prize is given to the starting port of Tokuzu 1 during the small hit game relating to the small hit, the animation demonstration is performed. A state in which a start winning sound corresponding to the stage before the transition is output is shown.

  Thereafter, when the small hit game ends during the execution of the animation demo, as shown in FIG. 53 (i), the symbol change display of the special figure 2 based on the reservation starts and the symbol change of the special figure 1 which has been interrupted. Display resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the animation demonstration is switched to the decorative symbol variable display, and the variable icon display area 280 displays the variable icon h0.

  FIG. 54 is an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device, and shows an example of an effect in which a game ball is awarded to the first special figure starting port during the effect of the symbol demonstration, which is a standby effect, in a stepwise manner. FIG. 54, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted. Also, the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (a) to (c) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (c), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, during the execution of the symbol demonstration, the symbol change time of the special figure 2 has elapsed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (d), the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol (for example, “special figure g”). It is shown. In accordance with this, “△” is displayed in the symbol change notification area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol / reserved number display area 284. However, since the symbol demonstration is still being performed, it may be difficult for the player to notice that the small hit has occurred in the special figure 2. After that, when the symbol display time of the special figure 2 elapses, the small hit game is started as shown in FIG. 54 (e), but the symbol design is continuously executed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right-handed driving is performed. The display is superimposed on the symbol demo display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the small hit game executed due to the occurrence of the small hit in the special figure 2, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, and therefore, for example, the timing shown in FIG. When the player wins the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, as shown in FIG. 54 (g), a starting prize sound (default starting prize sound) is output from the speaker 120, and the hold icon display of the special figure 1 is displayed. One hold icon h11 is displayed in the area 281, but the decorative symbol display device 208 does not start the variable display of the decorative symbol. In Toku-zu 1, a winning / non-prize judgment is made by winning a game ball to the first toku-zu start port (upper) 230, and the symbol change display of Toku-zu 1 is started. Will be interrupted.

  Thereafter, when the small hitting game ends during the execution of the symbol demonstration, as shown in FIG. 54 (h), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 based on the reservation starts, and the symbol variation of the special figure 1 which has been interrupted. Display resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to change the change icon. h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  As described above, in this effect example, when a small hit game occurs during the execution of the symbol demonstration, the symbol demonstration continues even during the small hit game, and is performed during the small hit game during the symbol demonstration. Even if a game ball wins in the starting port according to FIG. 1, the symbol display is not continued to be displayed and the symbol demonstration is further continued. In addition, during the small hit game during the symbol demonstration, when a game ball wins at the starting port of the special figure 1, an icon (fluctuation icon / hold icon) relating to the starting winning is displayed. I have.

  FIG. 55 is an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device, and is a diagram showing an example of an effect of a one-shot announcement notice effect in a stepwise manner. 55, only the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, and the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the ordinary symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, and the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220 , And the general-purpose holding lamp 216 are omitted. The effects shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to (c) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to (c), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  In this state, “member registration”, “password input”, “passcode issuance”, “volume / brightness setting”, and “setting suggestion setting” can be performed on the menu screen shown in FIG. Thereafter, the operation key unit 190 is operated by the player, and “setting suggestion setting” is selected by the cursor as shown in FIG. 55 (d). When the setting is determined, the setting is made as shown in FIG. 55 (e). Move to suggestion setting screen. On the setting suggestion setting screen, setting of the setting suggestion mode and setting of the one-shot notification mode can be performed. In the setting suggestion mode setting, a setting suggestion mode such as the appearance frequency of the above-described setting suggestion effect and the reliability at the time of appearance can be set. In the one-shot notification mode setting, when the jackpot random number value extracted at the time of the start winning is a big hit, whether to enable the one-shot notification mode for executing a one-shot notification effect for notifying the player of that fact It can be set about whether or not. Note that the item for which the one-shot notification mode can be set is not limited to this, and an appropriate item can be set.

  In the setting suggestion setting screen shown in FIG. 55 (e), when the operation key unit 190 is operated by the player and “one-shot notification mode setting” is selected and determined by the cursor, as shown in FIG. 55 (f). Then, the screen shifts to the one-shot notification mode setting screen. On the one-shot notification mode setting screen, ON / OFF of the one-shot notification mode can be set. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 55 (f), a state in which “one-shot notification ON” is selected by the cursor and determined is shown.

  FIG. 55 (g) shows a state in which the menu screen has been terminated and switched to the symbol demonstration. After that, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, as shown in FIG. 55 (h), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 starts, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol. Is displayed. Then, after two “decorations 4” are reached in the manner shown in FIGS. 21 (k) to (o), the reach is reached, and then the process proceeds to the SP reach as shown in FIG. 55 (i). At this time, the icons related to the symbol change display (change icons, hold icons) have been deleted. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (j), when it is determined that the game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 and the big random number value extracted with the winning is a big hit, As shown in FIG. 55 (k), a start winning prize sound “Cuin!” Is output from the speaker 120. That is, a state in which a one-shot notification effect is performed by outputting a winning sound is shown. The one-shot notification effect is not limited to sound output, but may be, for example, a notification in the form of light emission by various lamps 442 and 452, or the display of the one-shot notification in the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Or a combination of two or more of these.

  As described above, in this effect example, for example, when the icon related to the symbol variation display such as SP reach is not displayed, there is a case where a single announcement is made when a start winning is made. ing.

  In the present embodiment, when the small hit game during the animation demonstration is being executed, if the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 is won, the big random number value extracted with the winning is a big hit. Even if it is determined to be a one-shot effect, the one-shot notification effect is not performed, but may be performed.

In the above description,
“Production means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of executing a plurality of productions,
A plurality of game ball detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed,
A gaming table with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
When the setting change operation is received, at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected. [For example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 7, the setting is changed. By pressing the change button 194, any one of a plurality of settings can be set, etc.],
One game ball detecting means of the plurality of game ball detecting means is an out ball detecting means [for example, an out ball detecting sensor SWout or the like],
The out ball detecting means is means for detecting at least a game ball that has entered an out port [for example, the out port 240 or the like],
One of the plurality of effects is a first setting suggestion effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), a character of Gol who opens a shoji and smokes a cigarette with a balloon of “high setting!” GLG appears, a production that at least suggests to the player that the setting is high, etc.]
The first setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a setting selected from the plurality of settings [for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (1e), the shoji opens and “high setting!” The first setting suggestion that the GLG character GLG that smokes tobacco together with the balloon appears, suggesting that the setting is 4 or more],
The first setting suggestion effect is started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied,
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is satisfied at least in association with the detection result of the out ball detection means [for example, in step S501 in FIG. 15, a game ball passes through at least the out ball detection sensor SWout. When the setting suggestion point (P) to be counted becomes 3000 or more and the winning is performed in the suggestion effect execution lottery, the condition is satisfied, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing effects other than the plurality of effects. In addition, the effect means may always execute a plurality of effects, or may not execute the plurality of effects.

  Further, the plurality of game ball detecting means may detect only that the game ball has passed, or may detect something other than the game ball having passed. In addition, the plurality of game ball detection means may always detect that a game ball has passed, or may not detect that a game ball has passed.

  Further, when the setting change operation is received, only one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected, or when the setting change operation is received, at least the jackpot probability is different. A setting other than any one of the settings may be selected. Further, when a setting change operation is received, any one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be always selected, or when a setting change operation is received, at least the jackpot probability is different. In some cases, one of the settings may not be selected.

  In addition, when a setting change operation is received, any one of a plurality of settings that differ only in the jackpot probability may be selected, or when a setting change operation is received, a probability other than the jackpot probability may be selected. Any one of a plurality of different settings may be selected.

  Also, only when the setting change operation is received, at least one of the plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities may be selected, or at least when the setting change operation is not received, at least. Any one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected.

  Further, the out ball detecting means may detect only game balls that have entered the out mouth, or may detect game balls other than game balls that have entered the out mouth. Further, the out ball detecting means may always detect a game ball that has entered the out port, or may not detect a game ball that has entered the out port.

  In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may indicate only the setting selected from the plurality of settings, or may indicate the setting other than the selected setting among the plurality of settings. It may be. In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may be one that necessarily suggests a selected setting among a plurality of settings, or may not suggest a selected setting among a plurality of settings. There may be.

  Further, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. May also be started. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the first setting suggestion effect is not started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. There may be cases.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started other than when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. The production may be started.

  Further, the first effect execution condition may be satisfied only in relation to the detection result of the out-ball detection means, or may be satisfied in relation to a result other than the detection result of the out-ball detection means. It may be. Further, the first effect execution condition may be always satisfied in relation to the detection result of the out ball detection means, or may not be satisfied in relation to the detection result of the out ball detection means. There may be.

In addition, “the control means [for example, the main control unit 300 or the like] capable of starting one of the plurality of game states,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state) or the like],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probable change state (a special figure high probability general figure low probability state), a power support state (a special figure low probability state). State high probability state), etc.]
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The first setting suggestion effect may be started in the first game state,
In the second game state, the first setting suggestion effect may be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the control means may be capable of starting only one of the plurality of game states, or may be capable of starting a game state other than the one of the plurality of game states. There may be. Further, the control means may always start one of the plurality of game states, or may not start one of the plurality of game states.

  The control means may be capable of starting only the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be capable of starting a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. You may. Further, the control means may always start the first game state and the second game state, or may not start the first game state and the second game state.

  Further, the second gaming state may be a gaming state that is always more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state that may be more disadvantageous than the first gaming state.

  Further, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the first game state, or an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the first game state. Is also good. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be always started in the first game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be started in the first game state.

  Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only in the first game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started in a game state other than the first game state. There may be.

  Also, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the second game state, or an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the second game state. Is also good. Further, the first setting suggestion effect may always be started in the second game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be started in the second game state.

  In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only in the second game state, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started in a game state other than the second game state. There may be.

Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started during a period in which the symbol variation display is not executed [for example, as shown in FIG. Production has started, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started during the period when the symbol change display is not executed, or the first setting suggestion effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started during the period when the symbol change display is not executed. The production may also be started. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started without fail during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed, or the first setting suggestion effect may not be started during the period when the symbol variation display is not executed. Is also good.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only during a period in which the symbol variation display is not performed, or the first setting suggestion may be performed in a period other than the period in which the symbol variation display is not performed. The production may be started in some cases.

Also, one of the plurality of game ball detection means is a game ball detection means is a first game ball detection means,
The first game ball detecting means is provided in a certain area [for example, a first variable winning opening 234a, a second variable winning opening 235a, a first special figure starting port (upper) 230, a first special figure starting port, or the like. (Lower) 231, the second special figure starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, the big hit generating gate 252, etc.].
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is established in relation to the detection result of the first game ball detection means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first game ball detecting means may detect only game balls that have entered a certain area, or may also detect game balls that have entered a region other than a certain area. Is also good. Further, the first game ball detecting means may be one that always detects a game ball that has entered a certain area, or may be one that does not always detect a game ball that has entered a certain area. Good.

  In addition, the first effect execution condition may be established only in relation to the detection result of the first game ball detection means, or may be a result other than the detection result of the first game ball detection means May also be established in connection with this. Further, the first effect execution condition may be established in connection with the detection result of the first game ball detecting means, or may be satisfied with the detection result of the first game ball detecting means. May not be established.

Also, there is a case where the first setting suggestion effect is started at a first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied [for example, as shown in FIG. At the point when the first setting suggestion effect is being performed, etc.),
When the first effect execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at a second timing [for example, as shown in FIG. If the reach is in progress, the first setting suggestion effect is executed after the SP reach is finished, etc.],
The first timing and the second timing are different timings,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing, or the first effect effect condition may be started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. An effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started at one timing. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. One setting suggestion effect may not be started.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only at the first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the first setting suggestion effect may be started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. The first setting suggestion effect may be started at a timing other than the timing of the first setting. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or in a case other than when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the first timing.

  Further, only the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the second effect may be performed when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. At the same time, an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the second setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. One setting suggestion effect may not be started.

  Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only at the second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied, or the second effect may be started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied. The first setting suggestion effect may be started at a timing other than the timing of the first setting. In addition, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing only when the first effect condition is satisfied, or when the first effect condition is not satisfied. Also, the first setting suggestion effect may be started at the second timing.

  Further, the first timing and the second timing may be partially different timings, or the first timing and the second timing may be entirely different timings.

Also, “one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect [for example, a display of the Sabohani group shown in FIG. 26 (1a)],
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect or the like],
In some cases, both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (1a), display of a Sabohani group and first setting suggestion effect And so on are performed at the same time],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second setting suggestion effect may be started only during execution of a certain effect, or may be started during execution of an effect other than a certain effect. It may be something. In addition, the second setting suggestion effect may be always started during execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during execution of a certain effect.

  In addition, there may be a case where only both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed, or other than both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. May also be in a state where the effect is also being executed. Further, both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect may be in a state where both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed. There may be cases where there is no state.

In addition, “one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect [for example, a display of a Sabohani group shown in FIG. 26 (2a)].
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect or the like],
During the period when the second setting suggestion effect is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain period [for example, a period during which the big hit end effect is executed]”), the first effect execution condition is set. If it is established, the first setting suggestion effect is started after the certain period has elapsed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 26 (2a) to (2b), a big hit end effect is executed. Execution of the first setting suggestion effect is not started in the period during which the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is started after the big hit end effect ends, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second setting suggestion effect may be started only during execution of a certain effect, or may be started other than during execution of a certain effect. There may be. In addition, the second setting suggestion effect may be always started during execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during execution of a certain effect.

  If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a certain period (a period during which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed), the first setting suggestion effect is provided after the certain period has elapsed. May be started, or if the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, an effect other than the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period has elapsed. When the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period has elapsed, or the first effect may be performed in a certain period. When the execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may not be started after the certain period has elapsed.

  Further, when the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be started only after the certain period has elapsed, or the first effect may be started in a certain period. When the execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started even after the certain period has elapsed. Further, only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied in a certain period, the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period has elapsed, or the first effect may be started in a certain period. Even in cases other than when the execution condition is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be started after the certain period has elapsed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect [for example, a display of a Sabohani group shown in FIG. 26 (2a)].
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect that may be started during execution of a certain effect [for example, a jackpot end effect or the like],
If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed (for example, a period in which the big hit end effect is executed), the first setting suggestion may be performed. Direction does not start,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second setting suggestion effect may be started only during execution of a certain effect, or may be started during execution of an effect other than a certain effect. It may be something. In addition, the second setting suggestion effect may be always started during execution of a certain effect, or may not be started during execution of a certain effect.

  In addition, if the first performance execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, only the first setting suggestion effect may not be started, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the suggested effect is being executed, an effect other than the first setting suggested effect may not be started. In addition, if the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not necessarily be started, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the suggestion effect is being executed, the first setting suggestion effect may be started.

  Further, only when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect is being executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not be started, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. The first setting suggestion effect does not have to be started even when the first effect execution condition is not satisfied during a certain period when the suggestion effect is being executed. In addition, when the first performance suggestion condition is satisfied only during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, the first setting suggestion effect may not be started, and the second setting suggestion effect may not be started. The first setting suggestion effect may not be started even when the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period other than the period in which the suggestion effect is sometimes executed.

In addition, it is provided with “achievement suggesting means [for example, display by a point gauge PTG shown in FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the achievement degree suggesting means may indicate only the degree of achievement of the first effect execution condition, or may indicate a degree other than the degree of achievement of the first effect execution condition. Further, the achievement level suggesting means may be a means that always suggests the degree of achievement of the first effect execution condition, or may be one that does not always suggest the degree of achievement of the first effect execution condition. .

In the above description,
"A gaming table provided with effect means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a plurality of effects,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
When the setting change operation is received, at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected. [For example, in the setting change process (step S117) of the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 7, the setting is changed. By pressing the change button 194, any one of a plurality of settings can be set, etc.],
One of the plurality of effects is a first notification effect [for example, a drill number display image shown in FIG. 28 (1b)].
The first notification effect is an effect including at least information on the game (for example, display of the total number of winning prize balls from the first jackpot).
The first notification effect is an effect that may include a suggestion regarding a setting selected from the plurality of settings. [For example, the character “4560pt Get !!” shown in FIG. The display of the number-of-cuts display image including the number indicates that the setting is 4 or more.]
The first notification effect is an effect that may not include a suggestion regarding a setting selected from the plurality of settings [for example, the characters “2000 pt get!” Shown in FIG. 28 (2b). , The total number of winning prize balls is made more prominent, but no suggestion of the setting is made.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Also, according to this gaming table, the first notification effect may include a setting suggestion, and the first notification effect may be noticed in some cases.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may be one that does not always execute the plurality of effects.

  Further, when the setting change operation is received, only one of the plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected, or when the setting change operation is received, at least the jackpot probability is different. A setting other than any one of the settings may be selected. Further, when a setting change operation is received, any one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be always selected, or when a setting change operation is received, at least the jackpot probability is different. In some cases, one of the settings may not be selected.

  Further, when the setting change operation is received, any one of a plurality of settings having only the big hit probability may be selected, or when the setting change operation is received, the probability other than the big hit probability may be selected. Any one of a plurality of different settings may be selected. Also, only when the setting change operation is received, at least one of the plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities may be selected, or at least when the setting change operation is not received, at least. Any one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities may be selected.

  Further, the first notification effect may include only the notification regarding the game, or may include notification other than the notification regarding the game. In addition, the first notification effect may include information about a game, or may not include information about a game.

  In addition, the first notification effect may include only a suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or may include a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings. Some of them may be included. In addition, the first notification effect may include a hint regarding a selected setting among a plurality of settings, or may not include a hint regarding a selected setting among a plurality of settings. There may be something.

  Further, the first notification effect may be an effect that may not include only the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or may be other than the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings. The effect may not be included. In addition, the first notification effect may be an effect that does not necessarily include the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings, or may include the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings. There may be a certain production.

In addition, “the first notification effect is an effect that may be executed in a manner that can identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included. [For example, the display of the number of drills shown in FIG. 28 (2d)] The image is displayed when the total number of winning prize balls reaches 2000 or 3000, whereas the image is displayed when the total number of award balls is not the number of drills such as “4560pt Get !!”. Display indicates that it is a setting suggestion, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notification effect may be one that may be executed only in a manner that can identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included, or that the suggestion regarding the setting is included. It may be executed in a mode other than the identifiable mode. In addition, the first notification effect may be always executed in a mode in which it is possible to identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included, or may be a mode in which it is possible to identify that the suggestion regarding the setting is included. May not be executed.

  It should be noted that the first notification effect may not be able to identify that a suggestion regarding the setting is included. Further, the first notification effect executed at the first timing may include a suggestion regarding the setting.

Also, in the first case [for example, when the total number of acquired prize balls is 2000, etc.], the first notification effect which does not include the suggestion regarding the setting is started [for example, FIG. 28 (1b) As shown, a drill number display image of “2000 pt get!” Is displayed, etc.],
The first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is not started in the first case,
In the second case [for example, when the total number of acquired prize balls is 4560, etc.], the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started [for example, in FIG. 28 (2d). As shown, a drilling number display image including a setting suggestion of “4560 pt get!” Is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the suggestion of the setting can be expected depending on the timing at which the first notification effect is executed.

  Here, only the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the first case may be started, or the effect other than the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the first case may be started. May be started. In addition, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be always started in the first case, or the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may not start in the first case. There may be.

  In addition, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started only in the first case, or the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be performed in a case other than the first case. May be started.

  In addition, in the first case, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started, or in the first case, an effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting. May not be started. Also, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the first case may not necessarily be started, or the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started in the first case. May be the case.

  In addition, the first notification effect in which the suggestion regarding the setting is included only in the first case does not have to be started, and the first notification including the suggestion regarding the setting also in the case other than the first case. The production need not be started.

  In addition, in the second case, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or in the second case, the effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be included. May also be started. Also, in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be necessarily started, or in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. Is also good.

  In addition, the first notification effect in which the suggestion regarding the setting is included only in the second case may be started, or the first notification including the suggestion regarding the setting also in the case other than the second case. The production may be started in some cases. Also, in the second case, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be included. May be started.

Also, "the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case may not be started, or the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case. The production other than the above need not be started. Further, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case may not necessarily be started, or the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case may be performed. May be started.

  In addition, the first notification effect that does not include only the setting suggestion in the second case may not be started, and the first case that does not include the suggestion other than the setting suggestion in the second case. The notification effect does not have to be started. In addition, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting only in the second case may not be started, and the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting is also included in the case other than the second case. May not be started.

In addition, a certain condition [for example, winning in an execution lottery, being within a specific number of revolutions (for example, 30 revolutions) after the end of a big hit, being a specific day of the week, a condition set by a player, and the like] is The first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case that has been established is started,
Even in the second case, if the certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied may be started, or the suggestion regarding the setting may be included in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied. An effect other than the first notification effect to be performed may also be started. In addition, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied may be started, or the suggestion regarding the setting may be included in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied. The first notification effect may not be started.

  In addition, in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or in the second case where the certain condition is satisfied, the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. May also be started. Further, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started only in the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, or the setting may be performed in a case other than the second case where the certain condition is satisfied. A first notification effect including a suggestion may be started.

  Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting does not have to be started, and in the second case, When a certain condition is not satisfied, an effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting does not necessarily have to be started, and in the second case, When a certain condition is not satisfied, a first notification effect including a suggestion regarding the setting may be started.

  Further, even in the second case, if a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started, or the second case may be performed. If a certain condition is not satisfied, the first notification effect including the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started. Further, even in the second case, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may not be started only when a certain condition is not satisfied, or in the second case, The first notification effect including the suggestion about the setting may not be started in cases other than the case where the condition is not satisfied.

Also, "the first notification effect is an effect related to at least a jackpot [for example, the total number of winning prize balls, a re-drawing effect at the time of a jackpot, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notification effect may be related to only the big hit or may be related to other than the big hit. In addition, the first notification effect may always be related to the jackpot or may not be related to the jackpot.

In addition, in the first notification effect, a suggestion regarding the selected setting from among the plurality of settings is made by a display mode of numbers [for example, as shown in FIG. Setting suggestions by changing the display mode of the numbers in, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where a sense of incongruity is given by direct use of a timing or a number, and attention can be paid to a suggestion regarding setting.

  Here, in the first notification effect, only the indication regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be performed by the display mode of the numbers, or in the first notification effect, the display mode of the numbers may indicate the plurality of settings. Suggestions other than those related to the selected one of the settings may also be made. In addition, in the first notification effect, the indication regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be necessarily performed by the display mode of the numbers, or in the first notification effect, the plurality of settings may be performed by the display mode of the numbers. In some cases, no suggestion may be made regarding the selected setting.

  In addition, in the first notification effect, the suggestion regarding the selected setting among the plurality of settings may be performed only by the display mode of the numbers, or in the first notification effect, it may be more than the display mode of the numbers. Suggestions may be made regarding the selected setting from the plurality of settings. In addition, only in the first notification effect, the indication regarding the setting selected from the plurality of settings may be performed by the display mode of the numbers, or in the effect other than the first notification effect, the display mode of the numbers May suggest a setting selected from among the plurality of settings.

Also, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed differs depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings. , An execution lottery is performed based on the payout number setting suggestion effect selection table provided for each setting, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings, only the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is performed may be different, or depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings. The probability other than the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different. Also, depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different, or depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings, The probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may not be different.

  In addition, depending on the setting selected from the plurality of settings, the probability that only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be performed may be different, or by the setting selected from the plurality of settings, The probability that an effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different. Also, depending on the setting selected from among the plurality of settings, the probability that the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be performed may be different, or according to the setting selected from among the plurality of settings, The probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different.

  Further, only depending on the selected setting among the plurality of settings, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion about the setting is executed may be different, or the setting may be different from the setting other than the selected setting among the plurality of settings. Depending on the setting, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting is executed may be different.

In addition, “one of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect [for example, a re-lottery effect shown in FIG.
The re-lottery effect is an effect in which once the result of the jackpot is displayed in the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbol change display is restarted, and then the result of the jackpot is displayed again [for example, FIG. As shown in a) to (d) of the drawing, the re-lottery effect is temporarily stopped at the combination of the jackpot decoration patterns of “decoration 1−decoration 1−decoration 1”, and the decoration pattern is again displayed in a variable manner. Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7).
In the re-lottery effect, a jackpot result (hereinafter, referred to as “a large jackpot game” indicating that there is a possibility of being in a first advantageous state [for example, an electric support state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state or the like) after the end of the big hit game). First jackpot result [for example, a combination of a jackpot decoration pattern such as “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” that indicates that there is usually a possibility of a jackpot. ]] Is displayed once, and then becomes a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state [for example, a probable change state (a special figure high-probability general-purpose low-probability state) or the like after the end of the big hit game]. (For example, "combination of a decorative pattern of a jackpot for notifying that the change is certain, such as" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ")" (hereinafter, referred to as a "third case"). ").
In the re-lottery effect, the first jackpot result [for example, a combination of a jackpot decoration pattern of “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed once after the first jackpot result [for example, "Combination of jackpot decorations, etc. of" decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ", etc.]
In the re-lottery effect, the first notification effect [for example, the display of the effect display EF shown in FIG. 27C or FIG.
The first notification effect executed in the third case does not include the suggestion regarding the setting. [For example, as illustrated in FIG. 27C, in the re-lottery effect, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 ”To“ decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ”, the effect display EF displayed when the promotion is successful informs that the design has been promoted, etc.],
The first notification effect executed in the fourth case includes a suggestion regarding the setting [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 27 (c ″), in the re-lottery effect, “decoration 1-decoration 1- The effect display EF displayed when the promotion fails from “decoration 1” to “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4” includes an effect of setting suggestion]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the re-lottery effect, the third case (the first jackpot result (the result of the jackpot indicating that there is a possibility of being in the first advantageous state) is displayed once, and then the first advantageous state is displayed. (A case of displaying a jackpot result notifying that a second advantageous state is obtained), or a case other than the third case in the re-lottery effect. In the re-lottery effect, there may be a third case, or in the re-lottery effect, there may be no third case.

  In the re-lottery effect, there may be only the fourth case (a case where the first jackpot result is displayed once and then the first jackpot result is displayed again). There may be cases other than the case. In the re-lottery effect, there may be a fourth case, or in the re-lottery effect, there may be no fourth case.

  Further, in the re-lottery effect, only the first notification effect may be executed, or in the re-lottery effect, an effect other than the first notification effect may be executed. In addition, the first notification effect may be always executed in the re-lottery effect, or the first notification effect may not be executed in the re-lottery effect. Also, the first notification effect may be executed only in the re-lottery effect, or the first notification effect may be executed in an effect other than the re-lottery effect.

  In addition, the first notification effect performed in the third case may not include only the suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect performed in the third case may be different from the suggestion regarding the setting. Suggestions need not be included. In addition, the first notification effect performed in the third case does not necessarily include the suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect performed in the third case includes the suggestion regarding the setting. It may be.

  In addition, the first notification effect that is performed only in the third case may not include a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect that is also performed in a case other than the third case is the setting that May not be included.

  Further, the first notification effect performed in the fourth case may include only the suggestion regarding the setting, or the first notification effect performed in the fourth case may include the suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting. May also be included. Further, the first notification effect performed in the fourth case may necessarily include a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect performed in the fourth case may include the suggestion regarding the setting. There may not be.

  Further, the first notification effect executed only in the fourth case may include a suggestion regarding the setting, and the first notification effect executed even in cases other than the fourth case may be related to the setting. Suggestions may be included.

Also, “one of the plurality of effects is an effect of displaying the total number of acquired prize balls [eg, the display of the total number of acquired prize balls shown in FIG. 28, and the like]
The total acquired prize ball number display is a display of the total number of prize balls acquired in at least the jackpot game,
The first notification effect is an effect performed in the effect of displaying the total acquired prize ball number,
When the total acquired prize ball number display indicates a first number [for example, 2000 or the like], the first notification effect [for example, as shown in FIG. Including a drill number display image such as "2000 pt get !!"
When the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the second number [for example, 4560 or the like], the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started [for example, FIG. (Including display including a drill number display image such as “4560 pt get !!” shown in (2d)),
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notification effect may be executed only in the effect of displaying the total acquired prize balls, or may be executed in the effect other than the effect of displaying the total acquired prize balls. You may. In addition, the first notification effect may be always executed in the effect of displaying the total number of acquired prize balls, or may not be executed in the effect of displaying the total number of acquired prize balls. .

  In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the first number, only the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be the first number. The effect other than the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting when the number indicates the number may be started. In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the first number, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started without fail, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be the first number. There may be a case where the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting when the number indicates the first notification effect is not started.

  In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the first number, a first notification effect that does not include only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be the first number. A first notification effect that does not include any suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting when indicating that the number is a number may be started. In addition, only when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the first number, the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be the first number. The first notification effect that does not include the suggestion about the setting may be started in a case other than the case where the number indicates the number.

  In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the second number, only the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be performed. May indicate a second number, an effect other than the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the second number, the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting may always be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be the second number. There may be a case where the first notification effect including the suggestion regarding the setting when the number indicates the number is not started.

  In addition, when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the second number, the first notification effect including only the suggestion regarding the setting may be started, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be performed. May indicate a second number, a first notification effect including a suggestion other than the suggestion regarding the setting may be started. In addition, the first notification effect including the suggestion about the setting may be started only when the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the second number, or the total acquired prize ball number display may be performed. May also be started in a case other than the case where the second notification number indicates the second number.

  In addition, the first number and the second number may be partially different numbers, or may be entirely different numbers.

In the above description,
A first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] capable of executing a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special figure display device 214 or the like] capable of executing a second symbol variation display;
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying the decorative symbol variable display;
An attacker (for example, a first variable winning opening 234a, a second variable winning opening 235a, etc.) in which a game ball can win,
A variable time determining means [for example, a CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 or the like] for determining a variable time of the first symbol variable display;
Notice means (for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.) capable of executing a plurality of notices;
A gaming table with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are performed simultaneously [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variable display in accordance with the symbol variable display on the graphic display device 212],
The attacker is capable of changing the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol change display [for example, in the second special figure display device 214, the “special figure g” is displayed. In the case where the small win has occurred after the stop display, a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes a maximum of 12 times is executed],
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state,
In the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the lapse of the variation time determined by the variation time determination means, the attacker sets the second symbol variation display according to the result of the second symbol variation display. When the state is changed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case [for example, as shown in FIG. In the case where the special figure display device 214 becomes a small hit in the “special figure g” and the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and closed, etc.] ”).
One notice of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, a look-ahead notice effect at a time shown in FIG. 34 (j)]
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice that is executed during the display of the decorative design change display [for example, as shown in FIG. 1 ”is performed during the swing fluctuation of the combination of decorative patterns on the outskirts],
In the first case, a period corresponding to a period in which the attacker is in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), a period from the start to the end of the small hit game]. (Hereinafter, a certain period [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), an interruption period after the original symbol variation time elapses (for example, The first notice may be executed in a period such as a period corresponding to the period until the small hitting game is completed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the notice means. However, according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic of the notice means can be provided.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may always execute the first symbol variation display, or may not always execute the first symbol variation display.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may be one that does not always execute the second symbol variation display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, the display means may be one that always displays the decorative symbol variation display, or may be one that does not always display the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the attacker may be such that only the game ball can win, or may be something other than the game ball. Further, the attacker may be one in which the game ball always wins, or one in which the game ball may not win.

  Further, the variation time determining means may determine only the variation time of the first symbol variation display, or may determine the variation time other than the variation time of the first symbol variation display. Good. In addition, the change time determining means may always determine the change time of the first symbol change display, or may not always determine the change time of the first symbol change display. .

  The notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing notices other than the plurality of notices. In addition, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices or may not execute the plurality of notices.

  Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be simultaneously executed, or a symbol other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed. The variable display may be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be performed simultaneously, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be performed simultaneously. May not be.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display, or may be the decorative symbol variation corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variation display. A display other than the display may be displayed. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display, or may display the decorative symbol variation display in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display. May not be displayed.

  Further, the attacker may be capable of changing the state only from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of changing the state according to the result of the second symbol variation display. The state may be changeable from the first state to a state other than the second state. In addition, the attacker may always change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol change display, or may change the first state according to the result of the second symbol change display. The state may not change from the state to the second state.

  Further, the second state may be such that only the game ball can easily win the attacker than the first state, or something other than the game ball can easily win the attacker than the first state. There may be. In the second state, the game ball may be easier to win the attacker than the first state, or the game ball may not be easier to win the attacker than the first state. It may be.

  In the first case (in the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of the variation time determined by the variation time determination means, the attacker operates the second symbol variation display in accordance with the result of the second symbol variation display). Only the second case) or there may be cases other than the first case. Also, the first case may be present, or the first case may not exist.

  The first notice may be executed only during the display of the decorative design change display, or may be displayed other than during the display of the decorative design change display. In addition, the first notice may be always executed during the display of the decorative design change display, or may be executed in some cases during the display of the decorative design change display.

  In the first case, only a first notice may be executed in a certain period (a period corresponding to a period in which the attacker is in the second state), or in the first case, In a certain period, a notice other than the first notice may be executed. Also, in the first case, the first notice may be always executed in a certain period, or in the first case, the first notice may not be executed in a certain period. .

  Further, in the first case, the first notice may be executed only during a certain period, or in the first case, the first notice may be executed in a period other than a certain period. It may be executed. In addition, the first notice may be executed in a certain period only in the first case, or the first notice may be executed in a certain period in a case other than the first case. It may be executed.

Also, "the certain period is a period that is started after the timing at which the result of the second symbol change display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Is started at a timing later than the timing at which the small hit symbol such as "Tokuzu g" is displayed in Tokuji 2]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the certain period may be started only after the timing at which the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed, or may be a timing at which the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed. May be started other than after. In addition, a certain period may be necessarily started after the timing at which the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed, or may be a timing that is more than the timing at which the result of the second symbol variation display is displayed. Some may not be started later.

In addition, “the control means [for example, CPU304 etc. in main control part 300] which can be controlled to one of a plurality of game states,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state) or the like],
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state [for example, a probable change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state) or the like],
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
The fluctuating time of the first symbol fluctuating display determined by the fluctuating time determining means in the first gaming state is a first time [for example, 5 seconds or the like],
In the first game state, at least the attacker changes the state to the second state. The result of the change in the second symbol change display is displayed as the second change time [for example, 580 seconds. Etc.]
The second variation time is longer than the first variation time,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is difficult to determine the timing of the prefetching advance notice by grasping the contents of the decorative symbol variation display executed in relation to the variation of the first symbol variation display. In some cases, starting after derivation of can give the player expectations without disturbing the player.

  Here, the control means may be controllable only to one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to a game state other than the one of the plurality of game states. May be something. Further, the control means may control the game state to one of the plurality of game states, or may not control the game state to one of the plurality of game states. Is also good.

  The control means may be controllable only in the first game state and the second game state, or may be controllable in a game state other than the first game state and the second game state. It may be something. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Is also good.

  The second gaming state may be more advantageous than the first gaming state alone, or may be more advantageous than gaming states other than the first gaming state. Further, the second gaming state may be always more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be less advantageous than the first gaming state.

  Further, the fluctuating time of the first symbol fluctuating display determined by the fluctuating time determining means in the first gaming state may be only the first fluctuating time or may be other than the first fluctuating time. . Also, the fluctuating time of the first symbol fluctuating display determined by the fluctuating time determining means in the first gaming state may be the first fluctuating time, or may not be the first fluctuating time. Good.

  Further, the variation time of the second symbol variation display in which the result that at least the attacker changes to the second status in the first gaming state is displayed may be only the second variation time. , A variable time other than the second variable time. In addition, the variation time of the second symbol variation display in which the result that at least the attacker changes the state to the second status in the first game state is displayed may be the second variation time. May not be the second fluctuation time.

In addition, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the normal gaming state, The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the symbol variable display on the first special figure display device 212],
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the decorative symbol variable display corresponding to the symbol variable display on the graphic display device 214],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the first gaming state, only the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, the execution of the first symbol variation display In addition, a display other than the decorative design change display may be displayed. Further, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in correspondence with the execution of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display may be performed. Correspondingly, the decorative design change display may not be displayed.

  In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed only in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, other than the execution of the first symbol variation display. May be displayed in response to the execution of.

  Also, in the first gaming state, only the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed corresponding to the execution of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the execution of the second symbol variation display The display other than the decorative design change display need not be displayed in correspondence with. Also, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may not necessarily be displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the execution of the second symbol variation display May be displayed in response to the above.

  Also, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may not be displayed only in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display, and in the first gaming state, the execution of the second symbol variation display The decorative design change display may not be displayed corresponding to the execution other than the above.

In the first case, the case where the first notice for the first symbol change display held at the time when the state of the attacker changes to the second state is executed may be executed. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (j), the wait-foreseeing advance notice effect is suspended when the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is interrupted due to a small hit in the special figure 2. Look-ahead notice production for the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the first case, there may be a case where only the first notice for the first symbol change display held at the time when the state of the attacker changes to the second state is executed. However, in the first case, even if a notice other than the first notice for the first symbol change display held at the time when the attacker changes state to the second state may be executed. Good. Further, in the first case, the first notice for the first symbol change display held at the time when the attacker changes the state to the second state may be always executed, or the first notice may be executed. In this case, there may be a case where the first notice for the suspended first symbol change display is not executed when the attacker changes the state to the second state.

  Further, in the first case, the first notice may be executed only for the first symbol variation display held at the time when the state of the attacker changes to the second state. In the first case, the first notice may be executed for a symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display held at the time when the attacker changes state to the second state. Is also good. Also, only in the first case, the first notice for the first symbol change display held at the time when the attacker changes state to the second state may be executed. However, even in cases other than the first case, even if the first notice for the first symbol variation display held at the time when the attacker changes state to the second state may be executed. Good.

In addition, "the first notice is not a notice regarding the first symbol change display being executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. It is not a notice effect on the symbol change display of Toku-zu 1 that was interrupted due to a small hit in Toku-zu 2 etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notice may not be a notice concerning only the first symbol change display being executed, nor may be a notice concerning a symbol change display other than the first symbol change display being executed. In addition, the first notice may not necessarily be a notice regarding the first symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that may be related to the first symbol change display being executed.

Further, in the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and the period is After the end, the first symbol change display is restarted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (f) to (h), a small hit in the special figure 2 and a small hit game related to the small hit Is executed, the progress of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is interrupted, but the variation display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is displayed when the small hitting game ends. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the first case, during the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period is over, the first symbol variation display is continued. Only the first symbol variation display may be resumed, or in the first case, during the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continued. And the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display may be resumed after the period ends. In the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the second symbol variation display is stopped. One symbol variation display may be restarted without fail, or in the first case, during the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continued. It may be displayed and the first symbol change display may not restart after the period ends.

  In the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and only after the period is over, the first symbol variation display is continued. The first symbol variation display may be resumed, or in the first case, in a period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continued. It may be displayed, and the first symbol change display may be restarted even after the period has ended. Also, in the first case, only during the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, the first symbol variation display is stopped. The first symbol variation display may be resumed, or, in the first case, the first symbol variation display is interrupted but the decorative symbol variation display is also performed during a period other than the period in which the attacker is in the second state. It may be displayed continuously, and the first symbol change display may be restarted after the period ends.

  Also, only in the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period is over, the first symbol variation display is continued. The first symbol variation display may be resumed, and in cases other than the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is performed. May be displayed continuously, and the first symbol change display may be resumed after the period ends.

In addition, "one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, the big hit notice of the special map 2 in which the character" preparing big hit! "Shown in FIG. 35D is displayed). And
The second notice is a notice regarding the second symbol change display being executed,
The second notice is a notice that may be started when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display that results in a big hit [for example, FIG. As shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 12, when the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display to be a big hit on the second special figure display device 214, The jackpot notice of the special figure 2 in which the character of "Under preparation for big hit!"
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to urge the player to stop firing during a useless period in which the big hit lottery is not performed for a long time.

  Here, the second notice may relate to only the second symbol variation display being executed, or may relate to a symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display being executed. Good. Further, the second notice may be always related to the second symbol change display being executed, or may be one that may not relate to the second symbol change display being executed.

  Further, the second notice may be started only when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display resulting in the jackpot, There may be a case where the first symbol variation display may be started in a case other than the case where the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display which results in a big hit. In addition, the second notice may be always started when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display resulting in the jackpot, or the result of the jackpot may be obtained. May not be started when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second notice may be started when the first symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the second symbol variation display that results in a big hit, There may be a case where the first symbol variation display is started even when the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display that results in the big hit.

Also, the second notice may be executed over the first symbol change display executed plural times [for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (d) to FIG. The big hit notice of Toku-zu 2 is performed over the symbol change display of Toku-zu 1
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to show a pre-reading notice.

  Here, only the second notice may be executed over the first symbol variation display executed a plurality of times, or the first symbol variation display executed over a plurality of times may be executed. Then, a notice other than the second notice may be executed. Further, the second notice may be necessarily executed over the first symbol change display executed a plurality of times, or the second notice may be executed over the first symbol change display executed a plurality of times. The notice may not be executed in some cases.

  In addition, the second notice may be executed only over the first symbol change display executed a plurality of times, or a symbol other than the first symbol change display executed a plurality of times may be performed. The second notice may be executed over the variable display.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Control means (for example, CPU 304 or the like in the control unit 300) capable of controlling to one of a plurality of game states,
An attacker (for example, a first variable winning opening 234a, a second variable winning opening 235a, etc.) in which a game ball can win,
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming table with
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state in accordance with the result of the game. [For example, the "special figure g" is stopped and displayed on the second special figure display device 214, resulting in a small hit. In such a case, a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes a maximum of 12 times is executed],
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state,
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state) or the like],
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state [for example, a probable change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state) or the like],
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of displays is a total winning prize ball number display [for example, the total winning prize ball number displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. Display etc.]
The total acquired prize ball number display is a display indicating a total prize ball number acquired by winning at least the attacker in a series of periods that are advantageous to the player including the second game state [for example, The display of the total number of winning prize balls is displayed from the initial jackpot to the normal jackpot until the power support state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game relating to the ordinary jackpot ends,
In the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, after the second state ends, the game balls are transferred to the attacker. In some cases, the number of prize balls according to the number of winnings is added to the total acquired prize ball number display and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 24 (j) to FIG. The number of awarded balls that have been won is not counted in the display of the total number of awarded balls during the small hit game, but is counted up after the small hit game is over.],
In the second game state, if a certain condition [for example, a pending consecutive champion] is satisfied, the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker. Even in this case, after the second state is completed, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display. Is added to the total acquired award ball number display after the second state is completed and the second state is completed, and the unacquired award ball number corresponding to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the total acquired award ball number display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (e) to FIG. 37 (q), when the small hits are held consecutively, even if the small hitting game related to the first small hit ends, the first hit The number of prize balls won in the small hit game of will not be added to the display of the total number of prize balls won even after the first small hit game ends, After the small hitting game related to the second small hit, which is a repetition chan, the total number of prize balls displayed by adding up the number of prize balls obtained in the first small hitting game and the second small hitting game. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Here, the control means may be controllable only to one of the plurality of game states, or may be controllable to a game state other than the one of the plurality of game states. May be something. Further, the control means may control the game state to one of the plurality of game states, or may not control the game state to one of the plurality of game states. Is also good.

  Further, the attacker may be such that only the game ball can be won, or something other than the game ball may be able to win. Further, the attacker may be one in which the game ball always wins, or one in which the game ball may not win.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of displays, or may not display the plurality of displays.

  Further, the attacker may be capable of changing only the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game, or may be a state other than the second state from the first state according to the result of the game. The state may also be changeable. In addition, the attacker may always change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game, or may not change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the game. There may be.

  Further, the second state may be a state in which the game ball is more likely to win only the attacker than in the first state, or a state in which the game ball is easier to win other than the attacker than the first state. You may. Further, the second state may be a state in which the game ball can easily win the attacker than the first state, or a state in which the game ball does not easily win the attacker than the first state. There may be.

  The control means may be controllable only in the first game state and the second game state, or may be controllable in a game state other than the first game state and the second game state. It may be something. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Is also good.

  In addition, the second gaming state may be a gaming state in which only the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than in the first gaming state, or the second gaming state is more likely to be in the second state than the first gaming state. It may be a gaming state. Also, the second gaming state may be a gaming state where the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than the first gaming state, or the attacker is less likely to be in the second state than in the first gaming state. In some cases, the game state may be used.

  Further, in the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state is terminated and the game ball according to the winning number of the game balls to the attacker is completed. The number of awarded balls may be added to only the total acquired awarded ball number display, and may be displayed. In the second gaming state, the attacker enters the second state and one or more gaming balls enter the attacker. In the case of winning, even if the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the display other than the total acquired prize ball number display after the second state is finished, Good. Further, in the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state is terminated and the game ball according to the winning number of the game balls to the attacker is completed. The awarded ball count may be added to the total acquired award ball count display, or may be displayed, or in the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker. In some cases, after the second state is completed, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls won to the attacker may not be added to the total acquired prize ball display and displayed.

  Further, in the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state is terminated and the game ball according to the winning number of the game balls to the attacker is completed. May be added to the total acquired prize ball number display and displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. In the case where a prize is won, after the second state is completed, the number of prize balls other than the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball display and displayed. Is also good.

  Further, in the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, after the second state ends, only the number of game balls won to the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the total number of prize balls may be added to the display of the total number of prize balls to be displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. In the case where a prize is won, even if the prize ball number according to the winning number other than the winning number of the game ball to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display after the second state is completed, and displayed. Good.

  In the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the number of game balls won to the attacker only after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the total number of prize balls may be added to the display of the total number of prize balls to be displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. In the case where a prize is won, even if the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball display and displayed even in cases other than after the end of the second state. Good.

  Also, in the second game state, only when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of game balls won to the attacker after the second state ends The number of prize balls according to the total number of prize balls may be added to the display of the total number of prize balls to be displayed, or in the second game state, the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls become the attacker. Even in cases other than winning, even if the number of prize balls according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display after the completion of the second state, it may be displayed. Good.

  Also, only in the second gaming state, if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the number of game balls won to the attacker after the second state ends is reduced. The corresponding prize ball number may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display and displayed, or even in a game state other than the second game state, the attacker may be in the second state and the number of one or more may be displayed. When the game ball wins the attacker, the prize ball number corresponding to the winning number of the game ball to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display after the second state is completed and displayed. Is also good.

  Further, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, only the addition of the number of prize balls not added according to the winning number of game balls to the attacker to the total acquired prize ball number display may be performed, or in the second game state, When the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state The second after the state has been completed, may be also carried out other than the addition of the non-added worth of prize balls of the total number of won awards ball numerals corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker. Further, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of prize balls that have not been added according to the number of game balls winning the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or in the second game state, When the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state After the second state has been completed, there may be a case where the addition of the non-addition amount of prize balls of the total number of acquired prize balls numeral corresponding to the winning number of game balls into the attacker is not performed.

  Further, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of prize balls not added in accordance with the number of game balls winning the attacker may be added only to the total acquired prize ball number display, or in the second game state, When the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state The second after the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the non-added worth of prize balls number of display other than the total acquisition Prize counts display corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  Further, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, only the prize balls not yet added in accordance with the winning number of game balls to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or in the second game state, When the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state The second state after is completed, may be performed is added to the non-added content of the award total winning prize sphere other than the number of winning balls of the number of balls numerals corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  Further, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of game balls won only to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or in the second game state, When the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state The second after the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the total acquisition Award sphere notation of non-added worth of prize balls speed corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the other attacker.

  Further, in the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends Only after that, the number of prize balls not added according to the winning number of game balls to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or in the second game state, When the condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, even if the game ball enters the attacker after the second state ends. The number of prize balls according to the winning number is not added to the total winning ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state Other than after the second of the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the non-added worth of prize balls of the total number of won awards ball numerals corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  Also, in the second game state, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, only when a certain condition is satisfied, the second state After the end of the game, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, then the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends After that, the number of prize balls not added according to the winning number of game balls to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or a certain condition in the second game state. Even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, the game to the attacker is completed after the second state is over, except in the case where The number of prize balls according to the number of balls won is not added to the total winning prize ball display, and then the attacker And it is after the second of the state has been completed, may be performed is added to the total acquisition Award sphere notation of non-added worth of prize balls speed corresponding to the winning number of game balls to the attacker.

  In addition, if a certain condition is satisfied only in the second game state, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, the second After the state is over, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, and then the attacker becomes the second state and the second state is changed. After the end, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of game balls winning the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display, or a game state other than the second game state Also, in the case where a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker is in the second state and one or more game balls have won the attacker, the attacker is not terminated after the completion of the second state. Is not added to the total winning prize ball display according to the number of game balls winning After the second state is completed in the second state, the number of prize balls not yet added according to the number of game balls won to the attacker may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display. .

In addition, "the result of the game is a result of the symbol variation display,
The certain condition is that, when the attacker shifts from the first state to the second state, the result of the symbol variation display, which is suspended, indicates that the attacker is in the second state. A condition that contains a result that changes state.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "if the certain condition is satisfied, the result of the symbol change display suspended for execution includes a result that the attacker changes the state to the second state. A display that suggests at least the following (for example, a display of “reserved consecutive chan suggestions [for example, a display of“ W-UP chance! ”Shown in FIG. 37 (g)” or a display of “large bonus super heat!” Shown in FIG. 38 (g). , Etc.] is displayed.)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when a certain condition is satisfied, the display of the suggestion of the pending consecutive chunks (the result of the symbol variation display of which the execution is suspended includes the result that the attacker changes the state to the second state). May be displayed only, or if a certain condition is satisfied, a display other than the display of the suggestions for the consecutive linked channels may be displayed. In addition, if a certain condition is satisfied, the suggestion display of the pending consecutive chunks may be always displayed, or if a certain condition is satisfied, the suggestion display of the pending consecutive chunks may not be displayed. There may be.

  In addition, only when a certain condition is satisfied, the suggestion display of pending consecutive chunks may be displayed. You may.

In addition, the “hold pending chunk suggestion display” is a display that is continuously displayed even after the attacker finishes the second state and starts the symbol variation display [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 33 (h) and FIGS. 38 (g) to (h), the display of “W-UP chance!” And the display of “Large bonus super heat!” Etc. are displayed continuously even after the symbol variation display is started after the display is finished]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the symbol change display is started while the pending consecutive change suggestion display is being displayed, so that it may be possible to make it appear that the next hit comes immediately.

  Here, the hold consecutive chunk suggestion display may be displayed continuously only after the attacker finishes the second state and the symbol variation display is started, or the attacker may display the attacker in the second state. It may be displayed continuously after the end and the symbol variation display is started. In addition, the hold consecutive chunk suggestion display may be such that the attacker is always displayed continuously after the second state is finished and the symbol variation display is started, or the attacker is in the second state. There may be a case where the display is not continued even after the symbol variation display is started after finishing.

Also, "the second state is a state of both the big hit game state and the small hit game state,
One display of the plurality of displays is a decorative design change display,
There is a case where the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the big hit game state is the same as the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the small hit game state [for example, as shown in FIG. As described above, the combination of the decoration patterns such as “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” and “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” may be displayed when a big hit occurs, or when a small hit occurs. Etc. may also be displayed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the big hit game state may be the same as the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the small hit game state, or the big hit game state And the result other than the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the small hitting game state may be the same. In addition, the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the big hit game state may be the same as the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the small hit game state, or the shift to the big hit game state. There is a case where the result of the decorative symbol change display to be performed is not the same as the result of the decorative symbol change display to shift to the small hitting game state.

In addition, "a decorative member is arranged on the front side of the attacker, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the operation mode of the attacker [for example, as shown in FIG. 3A and FIG. The mouth 235a is on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b, and is difficult for a player to visually recognize.
In the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the operation mode of the attacker is different,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in some cases, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the type of hit in the open mode of the attacker.

  Here, the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker so that only the operation mode of the attacker is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, or the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker and other than the operation mode of the attacker. The operation mode may also be made difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, the decoration member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker to make the operation mode of the attacker difficult to be visually recognized by the player, or the decoration member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker to change the operation mode of the attacker. May not be considered difficult to view.

  Further, only the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker so that the operation mode of the attacker is difficult for the player to visually recognize, or a member other than the decorative member may be arranged on the front side of the attacker to operate the attacker. May be made difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, the decorative member may be arranged only on the front side of the attacker to make the operation mode of the attacker difficult to be visually recognized by the player, or the decorative member may be arranged other than the front side of the attacker to change the operation mode of the attacker. It may be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In addition, only the operation mode of the attacker may be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state, or the mode other than the operation mode of the attacker may be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state. In addition, the operation mode of the attacker may be always different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state, or the operation mode of the attacker may not be different between the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

  The operation mode of the attacker may be different only in the big hit game state and the small hit game state, or the attack mode may be different in the game state other than the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

In addition, in the second gaming state, the decoration is performed in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (h), a display mode in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper right portion of the display screen]. There is a case where the symbol variation display is displayed,
In the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is performed in a second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), a decorative pattern in which a decorative symbol is largely displayed at the center of the display screen]. May be displayed,
The size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode is smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in the second display mode,
In the second game state, a period during which the symbol variation display is suspended when the second state is terminated (hereinafter referred to as "a certain period [for example, In this case, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but when the certain condition is satisfied. The decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the second display mode even during the certain period. [For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (k), when the small hitting game is completed, it is suspended. Among the symbol variation displays that are displayed, during execution of symbol variation display that becomes a hit (small hit / big hit), a decorative symbol is displayed large in the center portion of the display screen, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, for example, a case where it is possible to make the appearance of a continuous chunk immediately by displaying a big hit symbol when a big hit is suddenly displayed in a case where a big hit is made inconspicuous when holding a continuous chunk. There is.

  Here, in the second gaming state, the decorative design variation display may be displayed only in the first display mode, and in the second gaming state, decorations may be displayed in display modes other than the first display mode. The symbol variation display may be displayed. Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variation display may be always displayed in the first display mode, and in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variation display may not be displayed in the first display mode. There may be.

  In addition, only in the second game state, the decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the first display mode, or in a game state other than the second game state, the decorative pattern may be displayed in the first display mode. A variable display may be displayed.

  Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variation display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. A variable display may be displayed. Further, in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variation display may be always displayed in the second display mode, and in the second gaming state, the decorative pattern variation display may not be displayed in the second display mode. There may be.

  In addition, only in the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in a gaming state other than the second gaming state, the decorative symbol may be displayed in the second display mode. A variable display may be displayed.

  Further, the size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode may be smaller than only the size of the decorative pattern in the second display mode, or the size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the second display mode. The size may be smaller than the size other than the size of the decorative pattern in the aspect. In addition, the size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in the second display mode, and the size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode is the second display mode. May not be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in.

  Further, only the size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode may be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in the second display mode, and the size other than the decorative pattern in the first display mode may also be smaller in the second display mode. It may be smaller than the size of the decorative pattern.

  In the second game state, during a certain period (period during which the symbol variation display is being executed when the second state is completed), the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode. However, if a certain condition is satisfied, even during a certain period, only the decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, In the period, the decorative pattern variation display is displayed in the first display mode. However, if a certain condition is satisfied, even in a certain period, other than the decorative pattern variation display in the second display mode. The display may also be displayed. In addition, in the second game state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the certain period is satisfied, The decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but a certain condition is satisfied. In such a case, the decorative design variation display may not be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  In addition, in the second game state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the certain period is satisfied, The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but a certain condition is satisfied. In this case, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode even during a certain period.

  In addition, in the second game state, in a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but only when a certain condition is satisfied, even in a certain period, The decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode for a certain period, but a certain condition is satisfied. In any case other than the above case, the decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  In the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode in a certain period, but if only certain conditions are satisfied, even in a certain period, The decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode. Even when the condition is satisfied or during a certain period, the decorative symbol change display may be displayed in the second display mode.

  Also, in the second game state, during a certain period, only the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even during a certain period, The decorative pattern change display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, a display other than the decorative pattern change display is also displayed in the first display mode for a certain period. If the condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol change display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  Also, in the second game state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed only in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even during a certain period, The decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or in the second game state, for a certain period, the decorative pattern variation display is displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. If the following condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol change display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  Also, in the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode only for a certain period, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even in a certain period, The decorative pattern variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or the decorative pattern variation display is displayed in the first display mode in a period other than a certain period in the second game state. If the condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol change display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

  Also, only in the second gaming state, during a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, but if a certain condition is satisfied, even during a certain period, The decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the second display mode, or even in a game state other than the second game state, for a certain period, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the first display mode, If a certain condition is satisfied, the decorative symbol change display may be displayed in the second display mode even during a certain period.

In addition, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, even after the second state is completed, the number of game balls won to the attacker If the number of prize balls according to the above is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, after the second state ends, the attacker then enters the second state and the second state After the end of the state, the total winning prize is not added to the total winning prize ball display until the number of prize balls not added according to the winning number of the game ball to the attacker is added to the total winning prize ball display. The display mode of the ball number display is changed to another display mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 37 (h) to (o), a prize acquired in the first small hitting game for the consecutive re-charging As long as the number of balls is not added to the total winning ball display, the color of the total winning ball display is highlighted Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the prize ball according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. In the case where the number is not added to the total winning prize ball number display, after the second state is completed, the attacker then becomes the second state, and after the second state is completed, the game proceeds to the attacker. In the period until the number of prize balls not added according to the winning number of game balls is added to the total acquired prize ball number display, the display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display is changed to another display mode only. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends may be changed. If the corresponding prize ball count is not added to the total winning prize ball count display, after the second state ends, After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls that have not been added according to the number of game balls entered into the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. During the period until the display, the display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display may be changed to a display mode other than another display mode. Also, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. In the case where the addition to the total winning prize ball number display is not performed, after the second state is finished, the attacker then becomes the second state and the second state is finished, and then the Until the number of prize balls not yet added according to the winning number of game balls is added to the total acquired prize ball number display, the display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display must be changed to another display mode Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state is terminated and the number of game balls winning the attacker is determined according to the number of game balls winning the attacker. If the number of awarded balls is not added to the total number of awarded balls displayed, After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls not added according to the winning number of the game balls to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. During the period until, the display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display may not be changed to another display mode.

  Also, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. In the case where the addition to the total winning prize ball number display is not performed, after the second state is finished, the attacker then becomes the second state and the second state is finished, and then the Until the addition of the number of prize balls not yet added according to the number of game balls won to the total acquired prize ball number display is performed, only the display form of the total acquired prize ball number display is changed to another display form. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state may be terminated and the game ball may enter the attacker after the second state is completed. If the number of awarded balls is not added to the total number of awarded balls displayed, After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. During the period up to, the display mode of the display other than the total acquired prize ball number display may be changed to another display mode.

  Also, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. In the case where the addition to the total winning prize ball number display is not performed, after the second state is finished, the attacker then becomes the second state and the second state is finished, and then the The display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display is changed to another display mode only during the period until the number of prize balls not yet added according to the number of game balls won is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state may be terminated and the game ball may enter the attacker after the second state is completed. If the number of awarded balls is not added to the total number of awarded balls displayed, After the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. The display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display may be changed to another display mode even in a period other than the period up to.

  Also, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. In the case where the addition to the total winning prize ball number display is not performed, the attacker enters the second state after the second state is completed, and only after the second state ends, the attacker The display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display is changed to another display mode in a period until the prize ball number not added according to the winning number of the game balls is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state may be terminated and the game ball may enter the attacker after the second state is completed. If the number of awarded balls is not added to the total number of awarded balls displayed, Even after the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of game balls won to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. During the period until the display, the display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display may be changed to another display mode.

  Also, even when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker after the second state ends. Only when the addition to the total winning prize ball number display is not performed, after the second state ends, the attacker then becomes the second state and the second state ends, and then the attacker The display mode of the total acquired prize ball number display is changed to another display mode in a period until the prize ball number not added according to the winning number of the game balls is added to the total acquired prize ball number display. Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, the second state may be terminated and the game ball may enter the attacker after the second state is completed. The second state ends even if the number of prize balls After that, after the attacker enters the second state and the second state ends, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display May be changed to another display mode during the period until the display is performed.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] capable of executing a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special figure display device 214 or the like] capable of executing a second symbol variation display;
An attacker (for example, a first variable winning opening 234a, a second variable winning opening 235a, etc.) in which a game ball can win,
A variable time determining means [for example, a CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 or the like] for determining a variable time of the first symbol variable display;
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A first control means [for example, a CPU 304 or the like of the main control unit 300] capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means;
A second control unit (for example, a first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500) capable of controlling at least the display unit;
A gaming table with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are performed simultaneously [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
After the small hit symbol [for example, “special figure f” or “special figure g” or the like] is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, it is possible to shift to the small hitting game state [for example, the second special figure] When the "special figure f" or the "special figure g" is stopped and displayed on the display device 214 and a small hit occurs, a small hit game in which the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and closed is executed],
When the small hitting game state is set in the period from the start of the execution of the first symbol change display to the elapse of the change time determined by the change time determining means (hereinafter, "in some cases [for example, As shown in FIG. 14 (b), the second special figure display device 214 displays a small hit with “special figure g” from the start of the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 to the stop display. And the second variable winning opening 235a is opened and closed to enter a small hitting game state]].
In the certain case, a state in which the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display is interrupted in a period from the start of the display of the small hit symbol to the end of the small hit game state (hereinafter, " [For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), during the period until a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 and the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the symbol in the special figure 1 The progress of the variable display is interrupted (interrupted state) etc.],
One display of the plurality of displays is a first notice display [for example, a display of a look-ahead pre-reading effect such as shown in FIG. 34 (j) or FIG. 35 (j ′)],
The first notice display may be displayed in connection with the certain state [for example, the display of the pre-reading notice effect may be displayed in association with the suspension state, etc. ],
The second control means is means for performing control according to a command from the first control means,
When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started, a certain command transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit [for example, a special symbol variation start command including stop symbol information and It is determined whether or not the first notice display is displayed in association with the special figure stop type command or the like. The display of the wait-foreseeing advance notice is displayed, and in the case of a small hit in the "special figure f", the display of the wait-foreseeing advance notice effect shown in FIG. 35 (j ') is displayed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first symbol display means may always execute the first symbol variation display, or may not always execute the first symbol variation display.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. . Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may be one that does not always execute the second symbol variation display.

  Further, the variation time determination means may determine only the variation time of the first symbol variation display, or may also determine the variation time of the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. Is also good. In addition, the change time determining means may always determine the change time of the first symbol change display, or may not always determine the change time of the first symbol change display. .

  In addition, the variation time determination means may determine the variation time of the second symbol variation display, or may determine the variation time of the normal symbol variation display.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may be one that does not always display a plurality of displays.

  Further, the first control means may be capable of controlling only the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or may be other than the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. The means may also be controllable. Further, the first control means may be one that always controls the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means, or does not control the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. There may be some cases.

  Further, the second control means may be capable of controlling only the display means, or may be capable of controlling means other than the display means. In addition, the second control means may control the display means without fail or may not control the display means.

  Further, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be simultaneously executed, or a symbol other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed. The variable display may be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be performed simultaneously, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be performed simultaneously. May not be.

  Further, after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, it may be possible to shift only to the small hit game state, or the small hit symbol may be displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. It may be possible to shift to a game state other than the small hitting game state later. In addition, the small hitting game state may be always shifted after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or the small hit symbol may be displayed after the small hit symbol is displayed as the result of the second symbol change display. There may be cases where the game does not shift to the hit game state.

  Also, it may be possible to shift to the small hitting game state only after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. It may be possible to shift to the small hitting game state other than after.

  In addition, there may be only a certain case (a case where the small hitting game state is set in a period from when the execution of the first symbol change display is started to when the change time determined by the change time determining means elapses). However, there may be cases other than a certain case. In addition, there may be a certain case, or there may not be a certain case.

  In addition, in a certain state (the period from the start of the display of the small hit symbol in the certain case to the end of the small hit game state, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first symbol change display is interrupted. State) or a state other than a certain state. In addition, a certain state may always be achieved, or a certain state may not be achieved.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may display the first advance notice display without fail, or may not display the first advance notice display in some cases.

  Further, only the first notice display may be displayed in relation to a certain state, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed in relation to a certain state. Is also good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in relation to a certain state, or the first notice display may not be displayed in relation to a certain state.

  Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in relation to a certain state, or the first notice display may be displayed in relation to a state other than a certain state. You may.

  Further, the second control means may perform only control according to a command from the first control means, or may perform control other than control according to a command from the first control means. It may be. Further, the second control means may always perform control according to a command from the first control means, or may not perform control according to a command from the first control means. It may be something.

  Also, whether or not the first notice display is displayed in connection with a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when execution of the first symbol change display is started. May be determined, and other than the first notice display in relation to a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol change display is started May be determined as well. Also, whether or not the first notice display is displayed in connection with a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when execution of the first symbol change display is started. May be always determined, or the first notice display related to a certain command transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the execution of the first symbol change display is started It may not be determined whether or not is displayed.

Further, "a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display [for example," special figure C "indicating a loss, etc.) is displayed for a certain time [for example, t21 in FIG. 13 (b). The symbol is continuously displayed during a period until the symbol display time of the special figure 1 which is a period of t22.
After starting the display of the certain symbol [for example, "special figure C" indicating a loss, etc.] representing the result of the first symbol change display, the certain time [for example, t21 to t21 in FIG. Even if the small hitting game state is set in the period until the symbol display time of the special figure 1, which is the period of t22, the measurement of the certain time is not interrupted.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, for example, if the time of the loss is extended, the unfortunate feeling is emphasized, and the time until the start of the next symbol change display is also increased, so that the feeling may not be switched. However, there are cases where such a problem can be solved.

  Further, according to the gaming table, the symbol variation display can be started immediately after the small hitting game is completed, so that the symbol is not fluctuating and a certain period of time can be shortened for entertaining.

  Further, according to this gaming table, if a small hit occurs during the first symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display is lengthened (that is, the ratio of the total In some cases, the player may be able to entertain the player (since the ratio of fluctuations increases).

  Here, only a certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from the start of the display of the certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display to the elapse of a certain time, or A symbol other than a certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display to the elapse of a certain time. In addition, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from the start of the display of the certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the elapse of a certain time, or the first symbol may be displayed. In some cases, a certain symbol may not be displayed continuously during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display to the lapse of a certain time.

  In addition, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed only during a period from the start of the display of the certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display to the lapse of a certain time, or the first symbol may be displayed. A certain symbol may be continuously displayed in a period other than the period from when the display of the symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display is started until a certain time elapses.

  Further, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from when only a certain symbol representing a result of the first symbol variation display is started to when a certain time elapses, or the first symbol may be displayed. A certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from the start of displaying a symbol other than a certain symbol representing the result of the symbol variation display to a lapse of a certain time.

  Further, a certain symbol may be continuously displayed during a period from the start of the display of the certain symbol representing only the result of the first symbol variation display to the lapse of a certain time, or the first symbol may be displayed. A certain symbol may be displayed continuously during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing a result other than the result of the symbol variation display to the elapse of a certain time.

  In addition, even if the small hitting game state occurs during a period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the lapse of a certain time, only a certain time measurement is performed. May not be interrupted, or may be in the small hitting game state during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the elapse of a certain time. The measurement of a time other than a certain time may not be interrupted. In addition, even when the small hitting game state is set in a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the lapse of a certain time, the measurement of a certain time is Even if it is not necessarily interrupted, even if it is in the small hitting gaming state in the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display until a certain time elapses The measurement of a certain time may be interrupted.

  Also, the measurement of a certain time is interrupted only when the small hitting game state is set in a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the elapse of a certain time. It may not be necessary, or even in a case other than the case of entering the small hitting gaming state in a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol fluctuation display to the elapse of a certain time. The measurement of a certain time may not be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state is set only during a period from the start of displaying a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the lapse of a certain time, a certain time is measured. May not be interrupted, or in the case of entering the small hitting gaming state in a period other than the period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display to the lapse of a certain time. Even so, the measurement of a certain time does not have to be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state is set in a period from when the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display is started to when only a certain time elapses, a certain time is measured. May not be interrupted, or in the case of a small hitting gaming state during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol change display until a time other than a certain time elapses. Even so, the measurement of a certain time does not have to be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state is set in a period from when the display of only a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display is started to when a certain time elapses, a certain time is measured. May not be interrupted, or in the case of a small hitting gaming state during a period from the start of displaying a symbol other than a certain symbol representing the result of the first symbol variation display until a certain time elapses. Even so, the measurement of a certain time does not have to be interrupted.

  In addition, even when the small hitting game state is set in a period from when the display of a certain symbol representing only the result of the first symbol variation display is started to when a certain time elapses, a certain time is measured. May not be interrupted, or in the case of a small hitting gaming state during a period from the start of the display of a certain symbol representing a result other than the result of the first symbol change display until a certain time elapses Even so, the measurement of a certain time does not have to be interrupted.

Also, the second control means may be configured to execute the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation by the certain command (for example, a special figure stop type command or the like) received during the execution of the second symbol variation display. This is a means that can specify which of the symbol variation displays is to be stopped and displayed first.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second control means may be capable of specifying only whether or not the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by a certain command, or may be a second command by a certain command. It may also be possible to specify other than whether the result of the symbol variation display is a small hit. Further, the second control means may always specify whether or not the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by a certain command, or the second symbol variation may be determined by a certain command. It may not be specified whether or not the display result is a small hit.

In addition, the second control means displays the small hit symbol as a result of the second symbol variation display by the certain command [for example, a special symbol variation start command including stop symbol information]. It is a means that can specify whether or not
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second control means may be capable of specifying only whether or not the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display by a certain command, or may be specified by a certain command. It may also be possible to specify other than whether or not a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. Further, the second control means may always specify whether a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display by a certain command, or may be a second command by a certain command. It may not be specified whether or not a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the symbol variation display.

Also, a plurality of types of the small hit symbols [for example, “special figure g” in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes 12 times, “special figure f” in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes once, etc.] are displayed. Is possible,
It is possible to shift to the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hitting symbol [for example, when the small hitting occurs in the “special figure g”, the small hitting game opening and closing of the second variable winning opening 235a is performed 12 times. If the state shifts to a small hit in the "special figure f", the state shifts to a small hitting game state in which the second variable winning opening 235a opens and closes once, etc.],
The display mode of the first notice display is determined according to the type of the shifted small hitting game state. [For example, in the case of the small hit in the "special figure g", the look-ahead wait is performed as shown in FIG. 34 (j). When the display of the advance notice is displayed and the small hit is made in the "special figure f", the display of the wait-reading advance notice effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 35 (j '), etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only a plurality of types of small hit symbols may be displayed, or a symbol other than a plurality of types of small hit symbols may be displayed. In addition, a plurality of types of small hit symbols may be always displayed, or a plurality of types of small hit symbols may not be displayed.

  Further, it may be possible to shift only to the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hit symbol, or to be able to shift to a gaming state other than the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hit symbol. . Further, the game may always shift to the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hit symbol, or may not always shift to the small hitting game state according to the type of the small hit symbol.

  In addition, it may be possible to shift to the small hitting game state according to only the type of the small hit symbol, or to be able to shift to the small hitting game state according to something other than the type of the small hit symbol.

  Further, only the display mode of the first notice display may be determined according to the type of the transferred small hit game state, or other than the display mode of the first notice display according to the type of the transferred small hit game state. May be determined. In addition, the display mode of the first notice display may be always determined according to the type of the transferred small hit game state, or the display mode of the first notice display may be determined according to the type of the transferred small hit game state. It may not be determined.

  Further, the display mode of the first notice display may be determined only according to the type of the transferred small hit game state, or the first notice display may be determined according to other than the type of the transferred small hit game state. May be determined.

In addition, the "first notice display is, in the certain case, a look-ahead notice related to the information of the first design change display suspended at the time when the execution of the first design change display is started. [For example, the display of the wait-ahead look-ahead announcement effect shown in FIG. 34 (j) is directed to the symbol variation display related to the first suspension of the special figure 1, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first notice display is, in some cases, only the display of the pre-reading notice related to the information of the first design change display that is suspended at the time when the execution of the first design change display is started. It may be, in some cases, there is also a display other than the display of the look-ahead notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is suspended at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. Is also good. Further, in some cases, the first preview display is a display of a pre-reading advance notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display, which is always held when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. In some cases, the display may be a display other than the display of the pre-reading notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is suspended at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started. There may be.

  Also, the first notice display is a display of the pre-read notice related to the information of the first design change display suspended at the time when the execution of the first design change display is started only in certain cases. It may be a display of a pre-reading notice related to the information of the first symbol variation display that is suspended at the time when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started even in a case other than a certain case. Is also good.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of displays is an effect display [for example, an effect display related to a variation display of a decorative pattern shown in FIGS. 33 (f) to (n)],
The display of the effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), in the normal game state, the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 Decorative symbols are displayed according to the display],
Even in the certain state, the effect display proceeds without interruption [for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (i) to FIG. 33 (k), in the normal game state, a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 Even after that, even during the period until the small hit game related to the small hit ends, the effect display related to the variable display of the decorative pattern is proceeding without interruption],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the display of the effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol change display, or the display other than the display of the effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol change display. May be started. In addition, the display of the effect display may be always started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, or the display of the effect display may not be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display. There may be.

  In addition, the display of the effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol change display, or the display of the effect display may be started in response to something other than the start of the first symbol change display. May be started.

  In addition, even in a certain state, only the effect display may proceed without interruption, and even in a certain state, display other than the effect display may proceed without interruption. In addition, even when a certain state occurs, the effect display may always proceed without interruption, and even in a certain state, the effect display may not proceed without interruption.

  Further, the effect display may proceed without interruption only when a certain state is reached, or may proceed without interruption even in cases other than the certain state. Further, the effect display may proceed without interruption even when only a certain state occurs, or the effect display may proceed without interruption even when the state becomes other than a certain state.

In addition, "the time from the start of a certain decorative pattern change display in the certain state to the start of display of the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by shaking change, and the case of not being in the certain state The time from the start of the certain decorative pattern change display until the start of the display of the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by the fluctuation change is the same [for example, as shown in FIG. The time from the start of the decorative pattern change display according to FIG. 1 to the start of the swing change is the same regardless of whether a small hit occurs or not in the special figure 2),
When the certain decorative pattern change display in the certain state is started, after displaying the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by shaking change, until the first pattern change display is stopped and displayed. During the period, the first notice may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), in the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern according to the pattern fluctuation display of the special figure 1, the fluctuation display is performed. 34 (j), a display of a wait-reading notice effect may be displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (j).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the time from the start of a certain decorative pattern change display in a certain state to the start of display of the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by swing fluctuation, and the certain time in a certain state Only the time from the start of the decorative pattern change display to the start of the display of the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by shaking change may be the same, or a certain decorative pattern change display in a certain state From the start to the start of display of the result of a certain decorative pattern variation display by shaking fluctuation, and the time of starting a certain decorative pattern variation display after starting a certain decorative pattern variation display when it does not become a certain state The time other than the time until the start of displaying the result by the fluctuation may be the same. Also, the time from the start of a certain decorative pattern change display in a certain state to the start of display of the result of a certain decorative pattern change display by swing fluctuation, and a certain decoration in a certain state The time from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of the display of the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display by shaking variation may be always the same, or a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state The time from the start to the start of displaying the result of a certain decorative design change display by shaking change, and the result of a certain decorative design change display from the start of a certain decorative design change display when it does not enter a certain state May not be the same until the start of display due to fluctuations.

  In addition, when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is started, after displaying a result of a certain decorative symbol variation display by shaking variation, a period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the above, only the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative pattern change display in a certain state is started, the result of the certain decorative pattern change display is fluctuated. May be displayed in a period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed in addition to the first notice display. In addition, when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is started, after displaying a result of a certain decorative symbol variation display by shaking variation, a period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In, the first notice display may be displayed without fail, or when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state starts, after displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol variation display in a swing variation The first notice display may not be displayed during the period until the first symbol change display is stopped.

  In addition, when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is started, after displaying a result of a certain decorative symbol variation display by shaking variation, a period until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. Only when the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative design variable display is started in a certain state, the result of the certain decorative design variable display is fluctuated. , The first notice display may be displayed in a period other than the period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed.

  Also, when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is started, only after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, the first symbol variation display is stopped until the first symbol variation display is stopped. During the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative pattern change display starts in a certain state, the result of the certain decorative pattern change display fluctuates. In addition to the display after the display, the first notice display may be displayed in a period until the first symbol change display is stopped.

  In addition, only when a certain decorative symbol change display in a certain state is started, after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol change display in a swinging change, until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. During the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or even when a certain decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is not started, a certain decorative symbol variation display may be displayed. The first notice display may be displayed in a period from when the result is displayed as swing fluctuation until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when a certain decorative symbol change display in a case where only a certain state is started, after displaying the result of a certain decorative symbol change display by shaking change, the first symbol change display is displayed until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. In the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or when a certain decorative symbol change display in a state other than a certain state starts, a result of a certain decorative pattern change display The first notice display may be displayed in a period from when is displayed as swing fluctuation until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in the certain state is a result of a loss, the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed as a swing variation, and then the first symbol variation display is displayed. During the period until the stop display, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. In the display, there is a case where a display of a wait-reading notice effect is displayed as shown in FIG.
When the result of the decorative symbol change display in the certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol change display with the swing change, the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. In the period until, there is no case where the first notice display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, an advanced player may be able to understand that the first notice display is displayed so that the symbol change display does not cause a resurrection jackpot.

  Further, according to this gaming table, when the first notice display is displayed during the execution of the continuous notice performed over a plurality of symbol change displays, the symbol change display to be pre-read is displayed in the symbol change display. Since it is known that there is no display, it may be possible to concentrate on the next symbol change display and thereafter.

  Here, in the case where the result of the decorative symbol change display in a certain state is a loss result, the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed after displaying the result of the decorative symbol change display with the swing change. In the period up to, only the first notice display may be displayed, or if the result of decorative design change display in a certain state is a result of loss, decorative design change display May be displayed in a period until the first symbol variation display is stopped after the result of the above is displayed as the swing variation. In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of a loss, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may be displayed without fail, or when the result of the decorative design change display in a certain state is a result of a loss, the result of the decorative design change display is fluctuated. , The first notice display may not be displayed in a period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of a loss, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. Only during the period of the first notice display may be displayed, or, if the result of the decorative design variation display in a certain state is a result of the loss, the decorative design variation display The first notice display may be displayed in a period other than the period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed after the result is displayed by the fluctuation change.

  In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a result of a loss, the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed only after the result of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed with the swing variation. In the period up to, the first notice display may be displayed, or if the result of the decorative design change display in a certain state is a result of a loss, the decorative design change display The first notice display may be displayed in a period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed, other than after the result is displayed by the fluctuation change.

  In addition, only when the result of the decorative symbol change display in a certain state is a result of a loss, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol change display with the swing fluctuation, until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. During the period, the first notice display may be displayed, or the decorative design change display in a certain state other than the case where the result of the decorative design change display is not a result of the decorative design change display may be displayed. The first notice display may be displayed during a period from when the display result is displayed by the fluctuation fluctuation until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. During the period, only the first notice display may not be displayed, or if the result of the decorative design change display in a certain state is a big hit result, the decorative design change display After the result is displayed by the fluctuation fluctuation, in a period until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped, the display other than the first notice display may not be displayed. In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. During the period, the first notice display may not always be displayed, and if the result of the decorative design change display in a certain state is a big hit result, the result of the decorative design change display fluctuates. The first notice display may be displayed in a period after the change is displayed and before the first symbol change display is stopped.

  In addition, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. Only during the period, the first notice display may not be displayed, or if the result of the decorative design change display in a certain state becomes a big hit result, the decorative design change display The first notice display may not be displayed during a period other than the period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed after the result is displayed as the fluctuation change.

  Also, when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, the first symbol variation display is stopped only after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation. In the period until the first notice display may not be displayed, or when the decorative pattern change display in a certain state is a big hit result, the decorative pattern change display The first notice display may not be displayed in a period until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed, other than after the result of (1) is displayed with the fluctuation.

  In addition, only when the result of the decorative symbol variation display in a certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol variation display with the swing variation, until the first symbol variation display is stopped and displayed. During the period, the first notice display may not be displayed, or the decorative design change display in a certain state may be a case other than the case of the big hit result. The first notice display may not be displayed during a period after the display result is displayed by the fluctuation fluctuation until the first symbol fluctuation display is stopped and displayed.

In addition, "when the first notice display is displayed, the first notice display is always started after the certain state is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. In the case where the display of the premature look ahead notice effect is displayed as the display of the keep away effect, the wait time prefetch notice effect is started after the suspension period is started, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the first notice display is displayed, it may be started only after the display of the first notice display is necessarily in a certain state, or when the first notice display is displayed. May be started even after the display of the first notice display has necessarily reached a certain state. Further, when the first notice display is displayed, the first notice display may be always started after the display of the first notice display is always in a certain state, or when the first notice display is displayed, The display of the first notice display may not always be started after a certain state is displayed.

  Also, when the first notice display is displayed, only the first notice display may always be started after a certain state is displayed, or when the first notice display is displayed. Alternatively, the display other than the first notice display may be started after a certain state has been reached.

  Also, only when the first advance notice is displayed, the first advance notice may be started after the display of the first advance notice is always in a certain state, or when the first advance notice is not displayed. In this case as well, the display may be started after the display of the first notice display has necessarily reached a certain state.

  When only the first notice is displayed, the display of the first notice may always be started after a certain state is displayed, or a display other than the first notice may be displayed. In such a case, the display may be started after the display of the first notice display is always in a certain state.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of displays is a second notice display [for example, an effect display in a pre-reading mode or the like],
The second notice display is a notice display different from the first notice display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  The second notice display may be different from the first notice display in part, or may be entirely different notice displays.

In addition, "the second notice display is a pre-read notice display,
The second notice display is a display that is displayed over a plurality of times of the first symbol variation display [for example, the effect display in the pre-reading mode is displayed over a plurality of times of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 Etc.],
The first notice display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the second notice display may be only a pre-read notice display, or may be a display other than the pre-read notice display.Also, the second notice display may always be a pre-read notice display. Alternatively, there may be cases where the pre-reading notice is not displayed.

  Further, the second notice display may be displayed only over a plurality of first symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays other than the first symbol variation display. May be displayed. In addition, the second notice display may be always displayed over the first symbol variation display a plurality of times, or may not be displayed across the first symbol variation display a plurality of times. It may be something.

  Also, only the first notice display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display. May be. Also, the first notice display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display, or the first notice display may not be displayed during the display of the second notice display. Good.

  In addition, the first notice display may be displayed only during the display of the second notice display, or the first notice display may be displayed while the display other than the second notice display is displayed. May have been done.

Also, "if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in the certain state, the first notice display is not displayed in the first symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, only the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display, or a certain state. In the case where the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the display other than the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display. In addition, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not always be displayed in the first symbol variation display, or in a certain state. When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display, or in a certain state. Even in cases other than when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  Further, when the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied only in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display, and other than the certain state. When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied also in the state described above, the first notice display may not be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  Also, if the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in a certain state, the first notice display may not be displayed only in the first symbol variation display, or in a certain state. When the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied, the first notice display may not be displayed in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display.

In addition, it is possible to control the game state to one of a plurality of game states,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability general figure high probability state) or the like],
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state [for example, a probable change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state) or the like],
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
In the first game state, at least the small hit symbol is displayed, rather than the length of the variable time of the first symbol variable display determined by the variable time determining means [for example, 5 seconds or the like]. The length of the change time [for example, 580 seconds or the like] of the second symbol change display is longer,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, it may be possible to control only one of a plurality of game states, or to control a game state other than one of the plurality of game states. You may. Further, the game state may be always controlled to one of a plurality of game states, or may not be controlled to one of the plurality of game states.

  The control means may be controllable only in the first game state and the second game state, or may be controllable in a game state other than the first game state and the second game state. It may be something. Further, the control means may always control the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not control the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Is also good.

  The second gaming state may be more advantageous than the first gaming state alone, or may be more advantageous than gaming states other than the first gaming state. Further, the second gaming state may be always more advantageous than the first gaming state, or may be less advantageous than the first gaming state.

  Further, the change time of the second symbol change display in which at least the small hit symbol is displayed is longer than the length of the change time of the first symbol change display determined by the change time determination means in the first game state. Only the length may be longer, or at least the small hit symbol will be displayed longer than the length of the variable time of the first symbol variable display determined by the variable time determining means in the first gaming state. The length other than the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol fluctuation display may be longer. Further, the change time of the second symbol change display in which at least the small hit symbol is displayed is longer than the length of the change time of the first symbol change display determined by the change time determination means in the first game state. The length may be always longer, and at least the small hit symbol is displayed, compared to the length of the variable time of the first symbol variable display determined by the variable time determining means in the first game state. There may be cases where the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol fluctuation display is not longer.

  Also, the change time of the second symbol change display in which only the small hit symbol is displayed, rather than the length of the change time of the first symbol change display determined by the change time determination means in the first game state. The length may be longer, and a symbol other than the small hit symbol is displayed than the length of the variation time of the first symbol variation display determined by the variation time determination means in the first game state. The length of the change time of the second symbol change display may be longer.

In the small hitting game state, right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed. [For example, as shown in FIG. Is easier to win the second variable winning opening 235a],
In the first game state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, a certain state after the small hit game state ends. In the period [for example, 30 seconds or the like], a display for prompting the player to make a left-hand operation is not displayed [for example, as shown in 20 (a), in the normal game state, for 30 seconds after the small hitting game ends, Even if you make a right-handed hit, you will not see a warning prompting you to make a left-handed hit, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the small hitting game state, only the right-handed player may be more advantageous to the player than the left-handed player. May be advantageous to In addition, in the small hitting game state, right-handed may be always more advantageous to the player than left-handed, and in the small hitting game state, right-handed is less advantageous than left-handed for the player. There may be.

  Also, only in the small hitting game state, right-handed may be more advantageous to the player than left-handed, and even in a game state other than the small hitting game state, right-handed may be more advantageous than left-handed. May be advantageous to

  Further, in the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hitting gaming state, in a certain period after the small hitting gaming state ends, It is not necessary to display only a display that prompts the player to make a left hit, or in the first game state, when a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, During a certain period after the small hitting game state ends, a display other than a display urging the player to make a left-hand operation may not be displayed. Further, in the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hitting gaming state, in a certain period after the small hitting gaming state ends, A display that prompts the player to make a left hit may not always be displayed, or in the first game state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, During a certain period after the small hitting game state ends, a display for urging the player to make a left hit may be displayed.

  Also, in the first gaming state, if the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hitting gaming state, only in a certain period after the small hitting gaming state ends. In the case where the display for prompting the player to make a left hit may not be displayed, or in the first game state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hit game state, Even during a period other than a certain period after the small hitting game state ends, a display urging the player to make a left-handed operation may not be displayed.

  Also, in the first gaming state, only when a small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hitting gaming state, for a certain period after the small hitting gaming state ends, A display that prompts the player to make a left hit may not be displayed, or in the first game state, except when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and the state shifts to the small hit game state. Alternatively, a display that prompts the player to make a leftward hit may not be displayed for a certain period after the small hitting game state ends.

  In addition, only in the first gaming state, when the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display and shifts to the small hitting gaming state, in a certain period after the small hitting gaming state ends, The display for prompting the player to make a left hit may not be displayed, and even in a game state other than the first game state, the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, and the state shifts to the small hit game state. In such a case, a display that prompts the player to make a left-hand operation may not be displayed for a certain period after the small hitting game state ends.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] capable of executing a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special figure display device 214 or the like] capable of executing a second symbol variation display;
A game control means (for example, CPU 304 or the like of main control unit 300) capable of controlling any one of a plurality of game states;
A certain gate (for example, a jackpot generating gate 252, etc.) through which a game ball can enter;
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming table with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are performed simultaneously [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a special figure low probability general figure low probability state or the like],
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a special figure high probability state general figure low probability state or the like],
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a variation display of a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 21 (b) to 22 (x). Effect display (decorative design fluctuation effect display), etc.]
The symbol variation effect display is a display including a variation display of a decorative symbol,
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. In the figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, the decoration design fluctuation effect display is started in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, etc.],
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display according to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (b) to 43 (e), In the special figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, the decorative design fluctuation effect display is not started in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, etc.],
After the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, a period during which the big hit occurrence gate monitoring state is effective from t83 to t85 in FIG. 39] is started,
Even after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the certain period is started,
When a game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, a big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 39, during a period in which the big hit occurrence gate monitoring state shown from t83 to t85 is valid, the time shown at t84 When the game ball passes the big hit generation gate 252 at the timing, the big hit game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is a big hit display [for example, a big hit start effect shown in FIG. 41 (i) or the like].
One of the plurality of displays is a gate entry promotion display [for example, a display that promotes passing through the big hit generation gate 252, such as "right-click and pass through the big hit generation gate!" Shown in FIG. 41 (j). Etc.]
The gate entry promotion display is a display that prompts a game ball to enter the certain gate,
In the first game state, the big hit display is displayed after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as the “first In the case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (h) to (j), the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2 and then the big hit start effect is displayed, and then the passage of the big hit generating gate 252 is promoted. Is displayed, etc.] ").)
In the first gaming state, when the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the big hit display after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means (hereinafter, referred to as a "second In the case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 42 (d) to (f), the passing of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is promoted without displaying the big hit start effect after the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2. Is displayed, etc.]]).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may always execute the first symbol variation display, or may not always execute the first symbol variation display.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may be one that does not always execute the second symbol variation display.

  Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only one of the plurality of game states, or may be capable of controlling other than any one of the plurality of game states. In addition, the game control means may always control one of the plurality of game states, or may not control one of the plurality of game states.

  In addition, a certain gate may be such that only game balls can enter, or may be something other than game balls. Further, a certain gate may be a gate where a game ball always enters, or a gate where a game ball may not enter.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may be one that does not always display a plurality of displays.

  Also, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display May also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be performed simultaneously, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be performed simultaneously. May not be.

  In addition, only the first symbol variation display may be performed, only the second symbol variation display may be performed, or the first symbol variation display and the first symbol variation display may be performed. Both the second symbol variation display may be performed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be performed at the same time.

  The game control means may be capable of controlling only the first game state and the second game state, or may be capable of controlling game states other than the first game state and the second game state. It may be. Further, the game control means may always control the first game state and the second game state, or may not control the first game state and the second game state. You may.

  The second gaming state may be a gaming state partially different from the first gaming state, or may be a gaming state entirely different from the first gaming state.

  Also, the symbol variation effect display may include only the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may include a display other than the variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the symbol variation effect display may include a variation display of a decoration symbol, or may not include a variation display of a decoration symbol.

  In the first gaming state, only the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display starts. Other than the symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to this. Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display starts. There may be a case where the symbol fluctuation effect display is not started according to the operation.

  Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display starts. The design fluctuation effect display may be started in response to a thing other than that performed.

  In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, other than the first symbol variation display. The design variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the design variation display.

  Further, in the first gaming state, only the symbol variation effect display according to the start of the second symbol variation display need not be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is not displayed. It is not necessary to start anything other than the symbol fluctuation effect display according to the start. Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display according to the start of the second symbol variation display does not necessarily have to be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is not displayed. The design fluctuation effect display according to the start may be started.

  Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display may not be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is not performed. The design fluctuation effect display according to the thing other than the start may not be started.

  Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display according to the start of only the second symbol variation display may not be started, and in the first gaming state, other than the second symbol variation display. The symbol variation effect display according to the start of the symbol variation display may not be started.

  Further, only a certain period may be started after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may be always started after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a certain period is not started after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. There may be cases.

  Also, a certain period may be started only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, or a certain period may be started other than after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means. May be done.

  Further, only a certain period may be started after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or a period other than a certain period after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. May also be started. Further, a certain period may be always started after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or a certain period is not started after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. There may be cases.

  Further, a certain period may be started only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or a certain period may be started even after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. May be done.

  Also, only a big hit game may be started when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period, or a game other than the big hit game may be started when a game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period. . In addition, when a game ball enters a certain gate during a certain period, a big hit game may be started without fail, or when a game ball enters a certain gate during a certain period, a big hit game may not be started. .

  In addition, a big hit game may be started when a game ball enters only a certain gate in a certain period, or a big hit game may be started when a game ball enters a gate other than a certain gate in a certain period. .

  Also, a jackpot game may be started when a game ball enters a certain gate only during a certain period, or a big hit game may be started when a game ball enters a certain gate during a period other than a certain period. Good.

  The big hit game may be started by satisfying a requirement other than that the game ball enters a certain gate in a certain period.

  Further, a certain gate may further have a function other than a function for starting a big hit game, for example, may further have a function for starting a change of a general map or a special map.

  Further, the gate entry promotion display may be one that only prompts the game ball to enter a certain gate, or may be one that prompts other than entry of the game ball to a certain gate. . Also, the gate entry promotion display may be one that always encourages the game ball to enter a certain gate, or may be one that does not always prompt the game ball to enter a certain gate. Good.

  Also, there is only the first case (in the first gaming state, the big hit display is displayed after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed). Or a case other than the first case. Also, the first case may be present, or the first case may not exist.

  Also, there is only the second case (in the first gaming state, the gate entry promotion display is displayed without the big hit display after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means). Alternatively, there may be cases other than the second case. Also, the second case may be present, or the second case may not exist.

In addition, one of the plurality of displays is a first standby effect display [for example, a display of a symbol demonstration shown in FIG.
One of the plurality of displays is a gate entry standby state display [for example, a display of a gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 41 (j) or the like].
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed,
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in a mode in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Including the display of the mode in which the pattern is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorations of "decoration 1"],
The gate entry standby state display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period,
In the first case, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the gate entry standby state display [for example, as shown in FIG. Etc. are superimposed on the display of the standby effect],
In the second case, the gate entry promotion display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the first standby effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. Etc. are superimposed on the symbol demo display],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol change display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the big hit game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be one that is always displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed, The first symbol change display may not be displayed in the first gaming state, and may not be displayed in the state where the big hit game is not executed.

  Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display of the mode in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, or may include the display other than the display of the mode in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Is also good. Further, the first standby effect display may necessarily include a display in a mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include a display in a mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

  The gate entry standby state display may be displayed only during a certain period, or may be displayed during a period other than a certain period. The gate entry standby state display may be always displayed during a certain period, or may not be displayed during a certain period.

  Further, in the first case, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed so as to overlap only with the gate entry standby state display, and in the first case, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed on a display other than the gate entry standby state display. They may be displayed in an overlapping manner. Also, in the first case, the gate entry promotion display may be always displayed over the gate entry standby state display, and in the first case, the gate entry promotion display is not displayed over the gate entry standby state display. There may be cases.

  Also, in the second case, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed so as to overlap only with the first standby production display, and in the second case, the gate entry promotion display is a display other than the first standby production display. May be displayed in an overlapping manner. Also, in the second case, the gate entry promotion display may always be displayed so as to be superimposed on the first standby production display, or in the second case, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby production display. It may not be displayed.

In addition, one of the plurality of displays is a second standby effect display [for example, an animation demonstration display shown in FIG. 41 (d)].
The second standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed,
The second standby effect display is a display different from the first standby effect display,
After the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display [for example, in FIGS. 41 (c) to 41 (d)]. As shown, the display has changed from the display of the symbol demo to the display of the animation demo, etc.],
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Does not include the indication of the aspect of
In the first game state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means in a state where the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second standby effect display may be displayed only in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol change display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the big hit game is not executed. In addition, the second standby effect display, the first symbol change display is not executed in the first game state, may be always displayed in a state where the big hit game is not executed, The first symbol change display may not be displayed in the first gaming state, and may not be displayed in the state where the big hit game is not executed.

  The second standby effect display may be partially different from the first standby effect display, or may be entirely different from the first standby effect display.

  Also, after the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display is displayed. Later, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second standby effect display. Further, the display may always be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display may be performed after the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may not be switched from the one standby effect display to the second standby effect display.

  Also, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display only after the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display even at times other than after.

  Further, the second standby effect display may not include only the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include the display other than the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. There may be. Further, the second standby effect display may not necessarily include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

  Also, in the first game state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means in a state where the second standby effect display is displayed, even if only the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. Also, in the first game state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means in a state where the second standby effect display is displayed, other than the display of the gate entry promotion display is also started. It is not necessary. Also, in the first game state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means in a state where the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is not necessarily started. Also, in the first game state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means in a state where the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display may be started. There may be.

  Also, in the first game state, even if the big hit symbol is displayed only on the second symbol display means while the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. In the first game state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed other than the second symbol display means while the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. Is also good.

  Also, in the first gaming state, even if the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means only in a state where the second standby effect display is displayed, even if the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. Also, in the first game state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means even in a state other than the state where the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is started. It is not necessary.

  Also, in the first game state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means in a state where only the second standby effect display is displayed, even if the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. In the first game state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means in a state where a display other than the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is started. It is not necessary.

  Also, only in the first gaming state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means in a state where the second standby effect display is displayed, even if the display of the gate entry promotion display is not started. Also, in a game state other than the first game state, even if a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means in a state where the second standby effect display is displayed, the display of the gate entry promotion display is started. It does not have to be done.

In addition, "when the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display after the second standby effect display is displayed (hereinafter," third case [for example, FIG. g) to (h), the display is switched from the display of the animation demo to the display of the symbol demo, etc.] ”).
In the third case, when the gate entry promotion display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the first standby effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth case [for example, FIGS. 44 (g) to 44 (h)]). As shown in the figure, when the display of the animation demo is switched to the display of the symbol demo, a display for facilitating the passage of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is displayed over the display of the symbol demo. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, there may be only the third case (the case where the display switches from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display after the second standby effect display is displayed), or the third case. There may be cases other than g. Also, there may be a third case, or there may be no third case.

  In addition, there may be only the fourth case (in the third case, the case where the gate entry promotion display is displayed over the first standby effect display), or there may be cases other than the fourth case. You may. In addition, the fourth case may always exist, or the fourth case may not exist.

Further, in the fourth case, the display does not switch from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 44 (g) to 44 (h). When the display that promotes the passage of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is displayed over the symbol demo display when the display is switched from the animation demo display to the symbol demo display, the display switches from the symbol demo display to the animation demo display. Not switch, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the fourth case, the display does not need to be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, and in the fourth case, the second standby effect display can be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display. The display does not need to be switched to a display other than the standby effect display. Also, in the fourth case, the display does not necessarily need to be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, and in the fourth case, the first standby effect display is switched to the second standby effect display. The display may be switched to the standby effect display in some cases.

  Also, only in the fourth case, the display does not have to be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display. The display may not be switched to the second standby effect display.

In addition, it is provided with an operation means [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 190, etc.] provided at a position where the operation can be performed by the player,
One of the plurality of displays is a setting display [for example, a setting screen display shown in FIGS. 45 (c) to 45 (d)].
The setting display is a display including a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options,
The setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 45 (a) to FIG. ), When the effect button 136 is operated once during the display of the symbol demonstration, the display of the setting screen is displayed, etc.],
Even when the certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display is not displayed at least after the certain period is started [ For example, as shown in FIG. 39, after the condition device is operated (at least after the big hit occurrence gate monitoring state is enabled), the menu display (display of the setting screen) is prohibited, and the setting screen is displayed. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position operable by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position operable by the player. The operation means may be provided at a position operable by the player, or may not be provided at a position operable by the player.

  Further, the setting display may include only a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or instruct to select one option from a plurality of options. A display other than the display may be included. In addition, the setting display may always include a display instructing to select one option from among a plurality of options, or it may be necessary to select one option from among a plurality of options. May not include the same display.

  In addition, when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is displayed, only the setting display may be displayed, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. When a certain operation is performed by the operation unit in a state where the setting is performed, a display other than the setting display may be displayed. In addition, when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is being displayed, the setting display may always be displayed, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. In some cases, the setting display may not be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit.

  In addition, the setting display may be displayed only when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display may be displayed. The setting display may be displayed in a state other than when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit in a state where the setting is performed.

  Also, the setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit only in a state where the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display is displayed. The setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit in a state other than the state in which the setting is performed.

  In addition, a setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while only the first standby effect display is displayed, or a setting other than the first standby effect display may be performed. The setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the display is being displayed.

  Further, even when a certain operation is performed by the operating unit in a state where the first standby effect display is displayed, even if only the setting display is not displayed at least after a certain period is started. Also, even when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is being displayed, displays other than the setting display are also displayed at least after a certain period is started. It is not necessary. Further, even when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is being displayed, even if the setting display is not necessarily displayed at least after a certain period has been started. Also, even when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is being displayed, a setting display may be displayed at least after a certain period has started. There may be.

  Further, even when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is being displayed, the setting display may not be displayed only at least after a certain period is started. However, even when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is being displayed, even if the setting display is not displayed except after at least a certain period has started. Good.

  Further, even when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit only in a state where the first standby effect display is displayed, even if the setting display is not displayed at least after a certain period is started. Also, even if a certain operation is performed by the operating means in a state other than the state in which the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display is displayed at least after a certain period is started. It is not necessary.

  In addition, even if a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display may not be displayed after a certain period is started. Even if a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is being displayed, the setting display may not be displayed before a certain period is started. .

Also, it is possible to start a small hit game after a small hit symbol [for example, “special figure g” or the like] is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display [for example, as shown in FIG. After the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol at the timing of t53, the small hit game is started at the timing of t54, etc.],
The setting display is displayed when the certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is displayed during the execution of the small hit game [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 1 (e), when the effect button 136 is operated once while the symbol demonstration is being displayed during the small hit game, a setting screen is displayed, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the small hit game may be started after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or the small hit symbol may be displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. A game other than the small hit game may be started later. In addition, the small hitting game may be always started after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or the small hit game is displayed after the small hit symbol is displayed as the result of the second symbol change display. The game may not be started in some cases.

  Also, the small hitting game may be started only after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. Alternatively, a small hit game may be started.

  Also, the small hitting game may be started after only the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or a symbol other than the small hit symbol may be displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. The small hitting game may be able to be started even after it is done.

  In addition, when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is displayed during the execution of the small hitting game, only the setting display may be displayed, or the execution of the small hitting game may be performed. When a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is displayed, a display other than the setting display may be displayed. In addition, when a certain operation is performed by the operating means while the first standby effect display is being displayed during the execution of the small hit game, the setting display may be always displayed, or the small hit game may be executed. In some cases, the setting display may not be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is being displayed.

  In addition, the setting display may be displayed only when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is displayed during the execution of the small hit game, or the execution of the small hit game The setting display may also be displayed in a state other than when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the first standby effect display is being displayed.

  In addition, the setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means only in the state where the first standby effect display is displayed during the execution of the small hit game, or the execution of the small hit game In a state other than the state in which the first standby effect display is displayed, the setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit.

  In addition, a setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating unit in a state where the first standby effect display is displayed only during the execution of the small hit game, or the execution of the small hit game A setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit in a state where the first standby effect display is displayed other than in the middle.

In addition, one of the plurality of displays is a right-handed display [for example, a right-handed display or the like displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen shown in FIG. 46 (1c)].
The right-handed display is a display that prompts the player to right-hand,
During the execution of the small hitting game, the right-handed display may be displayed over the first standby effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. When started, a right-handed display will be displayed on top of the symbol demo display, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the right-handed display may prompt the player to make only a right-handed operation, or may prompt the player to do something other than right-handed. In addition, the right-handed display may always prompt the player to make a right-handed operation, or may not always prompt the player to make a right-handed operation.

  Also, during execution of the small hit game, only the right-handed display may be displayed over the first standby effect display, or may be displayed on the first standby effect display during the execution of the small hit game. A display other than the right-handed display may be displayed. Also, during execution of the small hit game, a right-handed display may be always displayed over the first standby effect display, or during execution of the small hit game, a right-handed display may be displayed over the first standby effect display. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, only during the execution of the small hit game, a right-handed display may be displayed over the first standby effect display, or the first standby effect display may be displayed other than during the execution of the small hit game. The right-handed display may be displayed again.

In addition, one of the plurality of displays is a right-handed display [for example, a right-handed display or the like displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen shown in FIG. 46 (1c)].
The right-handed display is a display that prompts the player to right-hand,
In the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a certain time [for example, a big hit start wait time (big hit start effect period) shown at t82 to t83 in FIG. 39) and the like] After the time has elapsed, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 42 (d) to (f), the special figure 2 is displayed during the symbol demonstration. After the stop display with the big hit symbol, when the big hit start effect period elapses and the gate enters the standby state, a display that promotes the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed over the display of the symbol demonstration, etc.],
In the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the right-handed display is displayed on the first standby effect display [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 11E, when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol during the symbol demonstration, when the big hit start effect period starts, a right-handed display is displayed over the display of the symbol demo, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the right-handed display may prompt the player to make only a right-handed operation, or may prompt the player to do something other than right-handed. In addition, the right-handed display may always prompt the player to make a right-handed operation, or may not always prompt the player to make a right-handed operation.

  Also, in the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, after a certain time has elapsed, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed so as to overlap only the first standby effect display. In the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, after a certain period of time, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the display other than the first standby effect display. It may be displayed. Further, in the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, after a certain time has elapsed, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed so as to always overlap the first standby effect display. In the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display may not be displayed over the first standby effect display after a certain period of time has elapsed. There may be.

  Also, in the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, after a certain time has elapsed, only the gate entry promotion display may be displayed so as to overlap the first standby effect display. In the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, after a certain time has elapsed, displays other than the gate entry promotion display are also superimposed on the first standby effect display. May be done.

  Further, in the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed over the first standby effect display only after a certain time has elapsed. In the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display is displayed so as to overlap the first standby effect display even after a certain time has elapsed. Is also good.

  In the second case, only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, after a certain period of time, the gate entry promotion display is displayed so as to overlap the first standby effect display. Alternatively, in the second case, other than after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, after a certain period of time, the gate entry promotion display is superimposed on the first standby effect display. It may be displayed.

  Also, only in the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, after a certain time has passed, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed so as to overlap the first standby effect display. Also, even in cases other than the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, after a certain time has elapsed, the gate entry promotion display is displayed over the first standby effect display. May be done.

  In the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, only the right-handed display may be displayed over the first standby effect display, or in the second case, After the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a display other than the right-handed display may be displayed on top of the first standby effect display. Further, in the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the right-handed display may be always displayed on the first standby effect display, or in the second case, After the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the right-handed display may not be displayed over the first standby effect display.

  Further, in the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the right-handed display may be displayed only on the first standby effect display, and in the second case, After the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a right-handed display may be displayed on the display other than the first standby effect display.

  Further, in the second case, the right-handed display may be displayed over the first standby effect display only after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or in the second case, A right-handed display may be displayed on top of the first standby effect display even after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means.

  Further, in the second case, the right-handed display may be displayed over the first standby effect display after only the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, or in the second case, After a symbol other than the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a right-handed display may be displayed over the first standby effect display.

  Also, only in the second case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a right-handed display may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the first standby effect display, or other than the second case. Even in this case, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a right-handed display may be displayed so as to overlap the first standby effect display.

Also, “The gate entry standby state display is a display that can be displayed in one of a plurality of types of display modes [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (j) and FIG. There are multiple types of displays for the gate entry standby effect, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the gate entry standby state display may be one that can be displayed only in one of a plurality of display modes, or a display mode other than one of the plurality of display modes. However, it may be a displayable one. Further, the gate entry standby state display may be always displayed in one of a plurality of display modes, or may not be displayed in one of the plurality of display modes. There may be some.

Also, "one of the plurality of displays is a jackpot notice display,
As the certain big hit notice display, a first big hit notice display [for example, a big hit notice display in which characters of "big hit approaching!" Shown in FIGS. 36 (1f) to (1g) are displayed) is displayed. May be
As the certain big hit notice display, a second big hit notice display [for example, a big hit notice display in which characters of “big hit ready!” Shown in FIGS. 35D to 35G are displayed] is displayed. May be
The second big hit notice display is a display different from the first big hit notice display,
In some cases, a first big hit display [for example, a big hit start effect display in which characters of "challenge big hit" shown in FIG. 42 (i) are displayed) is displayed as the big hit display.
In some cases, a second big hit display [for example, a big hit start effect display in which characters of "big chance big hit" shown in FIG. 42 (i ') are displayed] is displayed as the big hit display,
In the second gaming state, the symbol fluctuation effect display is started in response to the start of the second symbol fluctuation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 24, in the special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state When the design change of the special figure 2 is started, the change display of the decorative design is started, etc.],
In the second gaming state, the symbol variation effect display according to the start of the first symbol variation display is not started [for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 36 (2c) to (2d), In the special figure high-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, even if the design change of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol change display is not started.],
In the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol change display is started during the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 11 (j), in the special figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started while the special figure 2 is changing, the character "Preparing for the big hit !!" When the special figure 2 big hit notice is displayed and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2, a big hit start effect in which the character of "challenge big hit" is displayed is performed, and thereafter, "waiting for big hit!" ”Is displayed and a gate entry waiting effect is performed. And it is equal],
In the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol change display is started during the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the second big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed [for example, FIG. As shown in FIGS. (H), (i ′) and (j ′), in the special figure low-probability normal-figure low-probability state, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 starts during the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 2. When this is done, the special figure 2 big hit notice which displays the character of “big hit preparation !!” is started, when the big hit design is stopped and indicated in special figure 2, the character of “big chance big hit” is displayed The big hit start effect is performed, and then the words "Waiting for a big chance!" Etc. in which the gate entering standby production is being carried out to be],
In the second game state, when the execution of the second symbol change display is started during the execution of the first symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and thereafter the gate entry promotion display may be displayed [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. (1i), in the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, when the variation display of the special figure 2 is started while the special figure 1 is changing, the character “Big hit approaching !!” The special figure 1 big hit notice to be displayed is started, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure 1, a big hit start effect in which the character of "challenge big hit" is displayed is performed, and thereafter, "waiting for big hit! "Is displayed on the gate Etc. that we],
In the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the certain big hit notice display is displayed. There is a case where a big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means without the big hit, and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the big hit display [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 2F, in the special figure high-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, if the change display of the special figure 2 is not started before the change of the special figure 1 is completed, the special figure 1 big hit notice is started. The big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 without being displayed, and then a display for facilitating the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 during the symbol demonstration is displayed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the first big hit notice may be displayed as a certain big hit notice, or a display other than the first big hit notice may be displayed as a big hit notice. You may. Further, the first big hit notice display may be always displayed as a certain big hit notice display, or the first big hit notice display may not be displayed as a certain big hit notice display.

  Also, only the second big hit notice display may be displayed as a certain big hit notice display, or a display other than the second big hit notice display may be displayed as a certain big hit notice display. Is also good. Further, the second big hit notice display may be always displayed as a certain big hit notice display, or the second big hit notice display may not be displayed as a certain big hit notice display.

  Further, the second big jackpot notice display may be partially different from the first big jackpot notice display, or may be entirely different.

  Further, only the first big hit display may be displayed as the big hit display, or a display other than the first big hit display may be displayed as the big hit display. The first big hit display may be always displayed as the big hit display, or the first big hit display may not be displayed as the big hit display.

  Further, only the second big hit display may be displayed as the big hit display, or a display other than the second big hit display may be displayed as the big hit display. The second big hit display may be always displayed as the big hit display, or the second big hit display may not be displayed as the big hit display.

  In the second gaming state, only the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, or in the second gaming state, the second symbol variation display starts. A display other than the symbol fluctuation effect display may be started in response to this. In the second gaming state, the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, or in the second gaming state, the second symbol variation display starts. There may be a case where the symbol fluctuation effect display is not started according to the operation.

  Further, in the second gaming state, the symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display, or in the second gaming state, the second symbol variation display starts. The design fluctuation effect display may be started in response to a thing other than that performed.

  In the second game state, only the symbol fluctuation effect display according to the start of the first symbol fluctuation display need not be started, and in the second game state, the first symbol fluctuation display starts. The display other than the symbol fluctuation effect display according to the performed may not be started. Further, in the second gaming state, the symbol variation effect display according to the start of the first symbol variation display does not necessarily have to be started, and in the second gaming state, the first symbol variation display is not displayed. The design fluctuation effect display according to the start may be started.

  Further, in the second gaming state, the symbol variation effect display corresponding to only the start of the first symbol variation display need not be started, and in the second gaming state, the first symbol variation display is not performed. The design fluctuation effect display according to the thing other than the start may not be started.

  In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and thereafter only the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. May be displayed, followed by a display other than the gate entry promotion display. In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be always displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol is displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and when the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first symbol is displayed. There may be a case where the big hit display is displayed and then the gate entry promotion display is not displayed.

  In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and the gate entry promotion display may be displayed only after that, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. And a first big hit display may be displayed, and a gate entry promotion display may be displayed other than after that.

  In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, only the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. And a display other than the first big hit display may be displayed, and then a gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When only the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and a symbol other than the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the first gaming state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, only the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, a display other than the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the first gaming state, if only the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. Is displayed, when the execution of the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, a second big hit notice display is displayed, and the second symbol display means displays a big hit. When the symbol is displayed, the first big hit display may be displayed, and thereafter the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. Is displayed, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started other than during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. Then, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, only in the first gaming state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a first big hit display may be displayed, and then a gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or a gaming state other than the first gaming state. Also, when the execution of the first symbol change display is started during the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol display means When the symbol is displayed, the first big hit display may be displayed, and thereafter the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the second big hit display may be displayed, and thereafter only the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. And a second big hit display may be displayed, followed by a display other than the gate entry promotion display. In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the second big hit display is displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be always displayed, or the big hit symbol is displayed in the first game state. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and when the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the second big hit symbol is displayed. There may be a case where the big hit display is displayed and then the gate entry promotion display is not displayed.

  In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the second big hit display may be displayed, and the gate entry promotion display may be displayed only after that, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. And a second big hit display may be displayed, and a gate entry promotion display may be displayed other than after that.

  In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, only the second big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. And a display other than the second big hit display may be displayed, followed by a gate entry promotion display.

  In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When only the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the second big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and a symbol other than the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the second big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed only on the symbol display means, the second big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and a big hit is displayed on the symbol display means other than the second symbol display means. When the symbol is displayed, the second big hit display may be displayed, and thereafter, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the first gaming state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, only the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the second big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, a display other than the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the second big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the first game state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the second big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the first gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. Is displayed, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started other than during the execution of the second symbol variation display, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. Then, the second big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, only in the first gaming state, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, When a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a second big hit display may be displayed, and then a gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or a gaming state other than the first gaming state. Also, when the execution of the first symbol change display is started during the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol display means When the symbol is displayed, the second big hit display may be displayed, and thereafter, the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the second gaming state, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed and thereafter only the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the second gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, and the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. May be displayed, followed by a display other than the gate entry promotion display. In addition, in the second gaming state, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be always displayed, or the big hit symbol is displayed in the second game state. When the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first big hit notice display is displayed, and when the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first symbol is displayed. There may be a case where the big hit display is displayed and then the gate entry promotion display is not displayed.

  In addition, in the second gaming state, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed only after that, or in the second game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, and the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. And a first big hit display may be displayed, and a gate entry promotion display may be displayed other than after that.

  In addition, in the second gaming state, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, only the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the second game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, and the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. And a display other than the first big hit display may be displayed, and then a gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the second gaming state, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, When only the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the second game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, and a symbol other than the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the second gaming state, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed only on the symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the second game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. Is displayed, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first big hit notice display is displayed, and the big hit is displayed on the symbol display means other than the second symbol display means. When the symbol is displayed, the first big hit display may be displayed, and thereafter the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the second game state, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, only the first big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the second game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the second symbol change display is started during the execution of the first symbol change display, a display other than the first big hit notice display is displayed, and the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the second game state, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the second game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. Is displayed, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started other than during the execution of the first symbol variation display, the first big hit notice display is displayed, and the big symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. Then, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the second gaming state, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which only the big hit symbol is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, When the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or in the second game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which symbols other than the symbol are displayed, the first jackpot notice display is displayed, and the large symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means. When it is displayed, the first big hit display may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  Also, only in the second gaming state, when the execution of the second symbol variation display is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, When a big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, a first big hit display may be displayed, and then a gate entry promotion display may be displayed, or a gaming state other than the second gaming state Also, when the execution of the second symbol change display is started during the execution of the first symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first big hit notice display is displayed, and the second symbol display means When the symbol is displayed, the first big hit display may be displayed, and thereafter the gate entry promotion display may be displayed.

  Also, in the second gaming state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. The big hit symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means, and thereafter only the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without the big hit display being displayed, or the big hit symbol may be displayed in the second game state. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which is displayed, a big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means without a certain jackpot notice display being displayed. It may be displayed, and then a display other than the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the big hit display. Also, in the second gaming state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. The big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be always displayed without the big hit display being displayed, or the big hit symbol is displayed in the second game state. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display is completed, the big symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means without displaying a certain jackpot notice display, and thereafter There may be a case where the gate entry promotion display is not displayed without displaying the big hit display.

  Also, in the second gaming state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. A big hit symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying only the big hit display, or in the second game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which is displayed, a big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means without a certain jackpot notice display being displayed. May be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying a display other than the big hit display.

  Also, in the second gaming state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. The big hit symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means, and the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without the big hit display only thereafter, or in the second gaming state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which is displayed, a big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means without a certain jackpot notice display being displayed. It may be displayed, and the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display other than after that.

  Also, in the second gaming state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. There may be a case where only the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, and thereafter the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the big hit display, or in the second game state, the big hit symbol If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which is displayed, a certain big hit notice display is not displayed and the first symbol display means other than the big symbol is displayed. May be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the big hit display.

  Also, in the second gaming state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. There is a case where the big hit symbol is displayed only on the first symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the big hit display, or in the second game state, the big hit symbol If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started by the time the execution of the first symbol variation display is completed, a symbol display other than the first symbol display means is not displayed without displaying a certain big hit notice display. The jackpot design may be displayed on the means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display.

  Further, in the second gaming state, if the execution of the second symbol change display is not started before the execution of the first symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, only a certain big hit notice display is displayed. The big hit symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means without the big hit symbol, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without the big hit symbol being displayed. In the second game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display is displayed, a display other than a certain big hit notice display is not displayed on the first symbol display means. The big hit symbol may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the big hit display.

  Further, in the second gaming state, a certain jackpot notice display is displayed unless the execution of the second symbol change display is started only until the execution of the first symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed is completed. The big hit symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means without the big hit symbol, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without the big hit symbol being displayed. In the second game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. Is displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started other than until the execution of the first symbol variation display is finished, a big hit notification is not displayed and a big hit is displayed on the first symbol display means. The symbol may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the big hit display.

  Further, in the second game state, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which only the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain big hit notice display is displayed. The big hit symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means without the big hit symbol, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without the big hit symbol being displayed. In the second game state, the big hit symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started until the execution of the first symbol variation display in which symbols other than the symbol are displayed, a certain big hit notice display is not displayed on the first symbol display means if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started. The big hit symbol may be displayed, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the big hit display.

  Also, only in the second gaming state, if the execution of the second symbol change display is not started until the execution of the first symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain big hit notice display is displayed. A big hit symbol may be displayed on the first symbol display means without a hit, and then a gate entry promotion display may be displayed without a big hit display being displayed, or a gaming state other than the second gaming state Also, if the execution of the second symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first symbol display without a certain jackpot notice display is displayed. The jackpot design may be displayed on the means, and then the gate entry promotion display may be displayed without displaying the jackpot display.

In addition, "One of the plurality of displays is a big hit notice display [for example, a big hit in which characters of" big hit ready! "Shown in FIGS. 35 (d) to (g) are displayed. Notice notice etc.]
When the certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the first case occurs [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (g) to (j). As described above, when the big hit notice display in which the character "Preparing for big hit!" Is displayed during the big hit change of the special figure 2, the big hit start effect is displayed after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2. Is started, and thereafter, a display for facilitating the passage of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is displayed],
If the certain jackpot notice display is not displayed before the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the second case is assumed [for example, FIG. 42 (a) to FIG. As shown in), if the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is not started before the change of the big hit of the special figure 2 is finished, the big hit notice display in which the character of "big hit preparation!" Is displayed is not displayed. Even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special map 2, the big hit start effect is not performed, and a display for promoting the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed on the symbol demo display, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, it may be the first case that only a certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, or a second case where the big hit symbol is displayed. The first case may be that a display other than a certain big hit notice display is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display. Also, the first case may be the case where a certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, or a second symbol in which the big hit symbol is displayed. If a certain jackpot notice is displayed during the execution of the variable display, the first case may not be the case.

  Further, the first case may be the case where a certain jackpot notice display is displayed only during the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, or a second symbol in which the big hit symbol is displayed The first case may be that a certain big hit notice display is displayed other than during the execution of the variable display.

  In addition, the first case may be the case where a certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the second symbol change display in which only the big hit symbol is displayed, or a second symbol in which a symbol other than the big hit symbol is displayed. The first case may be that a certain jackpot notice display is displayed during the execution of the second symbol change display.

  In addition, the second case may be such that only a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed before the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, or a second case where the big hit symbol is displayed. The second case may be such that a display other than a certain big hit notice display is not displayed until the execution of the symbol variation display of the above is completed. In addition, the second case may be the case where a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed before the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, or the second case where the big hit symbol is displayed. The second case may not be achieved unless a certain jackpot notice display is displayed before the execution of the symbol variation display is completed.

  Further, the second case may be such that a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed only until the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, or a second where the big hit symbol is displayed. The second case may be such that a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed other than until the execution of the symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the second case may be such that a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed before the execution of the second symbol change display in which only the big hit symbol is displayed, or a symbol other than the big hit symbol is displayed. The second case may be such that a certain jackpot notice display is not displayed until the execution of the second symbol variation display is completed.

In addition, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the certain big hit notice display is displayed [for example, FIG. As shown in FIGS. f) to (g), when the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started during the change of the big hit of the special figure 2, the big hit notice display in which the character of "big hit is being prepared!" is displayed. Is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the execution of the first symbol change display is started during the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, only a certain big hit notice display may be displayed, or the big hit symbol is displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, a display other than a certain big hit notice display may be displayed. In addition, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed without fail, or the large hit symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display, a certain big hit notice display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started only during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed, or the large hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started other than during the execution of the second symbol variation display, a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed.

  In addition, when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which only the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain big hit notice display may be displayed, or a symbol other than the large hit symbol may be displayed. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display may be displayed.

In addition, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, the certain big hit notice display is not displayed [for example, FIG. As shown in (a) to (f), if the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is not started before the change of the big hit of the special figure 2 is completed, the big hit in which the character "Preparing for the big hit !!" is displayed is displayed. Notice notice is not displayed etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, only a certain big hit announcement display may not be displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the second symbol variation display on which the symbol is displayed, a display other than a certain big hit notice display may not be displayed. In addition, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain jackpot notice display may not necessarily be displayed, If the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, a certain big hit notice display may be displayed.

  Further, if the execution of the first symbol change display is not started only until the execution of the second symbol change display in which the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain big hit notice display may not be displayed, or the big hit symbol may be displayed. If the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started other than until the execution of the second symbol variation display in which is displayed, a certain big hit notice display may not be displayed.

  Further, if the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the second symbol variation display in which only the big hit symbol is displayed, a certain big hit announcement display may not be displayed, If the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started before the execution of the second symbol variation display in which symbols other than the symbol are displayed, a certain big hit notice display may not be displayed.

Also, the execution of the second symbol variation display, in which a big hit symbol is displayed during the execution of the first symbol variation display, in which a lost symbol is displayed, is started, and thereafter, the first symbol variation display ends. However, if the execution of the new first symbol variation display is not started, the second case is used instead of the first case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (g)]. In the meantime, the design change display of the special figure 2 which becomes a big hit during the change of the special figure 1 is started, and then the change of the special figure 1 ends, but thereafter, the design change display of the special figure 1 is not started. In the case, even if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special map 2, the big hit start effect is not performed, and a display for promoting the passing of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed on the symbol demo display, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the missing symbol is displayed, and then the first symbol variation display ends, When the execution of the new first symbol variation display is not started, it may be only the second case instead of the first case, or during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which a lost symbol is displayed. The execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed is started, and then the first symbol variation display ends, but if the execution of the new first symbol variation display is not started, the first symbol variation display is started. It may be a case other than the second case instead of the case. In addition, the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the missing symbol is displayed, and thereafter, the first symbol variation display is ended. When the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started, it may be the second case instead of the first case, or a big hit during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which a lost symbol is displayed The execution of the second symbol variation display in which the symbols are displayed is started, and then the first symbol variation display ends, but if the execution of the new first symbol variation display is not started, the first case Instead, the second case may not be the case.

  In addition, the execution of the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed is started during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which the missing symbol is displayed, and thereafter, the first symbol variation display is ended. Only when the execution of the first symbol variation display is not started, it may be the second case instead of the first case, or a big hit during the execution of the first symbol variation display in which a lost symbol is displayed The execution of the second symbol variation display in which the symbol is displayed is started, and then the first symbol variation display ends, but also in cases other than when the execution of the new first symbol variation display is not started, The second case may be used instead of the first case.

In addition, a first starting winning means (for example, a first special figure starting port (upper) 230, a first special figure starting port (lower) 231 and the like) which allows a game ball to enter is provided,
When a game ball enters the first start winning means, it is possible to start the execution of the first symbol change display,
When a game ball enters the first starting prize means in the certain period of the first game state, a certain notification [for example, by the sound of “Please right-click!” Shown in FIG. 47 (f)! Warning notification etc.] is started,
The certain information is information on how to hit,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first start winning means may be one in which only a game ball can enter, or one other than a game ball may enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which a game ball always enters, or one in which a game ball may not enter.

  Further, only the execution of the first symbol change display may be started when the game ball enters the first start winning unit, or the first symbol change display may be started when the game ball enters the first start winning unit. The execution of the symbol variation display other than the display may be started. In addition, the execution of the first symbol variation display may be started without fail when the game ball enters the first start winning means, or the first symbol variation display is performed when the game ball enters the first startup winning means. The execution may not be started in some cases.

  When the game ball enters only the first start winning means, the execution of the first symbol change display may be able to be started, or when the game ball enters the start winning means other than the first start winning means. Execution of the first symbol variation display may be started.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize means in a certain period of the first game state, only a certain notification may be started, or the first game may be started in a certain period of the first game state. When a game ball enters the starting winning means, notification other than certain notification may be started. Further, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means in a certain period of the first game state, a certain notification may be started without fail, or the first notification may be made in a certain period of the first game state. When the game ball enters the starting winning means, a certain notification may not be started in some cases.

  Further, when a game ball enters only the first start winning means in a certain period of the first game state, a certain notification may be started, or the first game may be started in a certain period of the first game state. When a game ball enters a prize means other than the start prize means, a certain notification may be started.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means only during a certain period of the first game state, a certain notification may be started, or during a period other than a certain period of the first game state. Also, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, a certain notification may be started.

  In addition, a certain notification may be related to only the way of hitting, or may include information related to something other than the way of hitting. In addition, a certain notification may be always related to the hitting method, or may be not always related to the hitting method.

In addition, the game machine includes a second starting winning means (for example, a second special figure starting port 232 or the like) into which a game ball can enter,
When a game ball enters the second start winning means, it is possible to start execution of the second symbol change display,
The certain notification is not started even if a game ball enters the second starting winning means in the certain period of the second game state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48 (d) to (f). Thus, even if the game ball enters the second special figure starting port 232 after the big hit occurrence gate monitoring state is reached, the warning is not issued, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second starting winning means may be such that only a game ball can enter, or something other than the game ball may enter. In addition, the second start winning means may be one in which a game ball always enters, or one in which a game ball may not be able to enter.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning means, only execution of the second symbol change display may be started, or when the game ball enters the second start winning means, the second symbol change is performed. The execution of the symbol variation display other than the display may be started. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start winning means, the execution of the second symbol change display may be started without fail, or when the game ball enters the second start winning means, the second symbol change display is displayed. The execution may not be started in some cases.

  When the game ball enters only the second start winning means, the execution of the second symbol change display may be started, or when the game ball enters the start winning means other than the second start winning means. The execution of the second symbol change display may be started.

  In addition, even if a game ball enters the second starting prize means in a certain period of the second game state, only a certain notification may not be started, or the first game may not be started in a certain period of the second game state. Even if a game ball enters the second starting winning means, notification other than certain notification may not be started. In addition, even if a game ball enters the second starting winning means in a certain period of the second game state, a certain notification does not necessarily have to be started, or a certain notification may be made in a certain period of the second game state. Even if a game ball enters the second starting winning means, a certain notification may be started.

  In addition, a certain notification may not be started even if a game ball enters only the second start winning means in a certain period of the second game state, or a certain notification may not be started in a certain period of the second game state. Even if the game ball enters a prize means other than the second start prize means, a certain notification does not have to be started.

  In addition, a certain notification may not be started even if a game ball enters the second starting prize means only during a certain period of the second game state, or other than a certain period of the second game state. Even during the period, even if a game ball enters the second starting winning means, a certain notification does not have to be started.

In addition, when the power is turned off and the power is restored during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and thereafter, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means, the certain notification is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to (e), when the power is cut off and the power is restored during the display of the jackpot generation gate monitoring state and the display for promoting the passage of the jackpot generation gate 252, The display that promotes the passage through the generation gate 252 is deleted, but when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 thereafter, a warning is issued, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, if the power is turned off and the power is restored during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then only a certain notification may be started when the game ball enters the first start winning means. If the power is turned off and the power is restored during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display may be erased, and thereafter, when a game ball enters the first starting prize means, a notification other than a certain notification may be started. Further, if the power is turned off and the power is restored during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then a certain notification may be necessarily started when the game ball enters the first startup winning means, If the power is turned off and the power is restored during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display may be erased, and then, if a game ball enters the first starting winning means, a certain notification may not be started.

  Further, if the power is turned off and the power is restored during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then a certain notification may be started when the game ball enters only the first start winning means, If the power is turned off or the power is restored during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and thereafter, when a game ball enters a prize means other than the first start prize means, a certain notification may be started.

  Further, if the power is turned off and the power is restored during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display is deleted, and only after that, a certain notification may be started when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, If the power is turned off and the power is restored during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and other than that, a certain notification may be started when the game ball enters the first starting winning means.

  Also, if the power is turned off and the power is restored during the display of the gate entry promotion display, only the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then a certain notification may be started when the game ball enters the first start winning means, If the power is turned off and the power is restored during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the display other than the gate entry promotion display is also erased, and then a certain notification may be started when the game ball enters the first starting winning means.

  Also, if the power is turned off and the power is restored only during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then a certain notification may be started when the game ball enters the first start winning means, If the power is turned off or the power is restored other than during the display of the gate entry promotion display, the gate entry promotion display is erased, and then a certain notification may be started when the game ball enters the first startup winning means.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] capable of executing a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special figure display device 214 or the like] capable of executing a second symbol variation display;
A game control means (for example, CPU 304 or the like of main control unit 300) capable of controlling any one of a plurality of game states;
First start winning means (for example, a first special figure starting port (upper) 230, a first special figure starting port (lower) 231, etc.) into which a game ball can enter;
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming table with
When a game ball enters the first start winning means, it is possible to start the execution of the first symbol change display,
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are performed simultaneously [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
The execution of the small hit game can be started after the small hit symbol [for example, “special figure g” or the like] is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display [for example, as shown in FIG. After the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol at the timing of t53, the small hit game is started at the timing of t54, etc.],
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a special figure low probability general figure low probability state or the like],
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a variation display of a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 21 (b) to 22 (x). Effect display (decorative design fluctuation effect display), etc.]
The symbol variation effect display is a display including a variation display of a decorative symbol,
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. In the figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, the decoration design fluctuation effect display is started in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, etc.],
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display according to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (b) to 43 (e), In the special figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, the decorative design fluctuation effect display is not started in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is a second standby effect display [for example, an animation demonstration display shown in FIG. 41 (d)].
The second standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed,
The second standby effect display is a display that does not include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Does not include the indication of the aspect of
The second standby effect display may be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game. [For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (f), the display of the animation demonstration is displayed during the small hit game. Etc.],
In the first gaming state, in a state where the small hitting game is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “first state”), the first start winning means is provided. Even if a game ball enters, the second standby effect display is continuously displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (f) to FIG. Even if a game ball is awarded to the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 in a state where the game is being executed, the variation display of the decorative pattern is not started, and the animation demonstration is continuously displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of executing only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may always execute the first symbol variation display, or may not always execute the first symbol variation display.

  Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of executing only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one that always executes the second symbol variation display, or may be one that does not always execute the second symbol variation display.

  Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only one of the plurality of game states, or may be capable of controlling other than any one of the plurality of game states. In addition, the game control means may always control one of the plurality of game states, or may not control one of the plurality of game states.

  Further, the first start winning means may be one in which only a game ball can enter, or one other than the game ball may enter. Further, the first starting winning means may be one in which a game ball always enters, or one in which a game ball may not enter.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of displays, or may be one that does not always display a plurality of displays.

  Further, only the execution of the first symbol change display may be started when the game ball enters the first start winning unit, or the first symbol change display may be started when the game ball enters the first start winning unit. The execution of the symbol variation display other than the display may be started. In addition, the execution of the first symbol variation display may be started without fail when the game ball enters the first start winning means, or the first symbol variation display is performed when the game ball enters the first startup winning means. The execution may not be started in some cases.

  When the game ball enters only the first start winning means, the execution of the first symbol change display may be able to be started, or when the game ball enters the start winning means other than the first start winning means. Execution of the first symbol variation display may be started.

  Also, only the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be executed at the same time, or other than both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display May also be executed at the same time. In addition, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may always be performed simultaneously, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may be performed simultaneously. May not be.

  In addition, only the first symbol variation display may be performed, only the second symbol variation display may be performed, or the first symbol variation display and the first symbol variation display may be performed. Both the second symbol variation display may be performed at the same time, or both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display may not be performed at the same time.

  Further, only the small hitting game may be started after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. A game other than the small hit game may be startable. In addition, the small hitting game may be always started after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or the small hit game is displayed after the small hit symbol is displayed as the result of the second symbol change display. The game may not be started in some cases.

  Also, the small hitting game may be started only after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or after the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. Alternatively, a small hit game may be started.

  Also, the small hitting game may be started after only the small hit symbol is displayed as a result of the second symbol change display, or a symbol other than the small hit symbol may be displayed as a result of the second symbol change display. The small hitting game may be able to be started even after it is done.

  The game control means may be capable of controlling only the first game state, or may be capable of controlling game states other than the first game state. Further, the game control means may be one that always controls the first game state, or may be one that does not always control the first game state.

  Also, the symbol variation effect display may include only the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may include a display other than the variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the symbol variation effect display may include a variation display of a decoration symbol, or may not include a variation display of a decoration symbol.

  In the first gaming state, only the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display starts. Other than the symbol variation effect display may also be started in response to this. Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display starts. There may be a case where the symbol fluctuation effect display is not started according to the operation.

  Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display may be started only in response to the start of the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, the first symbol variation display starts. The design fluctuation effect display may be started in response to a thing other than that performed.

  In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display may be started in response to the start of only the first symbol variation display, or in the first gaming state, other than the first symbol variation display. The design variation effect display may be started in response to the start of the design variation display.

  Further, in the first gaming state, only the symbol variation effect display according to the start of the second symbol variation display need not be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is not displayed. It is not necessary to start anything other than the symbol fluctuation effect display according to the start. Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display according to the start of the second symbol variation display does not necessarily have to be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is not displayed. The design fluctuation effect display according to the start may be started.

  Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display only in response to the start of the second symbol variation display may not be started, and in the first gaming state, the second symbol variation display is not performed. The design fluctuation effect display according to the thing other than the start may not be started.

  Further, in the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display according to the start of only the second symbol variation display may not be started, and in the first gaming state, other than the second symbol variation display. The symbol variation effect display according to the start of the symbol variation display may not be started.

  In addition, even if the second standby effect display may be displayed only in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed, Alternatively, the first symbol variation display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the big hit game is not executed. In addition, the second standby effect display, the first symbol change display is not executed in the first game state, may be always displayed in a state where the big hit game is not executed, The first symbol change display may not be displayed in the first gaming state, and may not be displayed in the state where the big hit game is not executed.

  Further, the second standby effect display may not include only the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include the display other than the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. There may be. Further, the second standby effect display may not necessarily include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may include the display of the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

  In addition, even during the execution of the small hit game, only the second standby effect display may be displayed, or even during the execution of the small hit game, a display other than the second standby effect display is also displayed. May be. Also, the second standby effect display may be always displayed even during the execution of the small hit game, or the second standby effect display may not be displayed even during the execution of the small hit game. Good.

  Also, only the second standby effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the small hit game, or only the second standby effect display may be displayed other than during the execution of the small hit game. May be present.

  In the first state (the state in which the small hitting game is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first gaming state), even if a game ball enters the first starting winning means. Only the second standby effect display may be continuously displayed, or even if a game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, a display other than the second standby effect display may be displayed. It may be displayed continuously. Also, in the first state, even when a game ball enters the first starting winning means, the second standby effect display may be continuously displayed, or in the first state, the first standby effect display may be performed. Even when a game ball enters the starting winning means, the second standby effect display may not be continuously displayed.

  In the first state, the second standby effect display may be continuously displayed only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, or in the first state, the first The second standby effect display may be continuously displayed even in a case other than when the game ball enters the start winning means.

  Also, only in the first state, even if the game ball has entered the first starting winning means, the second standby effect display may be continuously displayed, even in a state other than the first state, Even when a game ball enters the first start winning means, the second standby effect display may be continuously displayed.

In addition, “a voice output unit [for example, speaker 120 or the like] capable of outputting a plurality of types of voices is provided,
One of the plurality of types of sounds is a first start winning sound [for example, a starting winning sound corresponding to a default stage shown in FIG. 50 (h)].
The first start winning sound is a sound that may be output when a game ball enters the first start winning means,
Icons related to the first symbol variation display [eg, variation icons, hold icons, etc.] can be displayed,
When a game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the icon is not displayed, and the first starting winning sound is output [for example, FIG. As shown in (h), in the state where the small hit game is being executed during the display of the animation demo, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, a start winning sound is output. But the change icon (hold icon) is not displayed etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the audio output means may be capable of outputting only a plurality of types of audio, or may be capable of outputting anything other than the plurality of types of audio. Further, the sound output means may be one that always outputs a plurality of kinds of sounds, or may be one that does not always output a plurality of kinds of sounds.

  The sound output means may be capable of outputting only the first start winning sound, or may be capable of outputting a start winning sound other than the first starting winning sound. Further, the sound output means may always output the first start winning sound, or may output the first start winning sound in some cases.

  The first start winning sound may be output only when a game ball enters the first start winning means, or the first start winning means may be output when the game ball enters the first start winning means. There may be a case where the output is also performed in a case other than the case where it is performed. The first start winning sound may be always output when a game ball enters the first start winning means, or may be output when a game ball enters the first start winning means. There may be a case where there is no output.

  Further, only the icon related to the first symbol variation display may be displayed, or something other than the icon related to the first symbol variation display may be displayed. Further, an icon related to the first symbol variation display may be displayed, or an icon related to the first symbol variation display may not be displayed.

  Further, an icon related to only the first symbol variation display may be displayed, or an icon related to a symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display may be displayed.

  Also, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the icon is not displayed, only the first start winning sound may be output, or the first state in the first state When the game ball enters the start winning prize means, an icon may not be displayed and a sound other than the first start prize sound may be output. Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, the icon is not displayed, the first start winning sound may be output without fail, or the first state in the first state When the game ball enters the start winning unit, the icon may not be displayed and the first start winning sound may not be output.

  Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, only the icon is not displayed, the first start winning sound may be output, or the first state in the first state When a game ball enters the start winning means, nothing other than the icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound may be output.

  Also, only when a game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the icon may not be displayed and the first starting winning sound may be output, or the first state may be output in the first state. The icon may not be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output in cases other than the case where the game ball enters the starting winning means.

  Further, when the game ball enters only the first start winning means in the first state, the icon is not displayed, the first start winning sound may be output, or the first state in the first state. Even when the game ball has entered the start winning means other than the start winning means, the icon may not be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output.

  Further, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means only in the first state, the icon is not displayed, the first starting winning sound may be output, or even in a state other than the first state When the game ball has entered the first start winning means, the icon may not be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output.

Also, a case where a game ball enters the first start winning means in a state where the second symbol change display is being executed while the second standby effect display is being displayed in the first game state. The display is switched from the second standby effect display to the symbol change effect display, the icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is output [for example, as shown in FIGS. 52 (d) to 52 (f)]. As described above, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 in a state where the animation demo is displayed while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the starting winning sound is output and the animation demo is displayed. The display will be switched to the decorative display, and a floating icon (hold icon) will be displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in a state where the second symbol change display is being performed during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means, the second Switching from the standby effect display to the symbol fluctuation effect display, an icon may be displayed, only the first start winning sound may be output, or the second during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state. In the state where the symbol variation display is being executed, when a game ball enters the first start winning means, the second standby effect display is switched to the symbol variation effect display, an icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is displayed. Other sounds may also be output. Further, in a state where the second symbol change display is being executed during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means, the second standby Switching from the effect display to the symbol change effect display, an icon is displayed, the first start winning sound may be output without fail, or the second symbol during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state. In the state where the fluctuation display is being executed, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the display switches from the second standby effect display to the symbol fluctuation effect display, an icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is displayed. It may not be output.

  Further, in a state where the second symbol change display is being executed during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means, the second standby Switching from the effect display to the symbol change effect display, only the icon is displayed, the first start winning sound may be output, or the second symbol during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state. In the state where the fluctuation display is being executed, when a game ball enters the first start winning means, the display switches from the second standby effect display to the symbol fluctuation effect display, and other than the icons are displayed, and the first start is displayed. A winning sound may be output.

  Further, in a state where the second symbol change display is being executed during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means, the second standby Switching from the effect display only to the symbol fluctuation effect display, the icon may be displayed, the first start winning sound may be output, or the second symbol during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state. In the state where the fluctuation display is being executed, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display is switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than the symbol fluctuation effect display, an icon is displayed, and the first A start winning sound may be output.

  Also, in the state where the second symbol change display is being executed during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state, only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the second Switch from the standby effect display to the symbol fluctuation effect display, an icon may be displayed, the first start winning sound may be output, or the second during the display of the second standby effect display in the first gaming state In a state where the symbol variation display is being executed, even when the game ball has not entered the first starting winning means, the second standby effect display is switched to the symbol variation effect display, an icon is displayed, One start winning sound may be output.

  Further, only in a state where the second symbol change display is being executed during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state, if a game ball enters the first starting winning means, the second Switching from the standby effect display to the symbol fluctuation effect display, an icon may be displayed, the first start winning sound may be output, or the second symbol during the display of the second standby effect display in the first game state. Even in a state other than the state in which the fluctuation display is being executed, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the second standby effect display is switched to the symbol fluctuation effect display, an icon is displayed, and the first icon is displayed. A start winning sound may be output.

Also, "It is possible to shift to one of multiple production stages,
The first start winning sound is output in a mode corresponding to the effect stage being executed among the plurality of effect stages [for example, FIG. 52 (f), FIG. 52 (f ′) and FIG. 52 (f ′). As shown in '), when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, a starting winning sound corresponding to the stage is output, etc.],
When a game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, the game is executed when the display of the second standby effect display is started among the plurality of types of effect stages. The first start winning sound is output in a mode corresponding to the stage of the middle stage. [For example, as shown in FIGS. , The starting prize sound corresponding to the stage before shifting to the animation demo is output, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, it may be possible to shift to only one of the plurality of types of effect stages, or to other than one of the plurality of types of effect stages. In addition, the stage may be always shifted to one of the plurality of types of stage, or may not be shifted to one of the plurality of types of stage.

In addition, only the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the running stage among the plurality of stage stages, or the running stage corresponding to the running stage among the plurality of stage stages may be output. In this manner, sounds other than the first start winning sound may be output. In addition, the first start winning prize sound may be always output in a mode corresponding to the running stage of the plurality of stage stages, or may correspond to the running stage of the plurality of stage stages. The first start winning sound may not be output in such a manner.

  Further, the first start winning prize sound may be output only in a mode corresponding to the running stage of the plurality of stage stages, or may correspond to the running stage of the plurality of stage stages. The first start winning sound may be output in an aspect other than the aspect described above.

  In addition, the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to only the effect stage being executed among the effect stages of the plurality of types, or the effect stage other than the effect stage being executed among the effect stages of the plurality of types. The first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the effect stage.

  Also, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, the game is being executed when the display of the second standby effect display of a plurality of types of effect stages is started. Only the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the given stage, or if a game ball enters the first starting winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, a plurality of types are provided. Of the effect stages, the sound other than the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the effect stage that was being executed when the display of the second standby effect display was started. Also, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, the game is being executed when the display of the second standby effect display of a plurality of types of effect stages is started. The first start winning sound may be always output in a mode corresponding to the given stage, or when a game ball enters the first starting winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, a plurality of types are provided. The first start winning sound may not be output in a mode corresponding to the effect stage being executed when the display of the second standby effect display is started among the effect stages.

  Also, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, the game is being executed when the display of the second standby effect display of a plurality of types of effect stages is started. The first start winning sound may be output only in a mode corresponding to the given stage, or when a game ball enters the first starting winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, a plurality of types are provided. The first start winning sound may be output in a mode other than the mode corresponding to the effect stage that is being executed when the display of the second standby effect display is started among the effect stages.

  Also, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, the game is being executed when the display of the second standby effect display of a plurality of types of effect stages is started. The first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding only to the given stage, or when a game ball enters the first starting winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, a plurality of types are provided. The first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to an effect stage other than the effect stage being executed when the display of the second standby effect display is started among the effect stages.

  Also, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, the game is being executed only when the display of the second standby effect display of a plurality of types of effect stages is started. The first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the effect stage that was the first stage, or when a game ball enters the first start winning unit while the second standby effect display is being displayed, a plurality of types are provided. Even if the first start winning sound is output in a mode corresponding to the production stage that was being executed when the display other than when the display of the second standby production display was started among the production stages Good.

  In addition, only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, the process is executed when the display of the second standby effect display of the plurality of types of effect stages is started. The first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the effect stage that was in the middle, or a case other than when a game ball enters the first start winning means during the display of the second standby effect display. Also in this case, the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the effect stage that was being executed when the display of the second standby effect display among the plurality of effect stages was started.

Also, "It is possible to shift to one of multiple production stages,
The first start winning sound is output in a mode corresponding to the effect stage being executed among the plurality of effect stages [for example, FIG. 52 (f), FIG. 52 (f ′) and FIG. 52 (f ′). As shown in '), when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230, a starting winning sound corresponding to the stage is output, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of production stages is a default production stage [for example, a default stage shown in FIG. 52 (a)],
When a game ball enters the first starting winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, the first starting winning sound is output in a mode corresponding to the default effect stage.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, it may be possible to shift to only one of the plurality of types of effect stages, or to other than one of the plurality of types of effect stages. In addition, the stage may be always shifted to one of the plurality of types of stage, or may not be shifted to one of the plurality of types of stage.

In addition, only the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the running stage among the plurality of stage stages, or the running stage corresponding to the running stage among the plurality of stage stages may be output. In this manner, sounds other than the first start winning sound may be output. In addition, the first start winning prize sound may be always output in a mode corresponding to the running stage of the plurality of stage stages, or may correspond to the running stage of the plurality of stage stages. The first start winning sound may not be output in such a manner.

  Further, the first start winning prize sound may be output only in a mode corresponding to the running stage of the plurality of stage stages, or may correspond to the running stage of the plurality of stage stages. The first start winning sound may be output in an aspect other than the aspect described above.

  In addition, the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to only the effect stage being executed among the effect stages of the plurality of types, or the effect stage other than the effect stage being executed among the effect stages of the plurality of types. The first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the effect stage.

  Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, only the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the default effect stage, If a game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, sounds other than the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the default effect stage. Further, when a game ball enters the first start winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, the first start winning sound may be always output in a mode corresponding to the default effect stage, When the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, the first start winning sound may not be output in a mode corresponding to the default effect stage.

  Further, when the game ball enters the first start winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, the first start winning sound may be output only in a mode corresponding to the default effect stage, When a game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, the first start winning sound may be output in a mode other than the mode corresponding to the default effect stage.

  Further, when a game ball enters the first start winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding only to the default effect stage, When a game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed, the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to an effect stage other than the default effect stage.

  Also, the first start winning sound may be output in a mode corresponding to the default effect stage only when the game ball enters the first start winning means while the second standby effect display is being displayed. Even if the game ball does not enter the first start winning means during the display of the second standby effect display, even if the first start winning sound is output in a mode corresponding to the default effect stage Good.

In addition, “One of the plurality of displays is a first big hit notice display [for example, a big hit in which the characters“ Preparing for big hit !! ”shown in FIGS. 35D to 35G are displayed. Notice, etc.]
In the first game state, in the state where the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display is performed, a game ball is provided to the first starting winning means. , The display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first big hit notice display [for example, as shown in FIGS. In the state, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started during the animation demonstration and the special figure 2 is changing during the big hit change, the special figure 2 big hit notice is displayed with the character "Preparing for the big hit !!" The display changes, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the first gaming state, in the state where the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display is performed, a game ball is provided to the first starting winning means. When entering, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display only to the first big hit notice display, or in the first game state, the big hit symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display When the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the state where the second symbol variation display is being executed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than the first big hit notice display. . In the first game state, the game ball enters the first starting winning means in a state where the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display is being executed. Then, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first big hit notice display, or in the first game state, the big hit symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display. When the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the state where the symbol variation display is executed, the display may not be switched from the second standby effect display to the first big hit notice display.

  Further, in the first gaming state, in the state where the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display is performed, the game ball is only provided to the first start winning means. When entering, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first big hit notice display, or in the first game state, the big hit symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display In the state where the symbol variation display is executed, when the game ball enters the start winning means other than the first start winning means, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first big hit notice display. .

  Also, in the first game state, only when the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display is executed, the game ball is provided to the first starting winning means. When entering, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first big hit notice display, or in the first game state, the big hit symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display Even in a state other than the state in which the symbol variation display is executed, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first big hit notice display.

  Also, only in the first gaming state, in the state where the second symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display is performed, the game ball is placed on the first starting winning means. When entering, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first big hit notice display, or even in a game state other than the first game state, the big hit symbol is displayed during the display of the second standby effect display. When a game ball enters the first starting winning means in a state where the displayed second symbol change display is being executed, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first big hit notice display. .

In addition, one of the plurality of displays is a first standby effect display [for example, a display of a symbol demonstration shown in FIG.
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed,
The first standby effect display is a display different from the second standby effect display,
After the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display [for example, in FIGS. 41 (c) to 41 (d)]. As shown, the display has changed from the display of the symbol demo to the display of the animation demo, etc.],
The first standby effect display is a display including a display in a mode in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Including the display of the mode in which the pattern is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorations of "decoration 1"],
In the first game state, in a state where the small hitting game is being executed while the first standby effect display is being displayed, if a game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first , The icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is output [for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (e) to FIG. When a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 in a state where an animation demonstration is being displayed during a game, a reserve icon is displayed in a reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 and a start winning is achieved. Sound is output etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first standby effect display may be displayed only in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed. Alternatively, the first symbol change display may not be executed in the first game state, and may be displayed in a state other than the state in which the big hit game is not executed. Further, the first standby effect display may be one that is always displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed, The first symbol change display may not be displayed in the first gaming state, and may not be displayed in the state where the big hit game is not executed.

  The first standby effect display may be partially different from the second standby effect display, or may be entirely different.

  Also, after the first standby effect display is displayed, the display may be switched only from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display, or the first standby effect display is displayed. Later, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to a display other than the second standby effect display. Further, the display may always be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display after the first standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display may be performed after the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may not be switched from the one standby effect display to the second standby effect display.

  Also, the display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display only after the first standby effect display is displayed, or the first standby effect display is displayed. The display may be switched from the first standby effect display to the second standby effect display even at times other than after.

  Further, the first standby effect display may include only the display of the mode in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, or may include the display other than the display of the mode in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Is also good. Further, the first standby effect display may necessarily include a display in a mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may not include a display in a mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. You may.

  Further, in the first gaming state, in the state where the small hitting game is being executed during the display of the first standby effect display, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first standby effect While the display is continuously performed, an icon may be displayed and only the first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, the small hitting game may be performed during the display of the first standby effect display. When the game ball enters the first starting prize means in the state of being executed, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, an icon is displayed, and a sound other than the first starting prize sound is displayed. May also be output. Further, in the first gaming state, in the state where the small hitting game is being executed during the display of the first standby effect display, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first standby effect While the display is continuously performed, an icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be always output, or in the first game state, the small hitting game may be performed during the display of the first standby effect display. In a state where the game ball has entered the first start winning means in the running state, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, the icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is not output. There may be cases.

  Further, in the first gaming state, in the state where the small hitting game is being executed during the display of the first standby effect display, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first standby effect While the display is continuously performed, only the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, the small hitting game may be performed during the display of the first standby effect display. In the case where the game ball enters the first starting winning means in a state where the first starting winning means is being executed, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, and other than the icon is displayed, and the first starting winning sound is displayed. May be output.

  Further, in the first gaming state, in the state where the small hitting game is being executed during the display of the first standby effect display, when the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first standby effect While only the display is continuously performed, an icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, the small hitting game may be performed during the display of the first standby effect display. When the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the state of being executed, the display other than the first standby effect display is continuously performed, an icon is displayed, and the first starting winning sound is displayed. May be output.

  In the first gaming state, the first standby state is displayed only when the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the state where the small hitting game is being executed during the display of the first standby effect display. While the effect display is continuously performed, an icon may be displayed and a first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, the small hitting game is displayed during the display of the first standby effect display. In the running state, even when the game ball does not enter the first start winning means, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, an icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is displayed. May be output.

  Further, in the first game state, in the state where the small hitting game is being executed during the display of the first standby effect display, if the game ball enters only the first start winning means, the first standby While the effect display is continuously performed, an icon may be displayed and a first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, the small hitting game is displayed during the display of the first standby effect display. In the running state, even when the game ball enters the start winning means other than the first start winning means, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, the icon is displayed, and the first start is displayed. A winning sound may be output.

  Also, in the first game state, only when the small hitting game is being executed during the display of the first standby effect display, if the game ball enters the first start winning means, the first standby While the effect display is continuously performed, an icon may be displayed and a first start winning sound may be output, or in the first game state, the small hitting game is displayed during the display of the first standby effect display. Even in a state other than the running state, when the game ball enters the first start winning means, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, an icon is displayed, and the first start winning sound is displayed. May be output.

  Also, only in the first gaming state, in the state where the small hitting game is being executed during the display of the first standby effect display, if the game ball enters the first starting winning means, the first standby The effect display is continuously performed, an icon is displayed, the first start winning sound may be output, or even in a game state other than the first game state, the first standby effect display is being displayed. When the game ball enters the first starting winning means in a state where the small hitting game is being executed, the first standby effect display is continuously performed, the icon is displayed, and the first starting A winning sound may be output.

Also, the display may switch from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display after the second standby effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 51 (h) to FIG. As shown in i), the display is switched from the animation demo to the symbol demo, etc.],
After the game ball enters the first start winning means in the first state, from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display in a state where the execution of the small hitting game is continued. When the display is switched, the icon is displayed and the first start winning sound is output [for example, as shown in FIGS. 51 (f) to 51 (i), the animation demonstration is performed during the small hit game. After the game ball wins in the first special figure starting port (upper) 230 in the displayed state, when the display shifts from the animation demo to the symbol demo during the continuation of the small hit game, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. For example, a hold icon is displayed in the area 281 and a start winning sound is output],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display may be switched only from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display after the second standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display is displayed. After that, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to a display other than the first standby effect display. Also, the display may always be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display after the second standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display may be displayed. The display may not be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display later.

  Also, the display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display only after the second standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display may be displayed. The display may be switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display even at times other than after.

  Also, after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the display switches from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display while the execution of the small hitting game is continued. In this case, an icon may be displayed and only the first starting winning sound may be output, or after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of the small hitting game is continued. When the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display in the state of being turned on, an icon may be displayed and a start winning sound other than the first start winning sound may be output. Also, after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the display switches from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display while the execution of the small hitting game is continued. In this case, an icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be always output, or after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of the small hitting game is continued. When the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display in a state where the sound is displayed, an icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may not be output.

  Also, after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the display switches from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display while the execution of the small hitting game is continued. In this case, only the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of the small hitting game is continued. When the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display in a state in which the icon is displayed, something other than the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output.

  Also, after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the display switches from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display while the execution of the small hitting game is continued. Only when the icon is displayed, the first start winning sound may be output, or after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of the small hitting game is continued. In addition to the case where the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display in the state of performing, the icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output.

  In addition, after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the display from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display is performed only when the execution of the small hitting game is continued. In the case of switching, an icon may be displayed and a first start winning sound may be output, or after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of the small hitting game is continued. When the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display even in a state other than the displayed state, an icon may be displayed and a first start winning sound may be output.

  Also, only after the game ball has entered the first starting winning means in the first state, the second standby effect display is displayed from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display while the execution of the small hitting game is continued. Is switched, an icon may be displayed and the first start winning sound may be output, or in addition to after the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the small hit game When the display is switched from the second standby effect display to the first standby effect display in a state where the execution is continued, an icon may be displayed and a first start winning sound may be output.

Also, it is possible to execute a certain jackpot notice [for example, a one-shot announcement effect shown in FIG.
The certain jackpot notice is a notice executed in response to a game ball entering the first start winning means, and corresponds to the entry of the game ball into the first start winning means. It is a notice that may be executed when the result of the first symbol variation display executed is a result in which a big hit symbol is displayed,
A state in which the second symbol variation display is executed in a state where the icon is not displayed during the display of the symbol variation effect display (hereinafter, referred to as a “second state [for example, as shown in FIG. Then, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the state shifts to SP reach during the variation display of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, and the variation icon and the hold icon are not displayed. ),
When a game ball enters the first starting winning means in the second state, the certain big hit notice may be executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 (i) to 55 (k)]. As described above, during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the display shifts to SP reach during the variation display of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, and the first icon is displayed in a state in which the variation icon and the hold icon are not displayed. When a game ball wins in the figure starting port (upper) 230, a one-shot announcement effect is performed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only a certain jackpot notice may be executed, or a notice other than a certain jackpot notice may be executed. In addition, a certain jackpot notice may be always executed, or a certain jackpot notice may not be executed.

  In addition, there may be a case where only the second state (a state in which the icon is not displayed during the display of the symbol variation effect display and the second symbol variation display is being executed) or only the second state is provided. The state may be other than the state. In addition, the second state may be established, or the second state may not be established.

  Further, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means in the second state, only a certain big hit notice may be executed, or the first starting winning means may be executed in the second state. When a game ball enters the game, a notice other than a certain big hit notice may be executed. In addition, when a game ball enters the first start winning means in the second state, a certain jackpot notice may be executed without fail, or the game ball may enter the first start winning means in the second state. When entering, a certain jackpot notice may not be executed.

  In addition, a certain jackpot notice may be executed only when a game ball enters the first starting winning means in the second state, or the first starting winning means may be executed in the second state. In addition to the case where the game ball enters the game, there may be a case where a certain big hit notice is executed.

  Also, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means only in the second state, a certain jackpot notice may be executed, or the first state may be performed in a state other than the second state. When a game ball enters the starting winning means, a certain jackpot notice may be executed.

Also, it is possible to execute a certain jackpot notice [for example, a one-shot announcement effect shown in FIG.
The certain jackpot notice is a notice executed in response to a game ball entering the first start winning means, and corresponds to the entry of the game ball into the first start winning means. It is a notice that may be executed when the result of the first symbol variation display executed is a result in which a big hit symbol is displayed,
In the case where a game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of the certain big hit notice is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only a certain jackpot notice may be executed, or a notice other than a certain jackpot notice may be executed. In addition, a certain jackpot notice may be always executed, or a certain jackpot notice may not be executed.

  Further, when a game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, only execution of a certain big hit notice need not be started, or the first starting in the first state. When a game ball enters the winning means, execution other than execution of a certain big hit notice may not be started. Further, in the case where the game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of a certain big hit notice may not necessarily be started, and the first starting in the first state When a game ball enters the winning means, execution of a certain big hit notice may be started.

  Also, only when a game ball enters the first starting winning means in the first state, the execution of a certain big hit notice may not be started, or the first starting winning in the first state. Even in cases other than when the game ball enters the means, execution of a certain big hit notice may not be started.

  In the case where the game ball enters the first starting winning means only in the first state, the execution of a certain big hit notice may not be started, or the state other than the first state may be used. When a game ball enters one start winning means, the execution of a certain big hit notice may not be started.

In addition, it is provided with an operation means [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 190, etc.] provided at a position where the operation can be performed by the player,
One of the plurality of displays is a setting display [for example, a setting screen display shown in FIGS. 45 (c) to 45 (d)].
The setting display is a display including a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options,
The setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the second standby effect display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 45 (a) to FIG. ), When the effect button 136 is operated once during the display of the symbol demonstration, the display of the setting screen is displayed, etc.],
Even if the certain operation is performed by the operation unit in the first state, the setting display is not displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position operable by the player, or may be provided at a position other than the position operable by the player. . Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate the player, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate the player.

  Further, the setting display may include only a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or instruct to select one option from a plurality of options. A display other than the display may be included. In addition, the setting display may always include a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or instruct to select one option from a plurality of options. The display may not include the display.

  Further, when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the second standby effect display is being displayed, only the setting display may be displayed, or the second standby effect display may be displayed. When a certain operation is performed by the operation unit in a state where the setting is performed, a display other than the setting display may be displayed. In addition, when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit in a state where the second standby effect display is displayed, the setting display may be always displayed, or a state where the second standby effect display is displayed. In some cases, the setting display may not be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit.

  In addition, the setting display may be displayed only when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the second standby effect display is being displayed, or the second standby effect display may be displayed. The setting display may be displayed in a state other than when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit in a state where the setting is performed.

  Further, the setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit only in a state where the second standby effect display is displayed, or the second standby effect display may be displayed. The setting display may be displayed even when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit in a state other than the state in which the setting is performed.

  In addition, a setting display may be displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while only the second standby effect display is displayed, or a setting other than the second standby effect display. The setting display may be displayed even when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit while the display is being displayed.

  Further, even when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit in the first state, only the setting display need not be displayed, or a certain operation by the operation unit is performed in the first state. Even in this case, a display other than the setting display may not be displayed. In addition, even when a certain operation is performed by the operation unit in the first state, the setting display does not always need to be displayed, and a certain operation is performed by the operation unit in the first state. Even in this case, a setting display may be displayed.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,
A first symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 or the like] capable of executing a first symbol variation display;
A second symbol display means [for example, a second special figure display device 214 or the like] capable of executing a second symbol variation display;
A game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 or the like) capable of controlling any one of a plurality of game states;
A certain gate (for example, a jackpot generating gate 252, etc.) through which a game ball can enter;
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming table with
In some cases, both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are performed simultaneously [for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212. And the symbol variation display on the second special figure display device 214 may be performed at the same time],
One game state of the plurality of game states is a first game state [for example, a special figure low probability general figure low probability state or the like],
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a special figure high probability state general figure low probability state or the like],
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display [for example, a variation display of a decorative symbol displayed in accordance with the variation display of the special figure 1 shown in FIGS. 21 (b) to 22 (x). Effect display (decorative design fluctuation effect display), etc.]
The symbol variation effect display is a display including a variation display of a decorative symbol,
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. In the figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, the decoration design fluctuation effect display is started at the same time as the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1],
In the first gaming state, the symbol variation effect display according to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (b) to 43 (e), In the special figure low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, the decoration design fluctuation effect display is not started in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure 2],
After the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means, a certain period [for example, a period during which the big hit occurrence gate monitoring state is effective from t83 to t85 in FIG. 39] is started,
Even after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the certain period is started,
When a game ball enters the certain gate in the certain period, a big hit game is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 39, during a period in which the big hit occurrence gate monitoring state shown from t83 to t85 is valid, the time shown at t84 When a game ball passes the big hit generation gate 252 at the timing, a big hit game is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of displays is a gate entry promotion display [for example, a display that promotes passing through the big hit generation gate 252, such as "right-click and pass through the big hit generation gate!" Shown in FIG. 41 (j). Etc.]
One display of the plurality of displays is a first standby effect display [for example, a display of a symbol demonstration shown in FIG. 41 (c)].
One of the plurality of displays is a gate entry standby state display [for example, a display of a gate entry standby effect shown in FIG. 41 (j) or the like].
The gate entry promotion display is a display that prompts a game ball to enter the certain gate,
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed,
The first standby effect display is a display including a display of a mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Including the display of the mode in which the display is stopped with the combination of the decorations of "decoration 1"],
The gate entry standby state display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period,
In the first game state, after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the gate entry promotion display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (h) to (j). After the big hit symbol is displayed on the special map 2, a display for facilitating the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is displayed],
In some cases, both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby state display are displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. Etc. are superimposed on the display of the entry waiting effect],
In some cases, both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display are displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (f), a display promoting the passage of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is displayed. Etc. are superimposed on the symbol demo display],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.
In addition, one of the plurality of displays is a big hit display [for example, a big hit start effect shown in FIG. 41 (i) or the like].
In the first game state, the big hit display is displayed after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as the “first In the case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (h) to (j), the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2 and then the big hit start effect is displayed, and then the passage of the big hit generating gate 252 is promoted. Is displayed, etc.] ").)
In the first gaming state, when the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the big hit display after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means (hereinafter, referred to as a "second In the case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 42 (d) to (f), the passing of the big hit occurrence gate 252 is promoted without displaying the big hit start effect after the big hit symbol is displayed on the special figure 2. Is displayed, etc.] ").)
In the first case, both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby state display are displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (j), the passage of the big hit generation gate 252 is promoted. The display is superimposed on the display of the gate entry standby effect],
In the second case, both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display are displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. The display to promote is displayed over the display of the symbol demo, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In the following, it will be additionally described including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 1)
・ Pachinko machine which can be played with at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities ・ Providing effect means ・ Providing a plurality of game ball detecting means ・ At least at an execution timing related to the detection result of the out ball detecting means A game console that may execute a setting suggestion effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first setting suggestion effect”).

(Appendix 2)
-A control means capable of starting one of a plurality of game states is provided.-A first setting suggestion effect may be executed in a first game state (for example, a normal state).-A second game state. A game console that may execute the first setting suggestion effect during a big hit or during an electric support.

(Appendix 3)
-A game console where the first setting suggestion effect may be executed during the period when the symbol variation display is not being executed (during the demonstration or customization setting, when simply firing but not winning).

(Appendix 4)
-A game console that is provided with another game ball detection means for a starting port, a general winning opening, and the like.

(Appendix 5)
When the condition for executing the first setting suggestion effect is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect may be performed at the first timing (for example, immediately) after the condition is satisfied. When the condition for executing the setting suggestion effect is satisfied, the first setting suggestion effect is performed at a second timing after the condition is satisfied (for example, by judging the next fluctuation or the condition of the effect content). In some cases, a gaming table where the first timing and the second timing are different.

(Appendix 6)
A second setting suggestion effect with a fixed timing (for example, ending of a big hit game) can be executed. A game console that may be executed in duplicate with the second setting suggestion effect.

(Appendix 7)
-A game console where the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect overlap.

(Appendix 8)
A game console where the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect do not overlap.

(Appendix 9)
・ The second setting suggestion effect with fixed timing (for example, ending of big hit game) can be executed. ・ If the timing overlaps with the second setting suggestion effect, delay or execute the first setting suggestion effect. Not a gaming table.

(Appendix 10)
-A game console provided with a means of informing about the execution timing of the first setting suggestive effect.

(Appendix 11)
-A pachinko machine that can be played with at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities.-Includes a production means that can execute a first notification effect.-The first notification device can execute at least information on a game. The first notification effect is a game console that may be executed with setting suggestions.

(Appendix 12)
A game console where it may be possible to identify whether the first notification effect has been notified including setting suggestions.

  It should be noted that there may be cases where the identification is not possible. The first notification effect executed at the following first timing may include a setting suggestion.

(Appendix 13)
・ The first notification effect is executed at the first timing when setting suggestion is not included. ・ The first notification effect is executed at the second timing different from the first timing when setting suggestion is included. Gaming table to be played.

(Appendix 14)
-The first notification effect is a game console that is at least a performance related to a big hit.

(Appendix 15)
A game console that can identify that the first notification effect includes a setting suggestion due to the different number display mode.

(Appendix 16)
A game console on which a first notification effect including a setting suggestion is executed at a second timing when a certain condition is satisfied.

(Appendix 17)
-A gaming table with a difference in the appearance rate when the first notification effect includes a setting suggestion.

(Appendix 18)
・ A game console where re-lottery can be executed.

(Appendix 19)
A game console capable of displaying the number of drills (for example, display every "5000").

(Appendix 21)
・ Pachinko machine that can be played with at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities ・ Equipped with an effect means capable of executing a re-lottery effect・ The gaming state after the big hit may be the second gaming state. A gaming table where settings are suggested in a pattern.

  It is possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic as a production means.

  The distribution differs depending on the distribution such as slow fluctuation, high-speed fluctuation, frame advance fluctuation, and dropping of the role of re-lottery, and may function as a setting guess.

(Appendix 22)
-Decorative symbol fluctuation display can be displayed-If the symbol (fixed symbol) derived by the re-lottery effect is the first decorative symbol, the first gaming state or the second gaming state starts after the big hit game ends When the confirmed symbol is the second decorative symbol (the first case), the second game state is started after the big hit game ends. In the first case, the second game state is set after the big hit game ends. Is performed (the effect at the time of promotion from "444" to "777" or "777" to "777")
In the case of a re-lottery effect in which the temporarily stopped symbol (temporary symbol) and the fixed symbol become the first decorative symbol (a plurality of types such as “222” → “444”, “444” → “444”) There is a case where the effect is performed (the second case) ・ The re-lottery effect in the second case includes the setting suggestion (if not performed, the setting suggestion is not included)
Game console.

(Appendix 23)
・ If the confirmed symbol is the first decorative symbol, the promotion effect may be executed during the big hit game. ・ There are multiple types of the first decorative symbol (A and B), and the promotion effect is successful when A <B. The re-lottery effect when the temporary symbol is B and the final symbol is A is a game console that includes a setting suggestion.

  In some cases, expectation can be given to the change of the design itself.

(Appendix 24)
・ In the case of B → A, execute the first effect (downgrade-like, but promotion is ignored by the first effect)
Game console.

  In some cases, discomfort can be associated with game value.

(Appendix 25)
In the case of A → A, the first effect may or may not be executed.If the first effect is executed, the second game state is started after the end of the big hit game. When the effect is not executed, a gaming table in which the first gaming state or the second gaming state is started after the end of the big hit game.

(Supplementary Note 26)
・ Fixed design may be related to setting suggestion (Fixed design “444” where the first effect was performed → Set 4 or more, etc.)
Game console.

(Appendix 31)
-Simultaneous variation machine-Attacker may perform opening / closing operation with respect to special figure 2 fluctuation during special figure 1 fluctuation-A game console that performs pre-reading notice with decorative design fluctuation display at least during the period related to attacker opening / closing operation.

  It is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the notice means.

(Appendix 32)
A game console for which the pre-reading notice is started after the fluctuation stop of Tokuzu 2

(Appendix 33)
-The fluctuation of the special figure 2 (at least the small hit fluctuation) is longer than the longest fluctuation of the special figure 1.-A game console where the pre-reading notice is started after the symbol is once derived with the decorative symbol.

  Since it is difficult to determine the timing of the pre-reading notice by grasping the contents of the decorative design change display executed in relation to the change of the special figure 1, the player can start the game after deriving the decorative design without disturbing. In some cases, you can have expectations.

(Supplementary Note 34)
The pre-reading notice is a game console that is executed in association with the suspension of the special figure 1 which is suspended at the start of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 which overlaps the timing at which the opening / closing operation of the attacker due to the small hit is started.

(Appendix 35)
-The look-ahead notice is a game console that does not include a notice about the change of the special figure 1 being executed and targets the change after the next.

(Appendix 36)
-During the opening / closing period of the attacker, the change of Toku-zu 1 is interrupted (real toku-figure change), and only the decorative pattern change display changes.

  From the viewpoint of a special figure, the pre-reading notice may be executed during a certain period after resuming after being interrupted during the opening / closing period of the attacker.

(Appendix 37)
・ Special figure 2 big hit notice at the start of special figure 1 fluctuation after special figure 2 fluctuation start (accurate)
・ A game console that may straddle a plurality of special figure 1 fluctuations.

  However, there are cases where it can be shown as a pre-reading notice.

  In some cases, it may be possible to prompt the user to stop firing during a useless period in which the jackpot is not performed over a long period of time (if one is a jackpot, the other is a non-lottery (losing confirmation)).

(Appendix 38)
-The above two irregular phenomena usually fluctuate mainly in Tokuzu 1 during normal times.-An amusement console that also displays decorative patterns on Tokuzu 1 as a target.

(Appendix 41)
A display means for adding and displaying the number of prize balls acquired in a state advantageous to the player (during a first gaming state: for example, during a small hit rush); and a hitting game occurs during the first gaming state. In some cases, the number of prize balls may not be added and displayed at the same time after the hit game is completed, and the additional display may be performed collectively after the hit game has been completed. A game console that does not perform the addition display when the game has been performed (for example, pending consecutive chan) and performs the addition display collectively after the next hit game is completed.

  It is possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic display means.

  It may be three or more chan.

  The condition other than the reserved consecutive chan may be a probable change (including the next big hit decision).

(Supplementary Note 42)
Certain conditions are pending consecutive chants. An amusement machine that does not display additions but displays pending consecutive Changs.

(Supplementary Note 43)
-A game console that starts to change while displaying the pending consecutive change suggestion display.

  In some cases, it may be possible to start fluctuations during the suggestion of the pending repetition and make a hit immediately.

(Appendix 44)
-The hit includes the big hit and the small hit.-The decorative symbol change display is possible.-The gaming table where the combination of the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol may stop at the same combination.

  Specific symbols (for example, “333” or “777”) may be omitted.

(Appendix 45)
-The attacker has a decorative member on the front side of the opening / closing member.-A big hit includes a long open time, and a small hit is a game console with a short open time and a large number of open times.

  Depending on the type of the hit, it may be difficult to identify the combination of the opening of the big hit or the small hit attacker and the symbol.

(Appendix 46)
-There is a first display mode and a second display mode for the change of the decorative symbol in the first game state.-The size of the decorative symbol during the change is the first display mode> the second display mode. The change related to the hold after the end is performed in at least the second display mode (for example, a change for four holds or until the addition display is completed).
-If the fluctuation is not performed during the period in which the fluctuation is performed in the second display mode, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a size corresponding to the second display mode, and if a hit occurs, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the first display mode. A gaming table.

  In some cases, the off-going portion of the reserved consecutive chan is made inconspicuous and suddenly a big hit symbol is displayed to make it seem immediately that the consecutive consecutive chan is performed.

(Appendix 47)
-The period in which the display mode of the numbers in the prize ball display is not the addition display (period during which the suggestion of the pending consecutive chan is being executed) is different from the others (for example, mosaic, different colors, etc.).
Game console.

(Supplementary Note 51)
・ Minimum configuration of simultaneous fluctuating machine ・ Preliminary display related to suspension of measurement of fluctuation time of special figure A due to small hit of special figure B ・ The contents of the preliminary display are sent from the main at the start of special figure A fluctuation A gaming table determined in relation to certain information to be played.

For example, in a game state in which the special figure A is the main game (for example, the special figure height, the normal figure height), the special figure A starts to change while the special figure B has a small hit, and the symbol stop of the special figure A is stopped. It is not before the B small hit symbol stop (Appendix 52)
The sub is a game table that can specify whether one of the special map A and the special map B is stopped first or whether the special map B is a small hit.

(Appendix 53)
・ There are multiple types of small hits (Pakapaka is different / long / short)
・ Some information includes presence / absence and type of small hits. ・ Sub is a game console that determines the content of the notice display according to the type of small hits in certain information.

  There is a different notice display depending on the small hit type, and as a pre-read notice, for example, the frequency of displaying red and the degree of expectation may be different.

(Appendix 54)
-The notice display is a gaming table based on the pre-reading notice regarding the special figure A and the suspension information at the time of starting the change of the special figure A.

(Supplementary Note 55)
-A game console where the effect display starts in response to the start of the change of the special figure A.-Even if the measurement of the change time of the special figure A is interrupted, the effect display does not interrupt.

(Appendix 56)
・ Ordinary variable display configuration (for example, the display of a certain combination of decorative patterns fluctuates → confirms display)
-A game console in which the display of a certain combination of decorative symbols swings before the notice display is displayed.

(Appendix 57)
・ In the case of a loss, swing fluctuation → notice display → confirmation display (same / different from normal confirmation display) ・ In the case of big hit, swing fluctuation → no notice → confirmation display (same / different from normal confirmation display) .

  In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the user from being mistaken as to whether a continuation of the swing fluctuation may cause a resurrection jackpot.

  The content of the notice display may be different between the case of the SP reach and the loss.

  The production stage may be changed after the SP reach has a very high expectation (for example, the sorry zone).

  It is also possible to make it as follows: Do not miss → Notice display 1 → No stage change, SP reach 1 off → Notice display 2 → No stage change, SP reach 1 off (when there is no small hit) → Stage change may be made , SP reach 2 off → notification display 2 → stage change may be performed.

(Supplementary Note 58)
-When a notice is displayed, a game console that always starts after the end of the small hit in Toku-zu B.

(Appendix 59)
-A game console that does not display a notice when the special figure A starts changing during the special figure B small hit.

(Appendix 60)
-When the special figure A starts to change during the special figure B small hit change, a gaming table where the new special figure B small hit change does not start during the special figure A change.

(Appendix 61)
・ Special figure B is hit during small change of special figure A ・ For a predetermined period after small figure B small hit, right-handed can be returned to left-handed and no notification is given ・ During one special figure A change, right A game console that can be returned to left-handed when hit and can be in three states of notifying, not performing, and performing.

(Appendix 71)
Production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
A plurality of game ball detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed,
A gaming table with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
When a setting change operation is received, at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected,
One game ball detecting means of the plurality of game ball detecting means is an out ball detecting means,
The out ball detecting means is means for detecting at least a game ball that has entered the out mouth,
One of the plurality of effects is a first setting suggestion effect,
The first setting suggestion effect is an effect at least indicating a setting selected from the plurality of settings,
Execution of the first setting suggestion effect is started when the first effect execution condition is satisfied,
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is satisfied at least in relation to the detection result of the out ball detection means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 71,
Control means capable of starting one of the plurality of game states is provided,
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
Execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the first game state,
Execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started in the second game state,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 73)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 71 or 72,
The execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started during a period in which the symbol variation display is not executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 74)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 73,
One game ball detection means of the plurality of game ball detection means is a first game ball detection means,
The first game ball detection means is a means for detecting a game ball that has entered a certain winning opening,
The first effect execution condition is a condition that is established in relation to the detection result of the first game ball detection means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 75)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 74,
Execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started at a first timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied,
Execution of the first setting suggestion effect may be started at a second timing when the first effect execution condition is satisfied,
The first timing and the second timing are different timings,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 76)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 75,
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect whose execution may be started during execution of a certain effect,
It may be in a state where both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 77)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 75,
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect whose execution may be started during execution of a certain effect,
If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed (hereinafter, “a certain period”), after the certain period has elapsed, Execution of the first setting suggestion effect is started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 78)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 75,
One of the plurality of effects is a second setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is a different effect from the first setting suggestion effect,
The second setting suggestion effect is an effect whose execution may be started during execution of a certain effect,
If the first effect execution condition is satisfied during a period in which the second setting suggestion effect may be executed, the execution of the first setting suggestion effect is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 79)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 78,
With achievement degree suggesting means at least suggesting the degree of achievement of the first effect execution condition,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 81)
A game console equipped with a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
When a setting change operation is received, at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected,
One of the plurality of effects is a first notification effect,
The first notification effect is an effect including at least a notification about the game,
The first notification effect is an effect that may include an indication of a setting selected from the plurality of settings,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 82)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 81,
The first notification effect is an effect that may be executed in a manner that can identify that the setting suggestion is included,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 83)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 81 or 82,
Execution of the first notification effect, which does not include the suggestion of the setting in the first case, is started,
The execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting in the first case is not started,
In the second case, execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting may be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 84)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 83,
The execution of the first notification effect not including the suggestion of the setting in the second case is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 85)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 83 or 84,
In the second case where a certain condition is satisfied, the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is started,
Even in the second case, if the certain condition is not satisfied, the execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is not started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 86)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 81 to 85,
The first notification effect is an effect related to at least a jackpot,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 87)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 81 to 86,
In the first notification effect, suggestion of a setting selected from the plurality of settings is performed by a display mode of numbers,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 88)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 81 to 87,
Depending on the setting selected from the plurality of settings, the probability that the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting is executed is different,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 89)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 81 to 88,
One of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect,
The re-lottery effect is an effect in which once the result of the jackpot is displayed in the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbol change display is restarted, and then the result of the jackpot is displayed again.
In the re-lottery effect, a jackpot result (hereinafter, referred to as “first jackpot result”) indicating that there is a possibility of being in the first advantageous state is displayed once, and then the first advantageous state is displayed. There is also a case where the result of the big hit that informs the second advantageous state is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “third case”),
In the re-lottery effect, there is a case where the first jackpot result is once displayed and then the first jackpot result is displayed again (hereinafter, referred to as a "fourth case").
The first notification effect may be executed in the re-lottery effect,
The first notification effect executed in the third case does not include the suggestion of the setting,
The first notification effect executed in the fourth case includes an indication of the setting,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 90)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 81 to 88,
One of the plurality of effects is an effect of displaying the total number of winning prize balls,
The total acquired prize ball number display is a display of the total number of prize balls acquired in at least the jackpot game,
The first notification effect is an effect performed in the effect of displaying the total acquired prize ball number,
When the total acquired prize ball number display indicates the first number, the execution of the first notification effect that does not include the suggestion of the setting is started,
When the total acquired prize ball number display indicates that it is a second number, execution of the first notification effect including the suggestion of the setting may be started,
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 91)
First symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
Display means capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display,
Attackers that can win game balls,
Fluctuating time determining means for determining a fluctuating time of the first symbol fluctuation display,
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices;
A gaming table with
There is a case where both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed simultaneously,
The display means can display a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variation display,
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol change display,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state,
During the period from the start of the execution of the first symbol variation display to the lapse of the variation time determined by the variation time determination means, the attacker responds to the second symbol variation display according to the result of the second symbol variation display. There are cases in which there is a second state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"),
One notice of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The first notice is a notice that is executed during the display of the decorative design change display,
In the first case, the first notice may be executed in a period corresponding to a period in which the attacker is in the second state (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain period”).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 92)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 91,
The certain period is a period started after the timing at which the result of the second symbol change display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 93)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 91 or 92,
A control unit that can be controlled to one of a plurality of game states,
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
A result is displayed in which at least the attacker changes the state to the second state, rather than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display determined by the fluctuation time determining means in the first game state. The variation time length of the second symbol variation display is longer,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 93,
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in response to the execution of the first symbol variation display,
In the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display is not displayed in response to the execution of the second symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 95)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 91 to 94,
In the first case, the first notice may be executed for the first symbol change display being held at the time when the attacker changes state to the second state,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 96)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 91 to 95,
The first notice is not a notice regarding the first symbol change display being executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 97)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 91 to 96,
In the first case, in the period in which the attacker is in the second state, the first symbol variation display is interrupted, but the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, and after the period ends, The first symbol change display resumes,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 98)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 91 to 97,
One notice of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The second notice is a notice regarding the second symbol change display being executed,
The second notice is a notice that may be started when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started during the execution of the second symbol variation display resulting in a big hit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 99)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 98,
The second notice may be executed over the first symbol change display executed plural times,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 100)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 91 to 99,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 101)
Control means controllable to one of a plurality of game states;
Attackers that can win game balls,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming table with
The attacker can change the state from the first state to the second state according to a result of the game,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state,
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the attacker is more likely to be in the second state than the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of displays is a total winning prize ball number display,
The total winning prize ball number display means that after the state transition from the first game state to the second game state, the attacker wins the prize during the state transition to the first game state. This is a display that shows the total number of prize balls acquired.
In the second game state, when the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, after the second state ends, the game balls are transferred to the attacker. In some cases, the number of prize balls according to the winning number may be added to the total acquired prize ball number display and displayed.
In the second game state, if a certain condition is satisfied, even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls win the attacker, After the second state is completed, the number of prize balls according to the number of game balls winning the attacker is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, and then the attacker enters the second state. After the second state is completed, the number of prize balls not added according to the number of winning game balls to the attacker is added to the total acquired prize ball number display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 102)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 101,
The result of the game is a result of the symbol variation display,
The certain condition is that, when the attacker shifts from the first state to the second state, the result of the symbol variation display, which is suspended, indicates that the attacker is in the second state. A condition that contains a result that changes state.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 103)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 102,
In the case where the certain condition is satisfied, at least that the result of the symbol change display of which execution is suspended includes a result that the attacker changes the state to the second state is included. A suggestion display (hereinafter, referred to as a “reserved reunion suggestion display”) is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 104)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 103,
The pending consecutive Chang suggestion display is a display that is continuously displayed even after the attacker has finished the second state and started the symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 105)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 101 to 104,
The second state is a state of both the big hit game state and the small hit game state,
One display of the plurality of displays is a decorative design change display,
There is a case where the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the big hit game state and the result of the decorative symbol change display that shifts to the small hit game state are the same,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 106)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 105,
A decorative member is arranged on the front side of the attacker, and the operation mode of the attacker is difficult to be visually recognized by a player,
In the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the operation mode of the attacker is different,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 107)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 105 or 106,
In the second gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in the first display mode,
In the second game state, the decorative symbol variation display may be displayed in a second display mode,
The size of the decorative pattern in the first display mode is smaller than the size of the decorative pattern in the second display mode,
In the second gaming state, during the period during which the symbol variation display is held when the second state is completed (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain period”), the first display mode is used. Displaying the decorative symbol variation display, if the certain condition is satisfied, even during the certain period, display the decorative symbol variation display in the second display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 108)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 101 to 107,
Even if the attacker enters the second state and one or more game balls wins the attacker, after the second state ends, the number of game balls winning the attacker depends on the winning number of the game balls. In the case where the number of prize balls is not added to the total acquired prize ball number display, after the second state ends, the attacker then becomes the second state and the second state becomes The display of the total acquired prize ball number during a period until the addition of the unacquired prize ball number corresponding to the number of game balls entered into the attacker to the total acquired prize ball number display is completed. Changing the display mode of to another display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 109)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 101 to 108,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 111)
First symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
Attackers that can win game balls,
Fluctuating time determining means for determining a fluctuating time of the first symbol fluctuation display,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
Main control means capable of at least controlling the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means,
Sub-control means at least capable of controlling the display means,
A gaming table with
There is a case where both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed simultaneously,
The attacker is capable of changing the state from the first state to the second state according to the result of the second symbol change display is a small hit,
The second state is a state in which a game ball is more likely to win the attacker than the first state,
In the period from when the execution of the first symbol variation display is started to when the variation time determined by the variation time determining means elapses, the result of the second symbol variation display is the small hit. The attacker may be in the second state (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”) according to
In the first case, the period from when the result of the second symbol variation display becomes the small hit until the period when the attacker is in the second state passes, the first symbol variation display is performed. A state in which the progress of the fluctuation time is interrupted (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain state”),
One of the plurality of displays is a first notice display,
The first notice display may be displayed in association with the certain state,
The first notice display is a display displayed in one of a plurality of display modes,
The sub-control unit is a unit that performs control according to a command from the main control unit,
When the execution of the first symbol variation display is started, a display mode of the first notice display is determined in relation to a certain command transmitted from the main control unit to the sub control unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 112)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 111,
The sub-control means determines which of the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display is first stopped and displayed by the certain command received during the execution of the second symbol variation display. Is a means that can identify
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note 113)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 111 or 112,
The sub-control unit is a unit that can specify whether the result of the second symbol variation display is a small hit by the certain command,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 114)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 111 to 113,
There are a plurality of types of the small hits in which the aspect of the second state is different,
The display mode of the first notice display is determined according to the type of the small hit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 115)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 111 to 114,
The first notice display is, in the first case, a display of a look-ahead notice related to the information of the first symbol change display that is suspended at the time when the execution of the first symbol change display is started. Is,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note 116)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 111 to 115,
One of the plurality of displays is a decorative pattern change display,
The display means can display a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the execution of the first symbol variation display,
Even when the certain state is reached, the decorative pattern change display is continuously displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 117)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 116,
The time from the start of a certain decorative pattern change display in the certain state to the start of display of the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by shaking change, and the certain time in the certain state not being set. The time from the start of the decorative pattern change display to the start of the display of the result of the certain decorative pattern change display by the swing change is the same,
When the certain decorative symbol change display in the certain state is started, after displaying the result of the certain decorative symbol change display in a swinging change, until the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. In the period of, the first notice display may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 118)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 116 or 117,
In the case where the result of the decorative symbol change display in the certain state is a loss result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol change display in a swinging change, the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. In the period until, the first notice may be displayed,
When the result of the decorative symbol change display in the certain state is a big hit result, after displaying the result of the decorative symbol change display with the swing change, the first symbol change display is stopped and displayed. In the period until, there is no case where the first notice display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 119)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 111 to 118,
When the first notice display is displayed, the first notice display is always started after the certain state is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 120)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 111 to 119,
In a case where the start condition of the first symbol variation display is satisfied in the certain state, the first notice display is not displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 121)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 111 to 120,
A control unit that can be controlled to one of a plurality of game states,
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state,
A result is displayed in which at least the attacker changes the state to the second state, rather than the length of the fluctuation time of the first symbol fluctuation display determined by the fluctuation time determining means in the first game state. The variation time length of the second symbol variation display is longer,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 122)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 121,
By hitting right, it is easy to win game balls to the attacker,
In the first gaming state, when the second symbol change display is the small hit and the attacker is in the second state, a certain period after the second state ends Now, do not display a message to prompt the player to turn left,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 131)
A game console equipped with a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
When a setting change operation is received, at least one of a plurality of settings having different jackpot probabilities is selected,
One of the plurality of effects is a re-lottery effect,
After the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the first game state,
After the end of the big hit game, it may transition to the second game state,
The second gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the first gaming state,
The re-lottery effect is an effect that may at least suggest transitioning to the second game state after the end of the big hit game,
In the re-lottery effect, there may be included an indication regarding the selected setting of the plurality of settings,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a characteristic of the effect means.

(Supplementary Note 132)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 131,
The re-lottery effect is an effect in which once the result of the jackpot is displayed in the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbol change display is restarted, and then the result of the jackpot is displayed again.
In the re-lottery effect, a jackpot result (hereinafter, referred to as a “first jackpot result”) indicating that there is a possibility of being in the first gaming state is displayed once, and then the second gaming state is displayed. May be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a "third case") to notify that a big hit
In the re-lottery effect, there is a case where the first jackpot result is once displayed and then the first jackpot result is displayed again (hereinafter, referred to as a "fourth case").
In the fourth case, the game may shift to the first game state after the end of the big hit game,
In the fourth case, the game may shift to the second game state after the end of the big hit game,
In the third case, after the end of the big hit game, transition to the second game state,
In the third case, the first effect is performed,
In the fourth case, the first effect may be performed,
The first effect performed in the third case is an effect suggesting that the game is shifted to the second game state after the end of the big hit game,
The first effect performed in the fourth case is an effect including a suggestion regarding a setting selected from the plurality of settings,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 133)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 132,
In the fourth case, in the big hit game, there may be a promotion effect of whether or not to shift to the second game state after the end of the big hit game,
As a result of the first jackpot, a combination of the first decorative symbols may be displayed,
As a result of the first jackpot, a combination of second decorative symbols may be displayed,
The combination of the first decorative symbol and the combination of the second decorative symbol is a combination of different decorative symbols,
In the fourth case, when the combination of the first decorative symbols is once displayed after the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed, the second game after the end of the big hit game in the promotion effect when the combination of the second decorative symbols is displayed. It is easy to be notified that the state will change,
In the fourth case, when the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed after the combination is once displayed with the combination of the second decorative symbols, a suggestion regarding the selected setting of the plurality of settings is displayed. included,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it can be expected that the combination of the big hit symbols changes.

(Supplementary Note 134)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 133,
In the fourth case, the first effect is performed when the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed after once displayed in the combination of the second decorative symbols,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where discomfort can be associated with a game value.

(Supplementary Note 135)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 133 or 134,
In the fourth case, there is a case where the combination of the first decorative symbols is displayed after being once displayed in the combination of the first decorative symbols (hereinafter, referred to as a “fifth case”),
There is a case where the first effect is executed in the fifth case (hereinafter, referred to as a “sixth case”),
There is a case where the first effect is not executed in the fifth case (hereinafter, referred to as a “seventh case”),

In the sixth case, transition to the second game state after the end of the big hit game,
In the seventh case, the game may shift to the first game state after the end of the big hit game,
In the seventh case, the game may shift to the valley game state after the end of the big hit game,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 136)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 133 to 135,
In the fourth case, there is a case where the combination of the decorative symbols finally confirmed and displayed is a suggestion regarding the setting,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  In the above description, the first symbol display means corresponds to the first special figure display device 212, the second symbol display means corresponds to the second special figure display device 214, and the first game state is designated as a special figure display. In correspondence with the low-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, the second game state has been described as corresponding to the special figure high-probability ordinary figure low-probability state, but the first symbol display means is the second special figure display device 214, The second symbol display means is a first special figure display device 212, the first game state is a special figure high probability general figure low probability state, and the second game state is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. You may make it do. Also, the second game state has been described in association with the special figure high probability general figure low probability state, but may be the special figure high probability general figure high probability state. In other words, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the first special figure starting port (bottom) 231 is easily won in the general figure high probability state, and has a game characteristic that allows the user to digest mainly the special figure 1. However, in the normal figure high probability state, it is easy to win the second special figure starting port, and it is also possible to adopt a game having a game characteristic that allows the special figure 2 to be mainly played.

  FIG. 56 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 56, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the gaming table. That is, the game medium fired from the firing means 901 to the game area 902 is discharged from the game area 902 and can be supplied to the firing means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, the total number of balls held, and the like) and other information is provided below the game area 902 on the front of the gaming table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  In addition, an aspect in which the above-described display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and described above may be adopted, and furthermore, an aspect in which the display means 903 is provided with a touch panel. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 903 can function as an operation unit. Then, an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by a single touch operation, a continuous tapping operation, or a long-pressing operation on the touch panel. May be configured such that a pseudo continuous tapping operation on the touch panel is performed in a state in which is continuously touched. Moreover, you may be comprised so that a long press auto continuous-stroke function may not be made effective. Further, in some effects, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, the touch-and-hold automatic continuous tapping function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, or may be configured to activate more or less effects. . In addition, there are a plurality of effects by a continuous tapping operation on the touch panel, and when performing with the touch panel, the long press automatic continuous tapping function may be configured not to be in an effective state in many cases, or may be configured to be small. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 56 encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine, and uses the enclosed ball as a launching ball to pay out the ball. May be performed by credit.

  Next, a slot machine (turning machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 57 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 57 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001, three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 57) are stored. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, each symbol is printed on a belt-shaped member at an equal interval in an appropriate number, and this belt-shaped member is stuck to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to constitute each of the reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in a vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition, as such display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed other than the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly irradiated. In the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided, and the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. It is configured such that a light-shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates a valid pay line 1014. The activated pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are activated and three medals are bet, five lines, in which the rightward prize line and the upper right prize line are added, are valid as the prize line. The number of the winning lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one medal is bet, a middle horizontal winning line, an upper horizontal winning line, a lower horizontal winning line, Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be made effective as winning lines. Hereinafter, the activated pay line may be referred to as an activated line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that notifies a player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that a player can insert a game medal. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (there is no need to insert a medal) when the player has won a re-game which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, up to three coins are inserted one by one each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals have been inserted, notifies that the game can be started. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert medals when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041, and the insertion includes both. It is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various kinds of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are configured by 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the start lever 1035 is operated by operating the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing down and removing medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the medals bet, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 as an example of operation means is provided. The chance button 1100 allows an operation related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the case of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of a player), and includes a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operation unit.

  Below the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various types of certificate stamps is provided. A title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout port 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided below the title panel 1062.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decoration lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1060 is provided above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063 a and a left shutter 1063 b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game device). Side).

  It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured to display various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is formed in a rectangular shape, and the entirety thereof is configured to be visually recognizable by a player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen may appear irregular. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  The gaming table according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), "inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and displays a lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 which issues a receipt describing a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 5C, electronic data for realizing the present invention May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing the information, and a home video game machine 5000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 2B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data obtaining unit that obtains data related to the game through a mobile phone line, A storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention), and a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 14C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. A home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 3D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and a data-related acquired game ( A storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention), and a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program in which a real machine such as a pachinko machine or the like is simulatedly executed for a home game machine. In this case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of a game console, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a rock ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely enumerate the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is a component included only in each of the description of the embodiment, the example, the modification, the various examples, and the supplementary notes described above, the component is included in the other embodiments, examples, and the like. The present invention may be applied to modified examples, various examples, additional notes, and the like. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders the application, the constituent elements included only in the description of the embodiment, the example, the modification, the various examples, and the additional notes, etc., are included in other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even when applied to examples, various examples, additional notes, and the like, it can be realized as one coherent technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Effect button 208 Decorative pattern display device 210 Normal pattern display device 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 226a General winning opening 230 First special figure start-up port (top)
231 1st special map starting port (bottom)
232 second special figure starting port 234a first variable winning port 235a second variable winning port 240 out port 300 main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 first sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 second sub-controller 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 Memory SWout Out ball detection sensor

Claims (2)

First symbol display means capable of executing a first symbol variation display,
A second symbol display means capable of executing a second symbol variation display,
Game control means that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states,
A certain gate through which game balls can enter;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming table with
There is a case where both the first symbol variation display and the second symbol variation display are executed simultaneously,
One gaming state of the plurality of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One game state of the plurality of game states is a second game state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state different from the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of displays is a symbol variation effect display,
The symbol variation effect display is a display including a variation display of a decorative symbol,
In the first gaming state, the symbol fluctuation effect display is started in response to the start of the first symbol fluctuation display,
In the first game state, the symbol variation effect display according to the start of the second symbol variation display is not started,
A certain period is started after the big hit symbol is displayed on the first symbol display means,
Even after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, the certain period is started,
When a game ball enters the certain gate during the certain period, a big hit game is started ,
One display of the previous Symbol multiple of the display is a gate entry promotion display,
One of the plurality of displays is a first standby effect display,
One of the plurality of displays is a gate approach standby state display,
The gate entry promotion display is a display that prompts a game ball to enter the certain gate,
The first standby effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the first symbol variation display is not executed in the first game state and the big hit game is not executed,
The first standby effect display is a display including a display of a mode in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed,
The gate entry standby state display is a display that may be displayed during the certain period,
Wherein in the first game condition, previous display Symbol gate enters promoted after big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means is displayed,
There is a case where both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby state display are displayed,
There is a case where both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display are displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1,
One of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display,
In the first game state, the big hit display is displayed after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means, and then the gate entry promotion display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as the “first Case).)
In the first gaming state, when the gate entry promotion display is displayed without displaying the big hit display after the big hit symbol is displayed on the second symbol display means (hereinafter, referred to as a "second Case).)
In the first case, both the gate entry promotion display and the gate entry standby state display are displayed ,
In the second case, both the gate entry promotion display and the first standby effect display are displayed .
A gaming table characterized by the following.